P521 en M C31

MiCOM P521
Current Differential Relay

Software Version 2
Technical Manual
P521/EN M/C31
Note:
The technical manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate AREVA technical sales office and request the necessary information. Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of AREVA including settlements of warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of the technical manual. This device MUST NOT be modified. If any modification is made without the express permission of AREVA, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe.
The AREVA logo and any alternative version thereof are trademarks and service marks of AREVA. MiCOM is a registered trademark of AREVA. All trade names or trademarks mentioned herein whether registered or not, are the property of their owners. This manual is provided for informational use only and is subject to change without notice. 2005, AREVA. All rights reserved.
PRODUCT SAFETY AND AWARENESS

Introduction This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment and also includes descriptions of equipment label markings. Documentation for equipment ordered from AREVA T&D is dispatched separately from manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore this guide is provided to ensure that printed information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the recipient. Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents of this Safety Guide. Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is installed, commissioned or serviced. Health and safety The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition. When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage. Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated. Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment. Qualified personnel are individuals who: Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the system to which it is being connected; Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it; Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practices; Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Symbols and external labels on the equipment For safety reasons the following symbols and external labels, which may be used on the equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before the equipment is installed or commissioned.
Symbols
Caution: refer to equipment documentation
Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal.
Note: This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power supply. *NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS GUIDE IS THE DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.
Installing, commissioning and servicing Equipment connections Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated. Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD) precautions are not taken. If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards. Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety. To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used. The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection diagram. Protection Class I Equipment Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment. The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost.
The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm (3.3 mm for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring regulations. The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short as possible.
Equipment use If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. Removal of the equipment front panel/cover Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts, which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed. UL and CSA listed or recognized equipment To maintain UL and CSA approvals the equipment should be installed using UL and/or CSA listed or recognized parts of the following type: connection cables, protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit breakers, insulation crimp terminals, and replacement internal battery, as specified in the equipment documentation. Equipment operating conditions The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits. Current transformer circuits Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety, the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any connections to it. For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies. For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs) Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are fitted to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched. Battery replacement Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible damage to the equipment, buildings and persons. Insulation and dielectric strength testing Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected. Insertion of modules and pcb cards Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized, since this may result in damage. Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card. External test blocks and test plugs Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages. *Note: When a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making them safe.
Fiber optic communication Where fiber optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device. Cleaning The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water, when no connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed. DANGER CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may produce lethal hazardous voltages.
This equipment must not be modified. If any modification is made without the express permission of AREVA T&D, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe. De-commissioning and disposal De-commissioning The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to de-commissioning. Disposal It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided. The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the disposal of batteries.
CONTENTS
Documentation Update P521/EN M/C31
Section 1
Introduction
P521/EN IT/A11
Section 2
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions
P521/EN IN/B21
Section 3
User Guide
P521/EN FT/C31
Section 4
Menu Content Tables
P521/EN HI/B21
Section 5
Technical Data and Curve Characteristics
P521/EN TD/C31
Section 6
Application Guide
P521/EN AP/C31
Section 7
MODBUS Database/IEC60870-5-103
P521/EN GC/C21
Section 8
Commissioning and Maintenance Guide
P521/EN CM/C31
Section 9
Connection Diagrams
P521/EN CO/C31
Section 10
Modem Configuration
P521/EN MC/C31
Section 11
Accessories Commissioning Test and Setting Record Sheets Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility
P521/EN AC/C31
Section 12
P521/EN RS/B21
Section 13
P521/EN VC/C31
Documentation Update MiCOM P521
P521/EN M/C31 Page 1/12
DOCUMENTATION UPDATE FROM VERSION 1A TO 2A

Since version 1A (P521/EN M/B11), several changes on existing features have been amended or added. These are described below: Document Ref. P521/EN IN/B21 6. P521/EN FT/C31 1. 5 5 Section Page No. Description Case dimensions 1st sentence : case size corrected Width dimensions : corrected Description of the MiCOM P521 Relay Paragraph 7 : minor amendments User interface Figure 1 : updated from ALSTOM to AREVA The two areas under the top and bottom flaps Paragraph 1 : series number changed to serial number The battery box Figure 2 : updated Access to the menu Paragraph 1 : figure number changed Relay hardware or software alarms DEFAULT CONFIG. : alarm message re-written Menu contents description Note after figure 3 : re-written OP parameters menu Software version menu : updated Display sub menu E/Gnd Text menu description : 1st sentence amended CT ratio sub menu Vectorial Comp. - Off menu : added LED 5 to 8 configuration sub menus Text column in table : line 3 amended Last line of table : added Led B/up Prot - No menu : amended Led CB Alarm - No menu : added Phase rotation sub menu Heading : changed Communication menu Section re-numbered : was 3.5.3.4 Minor amendments
2.
2.3 2.4 3.2
8 8 9
3.4.2 3.5 3.5.1
13 15 16
3.5.2.1 3.5.2.2
18 19 19 20 20 24 27
3.5.2.3 3.5.2.7
3.5.4
31
P521/EN M/C31 Page 2/12 Document Ref. P521/EN FT/C31 Continued 3.5.4.1 32 Section Page No.
Documentation Update MiCOM P521 Description MODBUS communication menu Date format - PRIVATE menu : description re-written Protection communication menu Protocol - SDLC menu : amended Data Rate - 64k menu : description amended Relay Address - 1A menu : description amended Protection menu Section re-numbered : was 3.5.4.4 [87] Current diff sub menu k1 - 30% menu : description amended k2 - 150% menu : description amended DIT Rx tDwell - 100 ms menu : added High Set - 4.0 IN menu : added I> DMT threshold menu Section re-numbered : was 3.5.5.3 I> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curve menu Section re-numbered : was 3.5.5.4 I> Tms - 1.0 menu : description re-written I> Time Dial - 1.0 menu : added I>> threshold menu I>> Delay Type - DMT menu : description amended I>>>> threshold menu I>>> amended to I>>>> throughout section Third changed to fourth in last paragraph Ie > IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu Ie > Delay Type - DMT menu : DMT changed to IDMT Ie> Tms - 1.0 menu : description re-written Ie> Time Dial - 1.0 menu : added Ie> IDMT threshold, Laborelec curve menu New section : added Ie>> threshold menu Ie>> Delay Type DMT menu : description amended
3.5.4.3 3.5.5
33 34 34 35 35 36 36
3.5.5.1 3.5.5.2.1
3.5.5.2.2
37
3.5.5.2.7
38
3.5.5.2.9
39
3.5.5.3.2
40
3.5.5.3.7
41
3.5.5.3.8
42
Documentation Update MiCOM P521 Document Ref. P521/EN FT/C31 Continued 3.5.5.4.2 3.5.5.5 44 45 Section Page No.
P521/EN M/C31 Page 3/12 Description I2> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu I2> Tms - 0,025 menu : description amended I2> Time Dial - 1.0 menu : added [49] Therm OL sub menu Section re-numbered : was 3.5.3.14.5 Automat. ctrl menu Entries 4 and 11 of the sub menus list : added Commissioning sub menu Loopback Test - OFF menu : minor amendments to description I-Trip commands sub menu New section : added Blocking logic sub menu AUTOMAT. CTRL menu : minor amendments to description Logic select sub menus AUTOMAT. CTRL menu : minor amendments to description Output relays sub menu AUTOMAT. CTRL menu : minor amendments to description Latch of the auxiliary output relays AUTOMAT. CTRL menu : minor amendments to description Inversion of the auxiliary output relays New section : added Inputs sub menu Section re-numbered : was 3.5.4.8 AUTOMAT. CTRL menu : minor amendments to description Broken conductor sub menu Section re-numbered : was 3.5.4.9 AUTOMAT. CTRL menu : minor amendments to description Cold load pick-up sub menu Section re-numbered : was 3.5.4.10 AUTOMAT. CTRL menu : minor amendments to description Circuit breaker failure sub menu Section re-numbered : was 3.5.4.11 AUTOMAT. CTRL menu : minor amendments to description
3.5.6
47
3.5.6.1 3.5.6.4
48 53 - 54
3.5.6.5
55
3.5.6.6
56
3.5.6.7
58
3.5.6.8
61
3.5.6.9
62 - 63
3.5.6.10
64
3.5.6.11
65
3.5.6.12
65
3.5.6.13
67
P521/EN M/C31 Page 4/12 Document Ref. P521/EN FT/C31 Continued 3.5.6.14 4.4 68 76 Section Page No.
Documentation Update MiCOM P521 Description Circuit breaker supervision sub menu Section re-numbered : was 3.5.4.12 AUTOMAT. CTRL menu : minor amendments to description Output relays Section re-written EIA(RS)232 front communication port Figure 4 : changed Menu Content Tables Updated to reflect latest relay software Current differential protection K1 minimum percentage changed to 0% Note after Instantaneous Time : added Note after Drop-off Time : added IDMT Curves : curve definitions clarified Phase overcurrent protection IDMT Curves : curve definitions clarified Neutral/ground/earth overcurrent protection IDMT Curves : curve definitions clarified Negative sequence overcurrent protection IDMT Curves : curve definitions clarified Logic inputs and outputs Logic input : re-written Dielectric withstand Paragraphs 2 and 3 : amended Power frequency interference Section re-written Temperature Operating temperature range details : added after table Pick-up IDMT mathematical formula Curve definitions in table : clarified Reset timer IDMT mathematical formula Type of curves data in table : clarified IEC curves Diagram title and curve definitions : clarified Diagram title and curve definitions : clarified Diagram title and curve definitions : clarified
4.5.2 P521/EN HI/B21 P521/EN TD/C31 1.1 -
77 -
1.2
1.3
1.6 6.2 9.1 10.13
10 15 17 21
11.1 17.1.1
22 26
17.1.2
28
29 30 34
Documentation Update MiCOM P521 Document Ref. P521/EN TD/C31 Continued P521/EN AP/C31 17.1.3 1. Section Page No. 36 39 7
P521/EN M/C31 Page 5/12 Description Diagram curve definitions : clarified Diagram title and curve definitions : clarified Introduction Paragraph 2 : minor amendments Non-protection features Section re-numbered : was 1.1.1 3rd bullet point : last sentence amended Current differential characteristics 1st paragraph on page : minor amendments Table 1 : amendments and additions Last 2 paragraphs of section : added Setting k1 less than 30% New section : added Protection of transformer feeders Section re-written Transformer magnetizing inrush 2nd paragraph after figure 5 : minor amendments Phase correction and zero sequence current filtering New section : added In zone teed loads Paragraph 2 : minor amendments Overcurrent and earth fault protection Figures 8 and 9 : modified Table 6 : amendments and additions Inverse time curves Table 7 : amendments and additions Reset timer Minor amendments throughout section Thermal overload protection Paragraph 5 : minor amendments Table 10 : minor amendments Circuit breaker failure protection operation Paragraph before figure 10 : added CBF fail logic Figure 14 : modified Broken conductor detection Table 12 : minor amendments Permissive intertrip Function menu cells at the end of the section : minor amendments
1.2
2.1.1 2.1.5.3 2.1.7
11 16 18 - 19
2.1.7.1
20
2.1.7.3 2.1.8
20 - 23 23
24 2.2 2.2.3.1 2.2.5 25 - 26 27 28 - 29
2.3
30
2.4.1 2.4.4 2.5
34 37 38
2.6.1
40
P521/EN M/C31 Page 6/12 Document Ref. P521/EN AP/C31 Continued Section 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.7.1 2.8 2.10 3.3 3.7.2 Page No. 41 41 - 42 43 43 46 50 - 51 55
Documentation Update MiCOM P521 Description Direct intertrip Paragraph after Figure 16 : amended Selective intertripping New section : added 2> and 2>> setting guidelines Paragraphs 5 and 6 : minor amendments Undercurrent protection function Figure 17 : modified Selective scheme logic Table 15 : minor amendment Latch functions Table 17 : amendments and additions CB supervision settings Table 19 : minor amendment MiCOM P521 trip circuit supervision mechanism Figure 22 : amended Figure 23 : amended Figure 24 : amended Rolling demand Paragraph 1 : minor amendment in last sentence Protection comms Last paragraph : minor amendment in last sentence Kt calculation Paragraph 1 : minor amendment in 2nd sentence Communications link options Amendments throughout section Direct optical fiber link, 850nm multi-mode fiber 1st sentence : amended Direct optical fiber link, 1300nm multi-mode fiber 1st sentence : amended Direct optical fiber link, 1300nm single-mode fiber 1st sentence : amended Sentence after diagram : amended Switched communication networks Paragraphs 3 and 6 : amended Optical budgets Table 21 : minor amendments
58 58 3.8.1 59
3.13.1
63
3.14.3
66
4.1.2 5.1
66 68
5.2.1
69
5.2.2
69
5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5
69 70 72
Documentation Update MiCOM P521 Document Ref. P521/EN AP/C31 Continued Section Page No.
P521/EN M/C31 Page 7/12 Description Multiplexer link with G.703 electrical interface using auxiliary optical fibers and type P591 interface Paragraph 1 : 1st sentence amended 2nd paragraph after diagram : added Multiplexer link with V.35 electrical interface using auxiliary optical fibers and type P592 interface Paragraph 1 : 1st sentence amended 2nd paragraph after diagram : added Multiplexer link with X.21 electrical interface using auxiliary optical fibers and type P593 interface Paragraph 2 : 1st sentence amended Paragraph after diagram : added Unconditional 4 wire pilot communications for distances greater than 1.2km (P595) Note : amended Unconditioned 2 wire pilot communications for distances greater than 1.2km Amendments throughout section Leased line modem set up (e.g. TD32 modem) Amendments throughout section Baseband modem set up (e.g. Patton Netlink 1095 mDSL modem, Patton Campus 1092A modem) Amendments throughout section Modem isolation Amendments throughout section Conditioned pilot communications Amendments throughout section Direct 4 wire EIA(RS)485 up to 1.2km Amendments throughout section Pilot isolation Paragraph 1 : minor amendments Paragraphs 2 and 5 : added Protection communications address Additions and amendments throughout section Communication error statistics Paragraph 1 : last sentence amended
5.3.1
73
73 5.3.2 74
5.3.3
74 75
5.4
76
5.5
76 - 77
5.5.1
77
5.5.2 5.5.3 5.6
77 77 78
5.7
78 - 79
5.8
79
5.9 5.13
79 - 80 82
P521/EN M/C31 Page 8/12 Document Ref. P521/EN AP/C31 Continued P521/EN GC/C21 2.2 6 5.14 82 - 83 Section Page No.
Documentation Update MiCOM P521 Description Communications delay tolerance timer Amendments throughout section MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays Data in table : amended Structure of the information field by MODBUS function Section re-written Structure of the data field by MODBUS function Section re-written Overview Data in table : amended Page 0H: product information Data in table : amended Page 1: non protection settings Data in table : amended Page 2h: group 1 protection settings Data in table : amended Page 8h: time synchronization Paragraph 2 : added IEC time and date format Table : replaced Diagnostics and communications event counters New section : added Diagnostics counters (MODBUS Function 8) New section : added Communications event counter (MODBUS Function 11) New section : added Register format Data in table : amended Event table Data in table : amended Table 2: table of fault element meanings Data in table : amended Calculation formulae Data in table 2 : amended Initialization (reset) e.g. changed to reflect latest software version
2.3.2.3
2.3.3.3 3.1 3.3.1 3.3.2
7-8 9 - 10 10 - 15 15 - 21
3.3.3 3.3.7 3.3.7.2
21 - 24 25 26
3.3.8 3.3.8.1 3.3.8.2
26 26 - 27 27 - 28 30, 35, 38 - 40 42 - 43 45 - 46 50 57 60
3.4 3.5.1.3 3.6.1.4 3.7.3.3 4.3.1
Documentation Update MiCOM P521 Document Ref. P521/EN GC/C21 Continued 4.3.7.1 61 - 62 Section Page No.
P521/EN M/C31 Page 9/12 Description Extracting disturbance records via the MODBUS front port New section : added Compatible range information numbers in monitor direction Data in table : amended Private range information numbers in monitor direction Data in table : amended Rear communications port Table 2 : data in 1st row of connection column : amended DNP 3.0 interface Section deleted Direct fiber optic communications ON changed to CHANNEL_1 (=ON) Direct EIA(RS)485 communications 1st Sentence : ON changed to CHANNEL_1 (=ON) Communications using modems Paragraph 3 : ON changed to CHANNEL_1 (=ON) Loopback test with P591 Paragraph 5 : ON changed to CHANNEL_1 (=ON) Loopback test Paragraph 5 : ON changed to CHANNEL_1 (=ON) Loopback test Paragraph 6 : ON changed to CHANNEL_1 (=ON) Backup phase overcurrent protection 1st point after note: NO changed to OFF Check the operating time Table 5 : data in rows 6 and 9 of the characteristic column : amended Communications using P595 interfacing device Statement and caution symbol added to the end of the section Communication checks for metallic communications (direct EIA(RS)485, P595, EIA(RS)232 and modem connected relays) Statement and caution symbol added after 1st paragraph
5.1
63
5.3 P521/EN CM/C31 4.2.5 4.2.5.3 4.2.6.1
64 - 65
10 11 11
4.2.6.2
11
4.2.6.4
12
4.2.6.6.6
14
4.2.6.7.6
16
4.2.6.8.6
18
5.2.3
22
5.2.3.3
23
6.1.3.2
24
6.2.2
26
P521/EN M/C31 Page 10/12 Document Ref. P521/EN CM/C31 Continued Section 9.3.2 Page No. 31
Documentation Update MiCOM P521 Description Protection comms. fault Figure 2 : amended Replacing the complete relay Statement and caution symbol added after 4th paragraph Introduction Section re-written Definitions Switch diagram : added to end of section Leased line modem westermo TD32 Section heading : changed Netlink 1095 mDSL modem Section heading : changed Minor amendments throughout section DIP switch set S2 Section re-written Table of switches 6 and 7 Section deleted, now part of section 4.1 Switch diagrams amended and now part of section 4.1 Line requirements New section heading : added 2 wire campus 1092A modem Section heading : changed DIP switch set S1 Paragraph after table : re-written Table of switches 6 and 7 Section deleted, now part of section 5.1 DIP switch set S2 New section heading and paragraph : added Switch diagrams amended Line requirements Table : data in 1st row of distance column amended Relay settings for 2 wire 1092A modem Section heading : changed 4 wire campus 1092A modem Section heading : changed DIP switch set S1 Section re-written DIP switch set S2 Section re-written Line requirements Table : data in distance column amended
9.4.2 P521/EN MC/C31 1. 2. 3.
33 3 3 4
4. 4.1
7 7
4.1.1 4.3 5. 5.1 5.1.1
7 8 8 8 8
5.2
5.3
5.4 6. 6.1 6.2 6.3
9 10 10 10 - 11 11
Documentation Update MiCOM P521 Document Ref. P521/EN MC/C31 Continued 6.4 7. P521/EN CO/C31 P521/EN AC/C31 1. 1. 2. 3. 4.1 4.2 5.1 5.4 P521/EN RS/B21 4.2.6 4.2.6.5 6 7 11 11 3 3 3 4 5 5 6 8 Section Page No.
P521/EN M/C31 Page 11/12 Description Relay settings for 4 wire 1092A modem Section heading : changed P595 Section re-written External connection diagrams Diagrams updated and added Introduction Section re-written Accessories order codes Section re-written MT-RS485 surge protection device Section heading : changed General data 1st sentence of note : amended Connection diagrams Figure 1 : amended Function of loopback test box Figure 3 : amended Circuit diagram Figure 4 : amended Current differential protection communications Section heading : changed Communication using P595 Section heading : changed Metallic communications Communication protocol options : amended CT ratios Last line of table : added LED Function column : minor amendments Ctrl comms (MODBUS protocol) Last line of table : minor amendment [87] Current diff Function column : rows 12, 13 and 15 amended I-Trip commands New section : added Output relays Function column : rows 2 and 6 amended Invert output relays New section : added
6.2.2 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.3.1
10 14 14 15
2.4.1 2.5.3
16 20-21
2.5.6 2.5.8
22 23
P521/EN M/C31 Page 12/12 Document Ref. P521/EN VC/C31 Section Page No.
Documentation Update MiCOM P521 Description Hardware/software version history and compatibility Updated to reflect latest relay software
Introduction MiCOM P521
P521/EN IT/A11
INTRODUCTION
Date: Software Version: Connection Diagrams:
8th November 2005 2 10P52101
P521/EN IT/A11
P521/EN IT/A11 Page 1/6
CONTENT
1. 2. 3. 4. INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL INTRODUCTION TO THE MICOM P521 MAIN FUNCTIONS 3 3 4 5
1.
INTRODUCTION
The MiCOM P521 is a numerical current differential relay designed to control, protect and monitor overhead lines and cables of low to medium voltage systems.
2.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This manual provides a description of the MiCOM P521 functions and settings. It enables the user to become familiar with the application, installation, setting and commissioning of this relay. This manual has the following format: P521/EN IT Introduction
Contents of the manual and general introduction to the MiCOM P521. P521/EN IN Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions
Discusses the precautions to be taken when handling and installing electronic equipment. P521/EN FT User Guide
A detailed description of the features of the MiCOM P521 relay. P521/EN HI Relay Menu Map P521/EN TD Technical Data and Curves Characteristics Menu Content Tables
Comprehensive details of nominal values, setting ranges, specifications and characteristics P521/EN AP Application Guide
Introduction to the applications of the MiCOM P521 relay including setting guidelines and explanations of special features provided. P521/EN CT P521/EN CM MODBUS Database/IEC60870-5-103 Commissioning and Maintenance Guide
Guide to commissioning, problem solving and maintenance of MiCOM P521. P521/EN CO Connection Diagrams
All wiring connections to the relay. P521/EN MC Modem Configuration
Guide to configuration of the modems compatible with the MiCOM P521 P521/EN AC Accessories
Comprehensive details of the accessories available for the P521 P521/EN RS P521/EN VC Commissioning Test and Setting Record Sheets Hardware / Software Version History and Compatibility
3.
INTRODUCTION TO THE MICOM P521

The MiCOM protection relay range follows on from the success of the MIDOS, K and MODN ranges by incorporating the latest developments in digital technology. The MiCOM P521 relay uses the same modular box concept but provides more protection for the most demanding applications. The relay has a large number of functions for controlling and collecting data. This can form part of a fully integrated system covering protection, control, instrumentation, data acquisition and the recording of faults, events and disturbances. The relay front panel has a liquid crystal display (LCD) with 2 x 16 back-lit alphanumerical characters, a tactile 7 button keypad (to gain access to all the settings, alarms and measurements) and 8 LEDs to display the state of the MiCOM P521 relay. In addition, the use of the front EIA(RS)232 and rear EIA(RS)485 communication ports makes it possible to read, reinitialize and change the settings of the relay, if required, from a local or remote PC equipped with the MiCOM S1 software. Its flexibility of use, reduced maintenance requirements and ease of integration allow the MiCOM P521 to provide an evolving solution for the problems of the protection of electric networks. The MiCOM P521 relay provides comprehensive unit protection of overhead lines underground cables and ring mains. The integration of many protection features, including phase overcurrent and earth fault protection, allows application to wide range of medium and low voltage applications.
4.
MAIN FUNCTIONS
The following table shows the functions available in the MiCOM P521 relay. Functions Phase segregated current differential protection Instantaneous / time delayed overcurrent protection Instantaneous / time delayed earth fault protection Thermal overload protection Broken conductor detection Undercurrent protection Negative sequence overcurrent protection Direct Intertripping Permissive intertripping Trip circuit supervision Circuit breaker monitoring and control Circuit breaker failure detection Cold load pickup (O/C and E/F only) 2 Setting groups Instantaneous/start contact (O/C and E/F only) Latching output contacts Blocking logic Selective relay scheme logic A-B-C and A-C-B phase rotation operation Measurements (True RMS) Peak and rolling values Event records Fault records Instantaneous records Disturbance records EIA(RS)232 front communication EIA(RS)485 rear communication Commissioning features 50BF 86 50BF ANSI Code 87L 50/51 50N/51N 49 46BC 37 46
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions MiCOM P521
P521/EN IN/B21
HANDLING, INSTALLATION AND CASE DIMENSIONS
8th November 2005 2 10P52101
P521/EN IN/B21
P521/EN IN/B21 Page 1/6
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Receipt of relays Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
3
3 3
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RELAY MOUNTING UNPACKING STORAGE CASE DIMENSIONS
3 4 4 4 5
FIGURES
Figure 1: MiCOM P521 relay case dimensions 5
1.
1.1
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Receipt of relays Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful treatment prior to installation on site. Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to ensure no damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been sustained during transit a claim should be made to the transport contractor and AREVA T&D should be promptly notified. Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installation should be returned to their protective polythene bags.
1.2
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) The relays use components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharges. The electronic circuits are well protected by the metal case and the internal module should not be withdrawn unnecessarily. When handling the module outside its case, care should be taken to avoid contact with components and electrical connections. If removed from the case for storage, the module should be placed in an electrically conducting antistatic bag. There are no setting adjustments within the module and it is advised that it is not unnecessarily disassembled. Although the printed circuit boards are plugged together, the connectors are a manufacturing aid and not intended for frequent dismantling; in fact considerable effort may be required to separate them. Touching the printed circuit board should be avoided, since complementary metal oxide semiconductors (CMOS) are used, which can be damaged by static electricity discharged from the body.
2.
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

A persons normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices, when handling electronic circuits, can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced. The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case. Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing modules unnecessarily. Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured. 1. 2. Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the equipment by touching the case. Handle the module by its frontplate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board. Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit tracks or connectors. Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands helps to achieve an equal potential.
3.
P521/EN IN/B21 Page 4/6 4. 5.
Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same potential as yourself. Store or transport the module in a conductive bag.
If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of any equipment in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500k 10M. If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the case to prevent a build-up of static. Instrumentation which may be used for making measurements should be earthed to the case whenever possible. More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found in BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out in a special handling area such as described in the above-mentioned BS and IEC documents.
3.
RELAY MOUNTING
Relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly. If an MMLG test block is to be included it should be positioned at the right-hand side of the assembly (viewed from the front). Modules should remain protected by their metal case during assembly into a panel or rack. For individually mounted relays an outline diagram is supplied in section 6 of Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions (P521/EN IN) showing the panel cut-outs and hole centers.
4.
UNPACKING
Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the parts is damaged or the settings altered. Relays must only be handled by skilled persons. The installation should be clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and excessive vibration. The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection. Relays that have been removed from their cases should not be left in situations where they are exposed to dust or damp. This particularly applies to installations which are being carried out at the same time as construction work.
5.
STORAGE
If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt they should be stored in a place free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bags have been included in the packing they should be retained. The action of the de-humidifier crystals will be impaired if the bag has been exposed to ambient conditions and may be restored by gently heating the bag for about an hour, prior to replacing it in the carton. Dust which collects on a carton may, on subsequent unpacking, find its way into the relay; in damp conditions the carton and packing may become impregnated with moisture and the de-humidifier will lose its efficiency.
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions MiCOM P521 Storage temperature: 25C to +70C.
6.
CASE DIMENSIONS
The MiCOM P521 relay is available in a MiCOM size 30TE metal case for panel or flush mounting. Weight: 1.7 to 2.1 Kg External size: Height Width Depth case front panel case front panel case front panel + case 152 mm 177 mm 150 mm 155 mm 226 mm 252 mm
154.2
158.74
156
29.6 10.7 103.67 13
177
150.11 148.1
4.5
13
247.1
159
168
222 25.1
N.4 f3.4
151.05
N.4 f4.4 All dimensions in mm
10
P2222ENa
Figure 1:
MiCOM P521 relay case dimensions
User Guide MiCOM P521
P521/EN FT/C31
USER GUIDE
8th November 2005 2 10P52101
P521/EN FT/C31
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 1/78
CONTENT
1. 2.
2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.2.1 2.1.2.2 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5
DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P521 RELAY USER INTERFACE

LCD display and keypad description LCD display Keypad Alarm keys Programming keypad LEDs The two areas under the top and bottom flaps The battery box Tripping output
5 6
6 6 6 6 7 7 8 8 9
3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.2.1 3.5.2.2 3.5.2.3 3.5.2.4 3.5.2.5
MENUS
Default display Access to the menu Password Password protection Entering the password Changing the password Alarm display Electrical system alarms Relay hardware or software alarms Menu contents description OP Parameters menu Configuration menu Display sub menu CT ratio sub menu LED 5 to 8 configuration sub menus Group select sub menu Alarms sub menu
9
9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 13 14 15 17 17 18 19 24 25
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 2/78 3.5.2.6 3.5.2.7 3.5.3 3.5.3.1 3.5.3.2 3.5.3.3 3.5.4 3.5.4.1 3.5.4.2 3.5.4.3 3.5.5 3.5.5.1 3.5.5.2 3.5.5.2.1 3.5.5.2.2 3.5.5.2.3 3.5.5.2.4 3.5.5.2.5 3.5.5.2.6 3.5.5.2.7 3.5.5.2.8 3.5.5.2.9 3.5.5.3 3.5.5.3.1 3.5.5.3.2 3.5.5.3.3 3.5.5.3.4 3.5.5.3.5 3.5.5.3.6 3.5.5.3.7 3.5.5.3.8 3.5.5.3.9 Configuration inputs sub menu Phase rotation sub menu Measurements menu Measurements currents diff sub menu Measurements current/frequency sub menu Measurements communications sub menu Communication menu MODBUS communication menu IEC 60870-5-103 (VDEW) communication menu Protection communication menu Protection menu [87] Current diff sub menu [50/51] Phase OC sub menu I> DMT threshold menu I> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curve menu I> DMT reset time, IEEE/ANSI curves menu I> IDMT reset time, IEEE/ANSI curves menu I> IDMT threshold, electromechanical RI curve menu I> DMT reset time, IEC / electromechanical RI curves menu I>> threshold menu I>>> threshold menu I>>>> threshold menu [50N/51N] Earth OC sub menu Ie> DMT threshold menu Ie> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu Ie> DMT reset time, IEEE/ANSI curves menu Ie> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu Ie> IDMT threshold, electromechanical RI curve menu Ie> DMT reset time, IEC/RI curves menu Ie> IDMT threshold, Laborelec curve menu Ie>> threshold menu Ie>>> threshold menu
User Guide MiCOM P521 25 27 27 27 28 31 31 32 32 33 34 34 36 36 37 37 37 37 38 38 38 39 39 40 40 40 41 41 41 41 41 42
User Guide MiCOM P521 3.5.5.3.10 3.5.5.4 3.5.5.4.1 3.5.5.4.2 3.5.5.4.2.1 3.5.5.4.2.2 3.5.5.4.2.3 3.5.5.4.3 3.5.5.4.3.1 3.5.5.4.4 3.5.5.5 3.5.5.6 3.5.6 3.5.6.1 3.5.6.2 3.5.6.3 3.5.6.4 3.5.6.5 3.5.6.6 3.5.6.7 3.5.6.8 3.5.6.9 3.5.6.10 3.5.6.11 3.5.6.12 3.5.6.13 3.5.6.14 3.5.7 3.5.7.1 3.5.7.2 3.5.7.3 3.5.7.4 Ie>>>> threshold menu [46] Negative phase sequence I2> sub menu I2> DMT threshold menu I2> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu I2> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu I2> DMT reset time, IEEE/ANSI curves menu I2> IDMT reset time, IEEE/ANSI curves menu I2> IDMT threshold, electromechanical RI curve menu I2> DMT reset time, RI curves I2>> threshold menu [49] Therm OL sub menu [37] Undercurrent I< sub menu Automat. ctrl menu Commissioning sub menu Trip commands sub menu Latch functions sub menu I-Trip commands sub menu Blocking logic sub menu Logic select sub menus Output relays sub menu Latch of the auxiliary output relays Inversion of the auxiliary output relays Inputs sub menu Broken conductor sub menu Cold load pick-up sub menu Circuit breaker failure sub menu Circuit breaker supervision sub menu Records menu CB monitoring sub menu Fault record sub menu Instantaneous sub menu Disturbance record sub menu
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 3/78 42 43 43 43 44 44 44 44 45 45 45 46 46 47 49 51 53 55 56 58 61 62 63 65 65 67 68 70 70 71 73 74
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 4/78 3.5.7.5 3.5.7.6 Time peak value sub menu Rolling demand sub menu
User Guide MiCOM P521 74 75
4.
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2
WIRING
Auxiliary supply Current measurement inputs Logic inputs Output relays Communication EIA(RS)485 rear communication port EIA(RS)232 front communication port
76
76 76 76 76 76 76 77
FIGURES
Figure 1: Figure 2: Figure 3: Figure 4: MiCOM P521 front panel Battery box MiCOM E1 Organisation of MiCOM P521 main menu EIA(RS)232 front port communication cable wiring 6 8 15 77
1.
DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P521 RELAY

MiCOM P521 is a fully numerical relay that is designed to perform electrical protection and control functions. 3 phase and 1 earth current inputs are available at both 1 and 5 Amps ratings on the relay (4 inputs for 1 A and 4 inputs for 5 A). It is possible to use a combination of input ratings on the same relay (i.e. a mix of 1A for earth fault and 5A for phase connections). All output relays can be programmed to respond to any of the available control or protection functions. Logic inputs can also be allocated to the various control functions. The MiCOM relays are powered from either a DC or an AC auxiliary supply (3 ranges of auxiliary supply). Any short supply interruptions (< 50 ms) are filtered and regulated through the auxiliary supply. The front panel enables the user to navigate through the menu to access data, change the settings, read the measurements, etc. Eight LEDs on the front panel allows a clear and simple indication of events. The various alarms detected are displayed on the back-lit LCD display. No password is required to read or clear these alarm messages. However, the modification of settings can only be carried out with a password. MiCOM P521 relay continuously measures the phase and earth currents and calculates the true RMS component up to 10th harmonic. MiCOM P521 relay has available via its rear connectors, a standard EIA(RS)485 port. Communication protocols can be chosen at the time of order, from MODBUS RTU or IEC 60870-5-103. Using the communication channel, all stored information (measurements, alarms and settings) can be read, and the settings can be modified if necessary. Consultation and modification of this data can be carried out on site with a PC and the appropriate AREVA T&D software (e.g. MiCOM S1). EIA(RS)485 based communication allows the MiCOM P521 relay to be directly linked to a digital control system (MiCOM S10 for example). All the available data is then placed at the disposal of the supervisor and can be processed either locally or remotely. The MiCOM P521 relay gives the user more flexibility to adapt the relay to the desired applications. With regard to low installation costs, this relay offers an economic solution, providing integrated protection and control functions.
2.
USER INTERFACE
The MiCOM P521 relay front panel serves as an interface between the user and the protection relay. It enables the user to modify and read relay settings and to display measurements and alarms.
2 x 16 alphanumeric backlit display
2 tactile button keypad for reading and clearing alarms and messages
Trip led Alarm led Warning led Healthy led
Trip Alarm Warning Healthy
5 tactile button keypad for setting and consulting
Programmable leds EIA(RS)232
Battery
P2009ENc
Figure 1:
MiCOM P521 front panel
The front panel of the relay consists of three separate sections: 1. 2. 3. 2.1 2.1.1 The LCD display and the keypad The LED's The two zones under the upper and lower flaps.
LCD display and keypad description LCD display The front panel of the MiCOM P521 relay caries a liquid crystal display (LCD) on which data such as settings, measured values and alarms can be viewed. The data is accessed through a menu system. The liquid crystal display has two lines each with sixteen characters. A back-light is activated when any key is pressed and will remain lit for five minutes after the last key press. This allows the display to be read in most lighting conditions.
2.1.2
Keypad The keypad has seven keys divided into two groups: Two keys situated immediately under the screen (keys and ).
Five main keys situated at the middle of the front face are for menu navigation. 2.1.2.1 Alarm keys The two keys and are dedicated for reading and acknowledging the alarms. So as to display successive alarms, press on key. The alarms are presented in reverse order for their detection (the most recent first, the oldest last). So as to acknowledge
User Guide MiCOM P521 the alarms, the user can either acknowledge each alarm using the ALARM menu and carry out a general acknowledgement. Latched indications/contacts will also be reset once the 2.1.2.2 Programming keypad
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 7/78 or go to the end of
key has been pressed.
The five keys situated in the middle of the MiCOM front panel are dedicated to menu navigation and setting changes. The keys , , and make it possible to move in the direction indicated to the various levels of the menus. The key 2.2 LEDs The LED labels on the front panel are by default written in English, however the user also has self-adhesive labels, available with MiCOM relays, in French. Additional blank label are provided on which it is possible to write using a ball point pen. The top four LEDs indicate to the status of the relay (Trip condition, alarm LED, equipment failure and auxiliary supply). The four lower LEDs can be freely programmed by the user to correspond to operation of the various thresholds and / or the state of the logic inputs. Eight LEDs are located in the left portion of the front plate (numbered from 1 to 8 starting from the top): validates a choice or value (modification of settings).
LED 1
Color : RED
Label : Trip
LED 1 indicates when a trip order has been issued by the relay to the circuit breaker or contactor. This LED copies the trip order issued to the Trip output (output RELAY 1). Its normal state is unlit. It is illuminated as soon as a tripping order is issued. It goes out when the associated alarm is acknowledged, provided the initiating protection element has fully reset.
LED 2
Color : ORANGE
Label : ALARM
LED 2 indicates that an alarm has been registered by MiCOM P521 relay. The alarms are either threshold crossings (instantaneous), or tripping orders (possibly time delayed, depending upon which protection element operates). In addition to threshold crossings and trips an alarm will also be given in the event of a protection comms channel failure. As soon as an alarm is registered, the LED flashes. When all the stored alarms are read ( ), the LED is illuminated continuously. When all the alarms are acknowledged Note: , the LED goes out.
The instantaneous alarms can be selected to manual or automatic reset. This can be set in CONFIGURATION/ALARMS/Inst. Self Reset? YES / NO Choose YES for automatic reset. The default setting is NO.
LED 3
Color : ORANGE
Label : Warning
LED 3 is dedicated to the internal alarms of the MiCOM P521. When a non critical internal alarm (typically a control comms fault i.e. MODBUS etc.) is detected, the LED will flash. When the fault is classed as critical , the LED is illuminated continuously. The extinction of this LED is only possible by the disappearance of the cause that provoked it (repair of the module, disappearance of the Fault).
LED 4
Color : GREEN
Label : Healthy
LED 4 indicates that the MiCOM P521 has a healthy auxiliary supply in the nominal range.
LED 5 to 8
Color : RED
Label : Left Blank
These LEDs can be programmed by the user on the basis of information on available thresholds (instantaneous and time-delayed) and the state of the logic inputs. The user selects the information he wishes to see associated with each LED from the menu element. A single LED can be associated with more than one protection / control function. Each LED illuminates when the associated information is valid. The extinction of each LED occurs when the associated alarm is acknowledged. 2.3 The two areas under the top and bottom flaps Under the upper flap, a label identifies the relay according to its model (ordering code) and serial number. This information defines the product uniquely and specifically. In making all requests for information from AREVA T&D After Sales Department, please quote these two numbers. Information indicated in the lower portion of this label covers the auxiliary supply voltage and the nominal earth current value. Under the lower flap, an EIA(RS)232 port is available. This can be used to download a setting file from a PC with the MiCOM S1 setting software. Alternatively, the EIA(RS)232 port can be used to download new application software versions into the relay flash memory. The withdrawability of the MiCOM active part (chassis) from the case is performed by opening the two flaps, then with a 3mm screwdriver, turn the extractor situated under the upper flap, and pull using the two slots situated behind these flaps. 2.4 The battery box
Figure 2:
Battery box MiCOM E1
User Guide MiCOM P521 The battery box performs the two following functions: 1.
Temporary powering of the relay in order to allow the user to view or modify data when the auxiliary power supply has failed. The battery box uses a 6LR61 (9V) battery, which can power the relay up to 3 hours. When the battery is flat it is possible to power the battery box with an external dc supply. The dc voltage value must be between 12Vdc and 24Vdc. EIA(RS)232 interface between the MiCOM relay and the PC equipped with the setting software MiCOM S1.
2. 2.5
Tripping output The trip output for the MiCOM P521 relay is dedicated to output relay RL1. Operation of only RL1 will result in illumination of the red trip LED.
3.
MENUS
The menu of the MiCOM P521 relay is organized into main and sub menus, much like a PC directory structure.
3.1
Default display By default, the current value (selected phase, earth or all phases and earth) is continuously displayed. As soon as an alarm is generated by the MiCOM relay, that information is considered as priority and replaces the default value. The default display choice is made in the CONFIGURATION/Display menu.
3.2
Access to the menu Complete menu access is performed by manipulation of the keys general arrangement of the menus is shown in Figure 3 for P521. , , and . The
Reading of parameters and measurements is possible without entering the password. However, modification of the parameters does require the password. Should an error be made in entering a parameter, press to cancel. Except for reading and canceling, the keys Note: and are inactive.
The letter P is displayed when the password is entered. However If no key is pressed for 5 minutes, the password mode becomes inactive.
3.3 3.3.1
Password Password protection Password protection is applicable to the relay settings, especially to the selection of the various thresholds, time delays, communication parameters, allocation of inputs and outputs relays. The password consists of four alphabetical capital characters. When leaving the factory, the password is AAAA. If necessary the user can define their own combination of characters.
Should the password be lost or forgotten, modification of the relay settings is prohibited. In these circumstances the manufacturer or agent can supply a master password when given the relay serial number. Note: The programming mode is indicated by a letter "P" on the lower right hand side of the display, but only when a column heading is displayed. The letter P is present as long as the password is active (5 minutes if no key is pressed).
3.3.2
Entering the password The password is requested as soon as an attempt is made to modify a relay setting. The user must enter the password (4 characters/letters) and accept the entire password with . If the password is correct PASSWORD OK is displayed and setting changes can then commence. If the password is incorrect PASSWORD NOK displayed. After 5 seconds, the display returns to the cell prior to password entry. If no action is taken on the keypad for 5 minutes, the password is deactivated. A new request shall be associated with any subsequent setting change. A temporary interruption in the auxiliary supply will also serve to de-activate the password. Note: If the password has been entered via the keypad, the following remote access is possible: Front port Rear port None Read access only
The relay will remain in this state until the password has been deactivated. 3.3.3 Changing the password To change the active password, go to the OP. PARAMETERS menu and then to the point of the Password sub menu. Enter the old password and validate. Then press and enter the new password character by character and validate the new password using . The message NEW PASSWORD OK is displayed to indicate that the password has changed. 3.4 Alarm display The presence of any alarm is displayed on the LCD. The display of alarm messages has priority over the default current value. As soon as an alarm is detected by the relay (threshold crossing for example), the message is displayed on the MiCOM LCD and the Alarm LED (2nd LED) lights up. The alarm messages are classed as follows: Electrical system alarm message Hardware or software fault message from the relay. 3.4.1 Electrical system alarms Any crossing of a threshold (instantaneous or time delay) generates an "electrical system alarm". The threshold that has been exceeded will be displayed on the LCD together with the phase/phases (A, B or C) involved in the fault.
If several alarms are triggered, they are all stored in their order of appearance the most recent alarm first, the oldest alarm last. Each message is numbered and the total number of messages is shown. The user can read all the alarm messages using the key without entering the password. The user can then acknowledge the alarm using the key. The alarms can be acknowledged one by one or all of them simultaneously by going to the end of the list and pressing the key. The management of the ALARM LED is directly linked to the status of the stored alarms. If one or several messages are NOT READ and NOT ACKNOWLEDGED, the alarm LED flashes. If all the messages have been READ but NOT ACKNOWLEDGED, the alarm LED remains lights up continuously. If all the messages have been READ and ACKNOWLEDGED, the alarm LED goes out. Note: The alarms concerning the instantaneous (start indications) can be selected self reset Yes or No in the CONFIGURATION/Alarms Menu
The different electrical system alarms are described below: DIFF e> e>> e>>> e>>>> > >> >>> >>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> tIe>>>> tI> tI>> tI>>> tI>>>> THERMAL ALARM THERMAL TRIP < t< Differential protection trip 1st stage earth fault pick-up 2nd stage earth fault pick-up 3rd stage earth fault pick-up 4th stage earth fault pick-up 1st stage overcurrent pick-up 2nd stage overcurrent pick-up 3rd stage overcurrent pick-up 4th stage overcurrent pick-up 1st stage earth fault time delay 2nd stage earth fault time delay 3rd stage earth fault time delay 4th stage earth fault time delay 1st stage overcurrent time delay 2nd stage overcurrent time delay 3rd stage overcurrent time delay 4th stage overcurrent time delay Thermal alarm threshold pick-up Thermal trip threshold pick-up Undercurrent element pick-up Undercurrent fault time delay
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 12/78 BRKN COND.
User Guide MiCOM P521 Broken conductor indication. 2/I1 element pick-up for longer than tBC (breaker fail timer). TBC is settable in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Broken Cond. Menu. t AUX1 time delay t AUX2 time delay Circuit breaker failure indication (the CB did not trip on tBf time delay) tBF is settable in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Fail menu. Negative sequence current threshold pick-up (1st stage) Negative sequence current threshold time delay (1st stage) Negative sequence current threshold pick-up (2nd stage) Negative sequence current threshold time delay (2nd stage) Indicates that the relay received and tripped on direct intertrip. Indicates that the relay has received an intertrip signal from the remote relay that has performed a differential trip. Indicates that the relay has tripped due to a permissive intertrip command. Operating (or tripping) time of the circuit breaker longer than the value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu. Closing time of the circuit breaker longer than the value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu. Number of circuit breaker operation higher that the value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu. Broken current measured higher than the value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu. Trip circuit failure. Failure condition present for longer than the supervision timer tSUP, settable in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu. A least one relay is latched. Circuit breaker closing time longer than the value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu. Differential protection communication channel failure. Backup protection (e.g. overcurrent) can be enabled in the event of COMMS FAILURE. Indicates that the differential protection is not functioning due to either COMMS FAIL or a hardware fault. Back-up protection may still be functioning. Indicates that the circuit breaker has been given a remote trip command. A remote trip can be initiated by the front user interface, a logic input or via the remote communications link.
t AUX 1 t AUX 2 CB FAILURE
2> tI 2> 2>> tI2>> DIRECT -TRIP DIFF -TRIP PERMISSIVE T operating CB
CB CLOSE FAILURE CB OPEN NB Sum A n TRIP CIRCUIT
LATCH RELAY CB CLOSE FAILURE COMMS ALARM
DIFF FAIL
REM TRIP
User Guide MiCOM P521 CB STATUS DB
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 13/78 This alarm stands for "Circuit Breaker Status Dont Believe It". In the event when the 52a and 52b contacts are both open or both closed, this alarm will be given after 5 seconds. Indicates that the protection communications are looped back on themselves for commissioning purposes. The relay will accept messages from its own address. This mode can be enabled/disabled in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning menu. Output relays will not operate for fault conditions but alarms and LEDs function as usual. This mode can be used for commissioning purposes. Indicates that the current differential protection has been disabled. The current differential protection can be disabled via the relay menu or via a blocking input. Blocking/Disabling either local or remote relays will cause this alarm to be displayed at both ends simultaneously.
LOOPBACK MODE
ISOLATED RELAYS
DISABLED DIFF
3.4.2
Relay hardware or software alarms Any software or hardware fault of the MiCOM relay generates a "hardware/software alarm". If several alarms are generated they are all stored in their order of appearance. The alarms are displayed in reverse order (the most recent first and the oldest last). Each message is numbered and the total number of messages is indicated below. The user can read all the alarm messages with the aid of password. , without entering the
The acknowledgement of the relay alarm messages is IMPOSSIBLE if the fault is still present. The alarm can only be acknowledged when the cause of the alarm has disappeared. The management of the WARNING LED is directly linked to the status of the alarms stored in the memory. If the fault is major (the relay cannot perform protection functions), the WARNING LED is continuously illuminated and the watchdog contact will operate. If the fault is minor (no influence on the protection and automation function e.g. SCADA communication failure), the WARNING LED flashes. This will not cause operation of the watchdog contact. Possible Hardware or Software alarm messages: Major fault SETTING ERROR: EEPROM ERROR CALIBR.: CT ERROR: PROT. COMMS FAIL: DEFAULT CONFIG.: Setting error occurred due to data memory fault Calibration memory faulty Analogue channel faulty Protections comms card faulty Factory settings restored due to data memory fault. This message will also be displayed following a firmware upgrade.
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 14/78 Minor faultRAM ERROR: BATTERY FAIL: Note: RAM supplied by battery faulty
Battery faulty (flat or not correctly fitted) The Battery backed RAM memory and Battery failure alarm messages can be configured to display or not; YES or NO in CONFIGURATION/Alarms menu. If NO is selected an alarm will not be raised in the event of a Battery Fault. Internal communications faulty Real time clock faulty Recovering from transient comms fault (back-up protection available)
COMM.ERROR: CLOCK ERROR: PROT. COMMS RECOVER: 3.5 Menu contents description
The menu of the MiCOM P521 relay is divided into 8 sections: OP PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION MEASUREMENTS COMMUNICATION PROTECTION G1 PROTECTION G2 AUTOMAT. CTRL RECORDS To access these menus from the default display use . .
To return to the default display from these menus or sub menus press

Default Display 1A = 1245A
OP Parameters
Configuration
Measurement
Communication
Protection G1
Protection G2
Automat. Ctrl
Records
P0004ENa
Figure 3:
Organization of MiCOM P521 main menu The menu content tables are supplied in the Menu Content Tables section, P521/EN HI. .
Note: 3.5.1
OP Parameters menu To gain access to the OP PARAMETERS menu from the default display, press OP PARAMETERS Heading of the OP PARAMETERS menu To gain access to the menu content, press .
Password ****
Entry of the password to be able to modify the MiCOM relay settings and parameters. To enter the password, press .
Password AAAA
Entry of the password is made letter by letter using and to go up or down the alphabet. After each letter, press , to enter the following letter. At the end, press to validate the password. If the password is correct, the message PASSWORD OK is displayed on the screen. Note: The password is initially set in the factory to AAAA.
WARNING:
AS SOON AS THE PASSWORD HAS BEEN ENTERED, NO SETTING CHANGE USING THE COMMUNICATION (EIA(RS)485 OR EIA(RS)232) CAN BE ACCEPTED.
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 16/78 Description P521 Displays the MiCOM applicable relay model.
Reference ALST
Displays the name of the equipment associated with the relay. The entry of the reference is made character by character using , . After each character (letter, number or symbol), press to move to the next character. At the end of entering, press to accept the reference. Note: The reference is initially set in the factory to ALST. Displays the version of the software.
Software version 2.A
Frequency 50 Hz
Nominal value of the network frequency. Select either 50 or 60 Hz. To modify this value, press followed by , to select the desired value. Validate your choice using . Display the active group (Protection G1 or Protection G2).
Active Group 1
Input Status
54321 10110
Displays the state of the logic Inputs. The Logic Inputs are numbered from 1 to 5, starting from the right. The state of each input is : state 0 : input inactive state 1 : input active Displays the state of the logic outputs. The logic outputs are numbered from 1 to 8, starting from the right. The state of each output is : state 0 : output relay not operated state 1 : output relay operated Pressing the cancel key , in this cell, will reset any latched contacts/relays, this is with the exception of trip relay RL1. Note: The Watch-dog output (RL0) is not displayed in the output status menu. Displays the date. To modify this date press then use , , to enter the required value. Accept your choice using . With this example the date is : 30 January 2002. Displays the Time. To modify this time press then use , to enter the required value. Accept your choice using . With this example the time is : 13 hours, 57 minutes, 44 seconds.
Relay 87654321 Status 01011101
Date 30/01/02
Time 13:57:44
User Guide MiCOM P521 Trip and Close No Operation
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 17/78 Enables the user to Trip or Close the circuit breaker. Select from No Operation, Trip or Close. To Trip or Close the circuit select either Trip or Close and then press the key. The relevant output contacts will close for the Open Pulse or t Close Pulse times found under AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Monitoring.
3.5.2
Configuration menu The various sub menus are: Display CT Ratio Led 5 Led 6 Led 7 Led 8 Group Select Alarms Configuration Inputs Phase Rotation To gain access to the CONFIGURATION menu from the default display, press . then
3.5.2.1 Display sub menu CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the DISPLAY submenu, press .
Display
Heading of the DISPLAY sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press .
Default Display RMS I A
Edit the default display to show either Phase A, Phase B, Phase C, Earth currents or all four simultaneously. To modify the default display, press then use either or to enter the required choice. Enable your choice using . Edit phase A label by selecting A, L1, or R. This value can be modified after entering the password and is displayed with the corresponding measurement.
Phase A Text L1
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 18/78 Phase B Text L2
User Guide MiCOM P521 Edit phase B label by selecting B, L2, or S. This value can be modified after entering the password and is displayed with the corresponding measurement. Edit phase C label by selecting C, L3, or T. This value can be modified after entering the password and is displayed with the corresponding measurement. Edit earth label by selecting N, E, or o. This value can be modified after entering the password and is displayed with the corresponding measurement.
Phase C Text L3
E/Gnd Text E 3.5.2.2 CT ratio sub menu CONFIGURATION
Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the CT RATIOS menu, press , .
CT Ratio
Heading of the CT RATIOS sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press .
Line CT primary 1000
Display of the primary rating of the phase CT. The value consists of 4 digits : Minimum 1, Maximum 9999. Press to modify this value and use , , , to display the new primary phase CT ratio. Enable your choice by pressing at the end of selection. Display of the secondary rating of the phase CT. This value toggles between 1 and 5.
Line CT sec 5
E/Gnd CT primary 1000
Display of the primary rating of the earth CT. The value consists of 4 digits : Minimum 1, Maximum 9999. Press to modify this value and use , , , to display the new primary earth CT ratio. Enable your choice by pressing at the end of selection. Display of the secondary rating of the earth CT. This value toggles between 1 and 5.
E/Gnd CT sec 5
CT Correct Ratio 1000
Displays the ratio correction factor that the local current is multiplied by. The correction factor has a setting range of 0.05 to 2.
User Guide MiCOM P521 Vectorial Comp. Off Displays the vector group that is in use.
3.5.2.3 LED 5 to 8 configuration sub menus To gain access to the LED 5 CONFIGURATION sub menu, press twice. To access to the others LEDs CONFIGURATION sub menus, press 4 times for LED 7 and 5 times for LED 8. 35 different parameters can be assigned to each LED. These parameters are: Text diff diff Fail B/up Prot Comms Fail Direct -Trip C-Diff -Trip PIT > >> >>> >>>> tI> tI>> tI>>> tI>>>> e> e>> e>>> e>>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> tIe>>>> Therm Trip Brkn Cond. Information Differential protection trip Differential protection not functioning Back-up protection is enabled Protection comms channel failure Relay has received and tripped on direct intertrip Relay has tripped due to a differential intertrip Relay has tripped due to a permissive intertrip command First instantaneous phase threshold Second instantaneous phase threshold Third instantaneous phase threshold Fourth instantaneous phase threshold First time delayed phase threshold Second time delayed phase threshold Third time delayed phase threshold Fourth time delayed phase threshold First instantaneous earth threshold Second instantaneous earth threshold Third instantaneous earth threshold Fourth instantaneous earth threshold First time delayed earth threshold Second time delayed earth threshold Third time delayed earth threshold Fourth time delayed earth threshold Thermal overload trip Broken conductor detected , , followed by
3 times for LED 6,
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 20/78 Text CB Fail tI2> tI2>> Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 t Aux 1 t Aux 2 CB Alarm Notes: Information Detection of a circuit breaker failure
Time delayed negative phase sequence (1st threshold) Time delayed negative phase sequence (2nd threshold) Status of Logic Input n 1 Status of Logic Input n 2 Status of Logic Input n 3 Status of Logic Input n 4 Status of Logic Input n 5 Aux Timer 1 operated Aux Timer 2 operated Circuit breaker alarm Each parameter can be assigned to one or more LED's. Each LED can be lit by one or more parameters (OR logic).
Example of LED 5 setting: CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the LED 5 submenu, press , followed by 2 times.
Led 5
Heading of the LED 5 sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press .
Led Idiff No
Indicates that the differential protection has tripped. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Indicates that the differential protection is not functioning. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays that the back-up protection has been enabled. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Indicates that the protection comms channel has failed. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using .
Led Idiff Fail No
Led B/up Prot No
Led Comms Fail No
User Guide MiCOM P521 Led Direct I-Trip No
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 21/78 Indicates that the relay has received and tripped on a direct intertrip. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Indicates that the relay has tripped due to a differential intertrip. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Indicates that the relay has tripped due to a permissive intertrip command. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable Displays the instantaneous threshold I> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the time delay threshold tI> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the instantaneous threshold I>> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the time delay threshold tI>> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the instantaneous threshold I>>> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the time delay threshold tI>>> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using .
Led C-Diff I-Trip No
Led PIT No
Led I>
No
Led tI>
No
Led I>>
No
Led tI>>
No
Led I>>>
No
Led tI>>>
No
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 22/78 Led I>>>>
User Guide MiCOM P521 Displays the instantaneous threshold I>>>> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the time delay threshold tI>>>> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the instantaneous threshold Ie> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the time delay threshold tIe> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the instantaneous threshold Ie>> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the time delay threshold tIe>> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the instantaneous threshold Ie>>> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the time delay threshold tIe>>> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the instantaneous threshold Ie>>>> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using .
No
Led tI>>>> No
Led Ie>
No
Led tIe>
No
Led Ie>>
No
Led tIe>>
No
Led Ie>>>
No
Led tIe>>> No
Led Ie>>>> No
User Guide MiCOM P521 Led tIe>>>> No
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 23/78 Displays the time delay threshold tIe>>>> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the thermal threshold tI trip order associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the broken conductor information associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the circuit breaker failure information associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the negative phase sequence 1st threshold tI2> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the negative phase sequence 2nd threshold tI2>> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. To this LED. Enable your choice using .
Led Therm Trip No
Led Brkn. Cond No
Led CB Fail No
Led tI2> No
Led tI2>> No
Led Input 1 No
Displays the state of the logic input 1 associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the state of the logic input 2 associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the state of the logic input 3 associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using .
Led Input 2 No
Led Input 3 No
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 24/78 Led Input 4 No
User Guide MiCOM P521 Displays the state of the logic input 4 associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the state of the logic input 5 associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the state of the logic input delayed by t Aux 1. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the state of the logic input delayed by t Aux 2. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays the state of the circuit breaker alarm. To modify this choice, press and use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using .
Led Input 5 No
Led t Aux 1 No
Led t Aux 2 No
Led CB Alarm No 3.5.2.4 Group select sub menu CONFIGURATION
Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the menu, press , , , followed by 6 times.
Group Select
Heading of the GROUP SELECT sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press .
Change Group Input = EDGE
Displays the operation mode of the digital input associated to the change of protection setting group: "EDGE" or "LEVEL". To change the operation mode, press then use and to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using . Displays of the active setting group (1 or 2). To manually change the active setting group, press then use and to enter the required value (1 or 2). Enable your choice using . Manual changes are only possible if EDGE is selected in the previous cell.
Setting Group 1
User Guide MiCOM P521 3.5.2.5 Alarms sub menu CONFIGURATION
Heading of the configuration menu. To gain access to alarms menu, press , , , followed by 7 times.
Alarms
Heading of the alarms sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press .
Inst. Self-Reset? No
Displays the reset mode of the alarms concerning the instantaneous (protection start indications): self-reset Yes or No. If the user chooses No, the reset must be done by the push button. To change the reset mode press then use and to select either Yes or No. Enable your choice using . Displays the possibility Yes or No to display the alarm "RAM ERROR" or "BATTERY FAIL" in case of ram error or battery failure. To select the required value (Yes or No) press then use and to toggle between Yes or No. Enable your choice using .
Battery Alarm = No
3.5.2.6 Configuration inputs sub menu It is possible to configure individual digital inputs to be active from either a falling edge/low level, or on a rising edge/high level. This can be done using the inputs cell in the CONFIGURATION column A 0 means that the opto is active low, if the associated function is LEVEL dependent, or active for a falling edge if EDGE dependent. Conversely, a 1 means that the opto is active high, if the associated function is LEVEL dependent, or active for a rising edge if EDGE dependent. The choice of how the digital inputs are activated it dependent upon the application. The table below shows which functions are LEVEL or EDGE dependent. Example: a digital input configured "blocking logic" will operate on level, on the other hand a digital input configured "cold load pick up" will operate on edge. ONLY a digital input configured "change of setting group" can operate either on edge or on level (selectable).
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 26/78 Function Allocated to the Digital Input Unlatch of the output relays Position of the CB, 52a or 52b Blocking logic 1 & 2 Logic selectivity 1 & 2 Aux 1 & Aux 2 CB fault Reset of the thermal state Blocking of the auto-recluse Cold load pick up Start of disturbance record Trip circuit supervision Change of setting group CB fail start
User Guide MiCOM P521 Operation of the Digital Input On level On level On level On level On level On level On edge On level On edge On edge On level On edge or on level On edge
The user has to set in the CONFIGURATION Menu the auxiliary voltage (AC or DC) for the operation of the digital inputs. This setting is necessary due to the time filtering being different if DC or AC is chosen. CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to Configuration Inputs menu, press , , , followed by 8 times. Heading of the Configuration Inputs sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press .
Configuration Inputs
Inputs
54321 11111
Displays how the digital Inputs are activated either on a falling edge/low level, or on a rising edge/high level: 0 = falling edge/low level 1 = rising edge/high level To change the operation mode press then use , to highlight each input followed by and to toggle between 0 and 1. Enable your choice using . Displays the voltage (AC or DC) on the digital Inputs. To change the voltage press then use and to toggle between AC or DC. Enable your choice using .
Voltage input = DC
User Guide MiCOM P521 3.5.2.7 Phase rotation sub menu CONFIGURATION
Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the Phase rotation menu, press , , , followed by 9 times. Heading of the PHASE ROTATION sub menu. To gain access to the Phase Rotation menu, press .
Phase Rotation
Phase Rotation A-B-C
Displays the phase rotation either A-B-C or A-C-B. To change the phase rotation press then use and to toggle between A-B-C or A-C-B. Enable your choice using .
3.5.3
Measurements menu The MEASUREMENTS menu makes it possible to read the various system measurements. There are three main measurement menus, which are Current Diff, Current/Frequency and Communications. The Current Diff menu displays measurements associated with the differential protection (e.g. Differential / Bias currents), whereas the Current/Frequency menu displays more general measurements such as currents and demand values etc. The Communications measurement menu displays error statistics for the protection communications channel.
3.5.3.1 Measurements currents diff sub menu MEASUREMENTS Heading of the MEASUREMENTS menu. To gain access to the Current Diff menu, press , , , .
Current Diff
Heading of the Current Diff sub menu. To gain access to the Current Diff menu, press .
Remote1 IA 640.10 A
Displays the remote A phase current (Fundamental component) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub menu). Displays the remote B phase current (Fundamental component) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub menu). Displays the remote C phase current (Fundamental component) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub menu).
Remote1 IB 629.00 A
Remote1 IC 634.50 A
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 28/78 Differential IA 0A Displays the A phase differential current.
Differential IB 0A
Displays the B phase differential current.
Differential IC 0A
Displays the C phase differential current.
Bias IA 640.10 A
Displays the A phase bias current.
Bias IB 629.00 A
Displays the B phase bias current.
Bias IC 634.50 A
Displays the C phase bias current.
3.5.3.2 Measurements current/frequency sub menu MEASUREMENTS Heading of the MEASUREMENTS menu. To gain access to the Current/Frequency menu, press , , , , .
Current/General
Heading of the Current Frequency sub menu. To gain access to the Current/Frequency menu, press .
IA 640.10 A
Displays the A phase current (True RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub menu). Displays the B phase current (True RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub menu). Displays the C phase current (True RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub menu).
IB 629.00 A
IC 634.50 A
User Guide MiCOM P521 IN 3.15 A
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 29/78 Displays the earth current (True RMS value) taking into account the earth CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub menu). Displays the positive sequence current. 103A
I1 =
I2 = 50A
Displays the negative sequence current.
RATIO I2/I1 = 50%
Displays the ratio of I2/I1.
I N - fn RST = [C]
0.0A
Displays the earth current (True RMS value) minus the current value at the fundamental frequency (value of the harmonics). To clear the value, press (password needed). Note: This measurement is only updated when the is pressed. key
Thermal RST = [C]
67%
Displays the % thermal state based on true RMS values. To clear the % values, press (password needed).
Max & Average I RST = [C]
Allows the user to clear the maximum (peak) and average (rolling) memorized values of the current. To clear these values, press (password needed). Displays the maximum (peak) value for phase A. The value is the true RMS maximum value.
Max IA Rms 127.36 A
Max IB Rms 156.28 A
Displays the maximum (peak) value for phase B. The value is the true RMS maximum value.
Max IC Rms 139.01 A
Displays the maximum (peak) value for phase C. The value is the true RMS maximum value.
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 30/78 Average IA Rms 98.25 A
User Guide MiCOM P521 Displays the rolling value for phase A. The value is the true RMS average value.
Average IB Rms 97.88 A
Displays the rolling value for phase B. The value is the true RMS average value.
Average IC Rms 99.02 A
Displays the rolling value for phase C. The value is the true RMS average value.
MAX. SUBPERIOD RST = [C]
Allows the user to clear the maximum sub-period values of the 3 currents.
MAX. SUBPERIOD IA Rms = 245A
Displays the IA peak value demand. The value is the true RMS maximum value on a sub-period.
MAX. SUBPERIOD IB Rms = 240A
Displays the IB peak value demand. The value is the true RMS maximum value on a sub-period.
MAX. SUBPERIOD IC Rms = 250A
Displays the IC peak value demand. The value is the true RMS maximum value on a sub-period.
ROLLING AVERAGE Allows the user to clear the rolling average values of the 3 currents. RST = [C]
Displays the IA average value demand. The value is the true ROLLING AVERAGE RMS average value on a number of sub-period set in Record IA Rms = 0A menu. Displays the IB average value demand. The value is the true ROLLING AVERAGE RMS average value on a number of sub-period set in Record IB Rms = 0A menu. Displays the IC average value demand. The value is the ROLLING AVERAGE true RMS average value on a number of sub-period set in IC Rms = 0A Record menu.
User Guide MiCOM P521 3.5.3.3 Measurements communications sub menu MEASUREMENTS
Heading of the MEASUREMENTS menu. To gain access to the Communications menu, press , , , followed by 2 times. Heading of the Communications sub menu. To gain access to the Communications menu, press .
Protection Comms
CH1 Valid Msgs 00
Displays the total number of valid messages received.
CH1 Err Msgs 00
Displays the total number of errored received.
CH1 Errored secs 0.0s
Displays the number of seconds containing 1 or more errored or lost messages.
CH1 Sev Err secs 0.0s
Displays the number of seconds containing 31 or more errored or lost messages.
CH1 Prop Delay 0.0s
Displays the propagation delay.
Elapsed Time 0.0s
Displays the time elapsed since the communications measurement statistics were last reset.
Comms Stats RST RST =[C] 3.5.4 Communication menu
Allows the user to clear the communications measurement statistics.
The COMMUNICATION menu depends on the type of communication: MODBUS or IEC 60870-5-103.
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 32/78 3.5.4.1 MODBUS communication menu COMMUNICATION
Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. To gain access to the Control Comms menu, press , 3 times then . To gain access to the sub menu points, press . Heading of the Control Comms menu. To gain access to the Control Comms menu press .
Ctrl Comms
Ctrl Comms? Yes
Enables / disables MODBUS RTU communication via the EIA(RS)485 port on the rear of the relay. To activate communications, press the key and use to select Yes. Enable your choice using . Displays the speed of the MODBUS transmission. Select from: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bauds using or and enable your choice using . Displays the parity in the MODBUS frame. Select Even, Odd or None using or and enable your choice using .
Baud Rate 19200 bd
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
Displays the number of stop bits in the MODBUS frame. Select 0 or 1 using or and enable your choice using . Displays the network address of the MiCOM relay in the MODBUS network. Select from 1 to 255 using or and enable your choice using . Displays the format of the date, either PRIVATE or IEC60870-5 Binary Time 2a.
Relay Address 1
Date format PRIVATE

WARNING:
A MODBUS NETWORK CAN ONLY COMPRISE 32 RELAY ADDRESSES ON THE SAME MODBUS SUB-LAN.
3.5.4.2 IEC 60870-5-103 (VDEW) communication menu COMMUNICATION Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. To gain access to the Control Comms menu, press , 3 times then . To gain access to the sub menu points, press . Heading of the Control Comms menu. To gain access to the Control Comms menu press .
Ctrl Comms
User Guide MiCOM P521 Ctrl Comms? Yes
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 33/78 Enables / disables IEC 60870-5-103 communication via the EIA(RS)485 port on the rear of the relay. To activate communications, press the key and use to select Yes. Displays the speed of IEC 60870-5-103 transmission. Select from: 9600, 19200 bauds using or and enable your choice using . Display of the network address of the MiCOM relay in the IEC 60870-5-103 network. Select from 1 to 255 using or and enable your choice using the key.
Data Bits 9600 bd
Relay Address 29
3.5.4.3 Protection communication menu COMMUNICATION Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. To gain access to the Protection Comms menu, press , 3 times then and . To gain access to the sub menu points, press . Heading of the Protection Comms menu. To gain access to the Protection Comms menu, press .
Protection
Protocol SDLC
Displays the currently selected protocol for the protection comms. Select from SDLC, NRZ and Inverted_NRZ using or and enable your choice using . Displays the speed of protection comms transmission. Select from: 9.6k, 19.2k, 56k and 64kbits per second using or and enable your choice using . Displays the relays protection comms address. Select from: 1A, 2A, 3A, 1B etc. through to F3 using or and enable your choice using the key. Displays the source of the protection comms clock. Select from INTERNAL or EXTERNAL using or and enable your choice using . Allows a settable delay for which a comms failure must be present before an alarm is issued.
Data Rate 64k
Relay Address 1A
Clock Source Ch1 INTERNAL
Comm Fail Timer 0 ms
Comm Delay Tol 1 ms
Displays the maximum allowable propagation time variation. Variations greater than the set value will result in a bias characteristic modification, in order to stabilize the relay.
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 34/78 Char Mod Time 1s 3.5.5 Protection menu
User Guide MiCOM P521 Displays the duration the bias characteristic is modified for, following a variation in the propagation delay greater than the "Comm Delay Tol".
The PROTECTION menu (designated as PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2 menus) enables the user to program various protection functions and settings (thresholds, time delay etc.) associated with all the protection functions. The various sub menus are: [87] Current Diff [50/51] Phase OC [50N/51N] E/Gnd [46] Neg Seq OC [49] Therm OL [37] Under Current To gain access to the PROTECTION G1 menu press PROTECTION G2 menu press then 5 times 3.5.5.1 [87] Current diff sub menu PROTECTION G1 Heading of the PROTECTION G1 menu. To gain access to the [87] Current Diff menu, press , 4 times, then . then 4 times. For
[87] Current Diff
Heading of the [87] Current Diff sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press .
Current Diff? Yes
Enables / disables Current Differential protection. To activate the current differential protection, press the key and use to select Yes. Enable your choice using . Displays Is1 threshold value. The Is1threshold is adjustable from 0.1 to 2 In. To modify this value, press followed by or to select the desired value. Enable your choice using the key. Displays Is2 threshold value. To modify this value, press . The Is2 threshold is adjustable from 1 to 30 In. Press to enable your adjustment. Displays the gradient of the K1 slope. To modify this value, press . The k1 setting is adjustable from 0 to 150%. Press to enable your adjustment. If setting below 30%, see P521/EN AP section 2.1.5.3.
Is1 0.2 In
Is2 2.0 In
k1 30 %
User Guide MiCOM P521 k2 150 %
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 35/78 Displays the gradient of the k2 slope. To modify this value, press . The k2 setting is adjustable from 30 to 150%. Press to enable your adjustment. Selects the delay type for the Current Differential protection. Select from DMT or IDMT using or and enable your choice using . Displays the desired operating time for the current differential protection if the delay type is DMT. Select 0 ms for instantaneous. To modify this value, press followed by or . Press to enable your adjustment. Displays the desired operating curve for the current differential protection if the delay type is IDMT. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI or IEEE EI using or and enable your choice using . Displays the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) associated with the I Diff Curve. TMS is visible when any of the IEC curves are selected. To modify this value, press followed by or . Press to enable your adjustment. Displays the Time Dial associated with the I Diff Curve. TD is visible when CO2, CO8 or IEEE curves are selected. To modify this value, press followed by or . Press to enable your adjustment. Displays the PIT operating time. To modify this value press . The PIT time is adjustable from 50ms to 20 seconds. Press to enable your adjustment. Enables / Disables the remote current check feature for the Permissive Intertrip (PIT) function. Choose YES to disable the current check. To choose between YES or NO, Press , followed by or . Press to enable your adjustment. Displays the dwell time associated with the Direct Intertrip (DIT) commands received from the remote relay. To modify this value press . The dwell time is adjustable from 0.1 to 5 seconds. Press to enable your adjustment.
IDiff Delay Type DMT
tIdiff 0 ms
I Diff Curve IEC SI
IDiff Tms 1.0
IDiff Time Dial 1.0
PIT Time 50 ms
PIT I Disable No
DIT Rx tDwell 100 ms
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 36/78 Inrush Restraint No
User Guide MiCOM P521 Enables / Disables the inrush restraint facility. Choose YES to enable inrush restraint facility. To choose between YES or NO press , followed by or . Press to enable your adjustment. Displays the Idiff High Set setting when Inrush Restraint is enabled. To modify this value press . The High Set is adjustable from 4 to 32 In. Press to enable your adjustment.
High Set 4.0 IN
3.5.5.2 [50/51] Phase OC sub menu PROTECTION G1 Heading of the PROTECTION G1 menu. To gain access to the [50/51] Phase OC sub menu, press , 4 times, then and . Heading of the [50/51] Phase OC sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu press .
[50/51] Phase OC
I>? Yes
Selection of the first phase threshold (I>). Select Yes, No or Backup. If the user enters I>(Yes or Backup), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters I> (No), go to I>> menu. If Backup is selected I> will only function in the event of a Protection Comms Failure. Displays the threshold current value I>. To modify this value, press . The threshold I> is adjustable from 0.1 to 25 In. Press to enable your adjustment. Selection of the I> threshold time delay type. Select DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves or RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve.
I> 1 In
I>
Delay Type DMT
3.5.5.2.1 I> DMT threshold menu I> Delay Type DMT Displays the I> DMT time delay.
tI > 100 ms
Selection of the I> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using or and enable your choice using .
User Guide MiCOM P521 3.5.5.2.2 I> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curve menu I> Delay Type IDMT
Display the I> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves).
I>
Curve IEC SI
Selection of the I> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI using or and enable your choice using the key . Displays the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) associated with the IDMT Curve. TMS is visible when any of the IEC curves are selected. Select the curve TMS value. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using or and enable your choice using . Displays the Time Dial associated with the IDMT Curve. Time Dial is visible when CO2, CO8 or IEEE curves are selected. Select from 0.1 to 100 using or and enable your choice using .
I>
Tms 1.0
I>
Time Dial 1.0
3.5.5.2.3 I> DMT reset time, IEEE/ANSI curves menu Reset Type DMT Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between DMT (Definite Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using or and enable your choice using . Selection of the tReset value associated with the DMT reset time choice. Select from 40 ms to 100 s using or and enable your choice using .
tReset
40 ms
3.5.5.2.4 I> IDMT reset time, IEEE/ANSI curves menu Reset Type IDMT Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using or and enable your choice using . Selection of the Rtms value associated with the IDMT reset time choice. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using or and enable your choice using .
Rtms
1.0
3.5.5.2.5 I> IDMT threshold, electromechanical RI curve menu I> Delay Type RI Display of the I> inverse time delay (electromechanical RI curve).
K 1.0
Selection of the RI curve K value. Select from 0.100 to 10 using or and enable your choice using .
3.5.5.2.6 I> DMT reset time, IEC / electromechanical RI curves menu tReset 60 ms 3.5.5.2.7 I>> threshold menu I>>? No Selection of the I>> second phase threshold. Select Yes, No or Backup. If the user enters I>>(Yes or Backup), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters I>> (No) go to I>>> menu. If Backup is selected I>> will only function in the event of a Protection Comms Failure. Selection of the I>> second threshold current value. To modify this value, press . The threshold I>> is adjustable from 0.5 to 40 In using or . Press to enable your adjustment. Selection of the I>> time delay type threshold. Select DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves, RI for electromechanical inverse time curve. According to this setting, additional settings appear, as shown for I> above. Selection of the second threshold I>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using or and enable your choice using . Selection of the tReset value from 40 ms to 100 s using or and enable your choice using .
I>> 10 In
I>> Delay Type DMT
tI >> 100 ms 3.5.5.2.8 I>>> threshold menu I>>>? No
Selection of the I>>> third phase threshold. Select Yes, No or Backup. If the user enters I>>>(Yes or Backup), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters I>>> (No) go to I>>>> menu. If Backup is selected I>>> will only function in the event of a Protection Comms Failure. Selection of the I>>> third threshold current value. To modify this value, press . The threshold I>>> is adjustable from 0.5 to 40 In. Press to enable your adjustment.
I>>> 10 In
tI >>> 100 ms 3.5.5.2.9 I>>>> threshold menu I>>>>? No
Selection of the third threshold I>>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using or and enable your choice using .
Selection of the I>>>> fourth phase threshold. Select Yes, No or Backup. If the user enters I>>>> (Yes or Backup), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters I>>>> (No), the LCD display returns to the heading of the menu [50/51] Phase OC. If Backup is selected I>>>> will only function in the event of a Protection Comms Failure.
I>>>> 10 In
Selection of the I>>>> fourth threshold current value. To modify this value, press . The threshold I>>>> is adjustable from 0.5 to 40 In. Press to enable your adjustment. Selection of the fourth threshold I>>>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using or and enable your choice using .
tI >>>> 100 ms
3.5.5.3 [50N/51N] Earth OC sub menu PROTECTION G1 Heading of the PROTECTION G1 menu. To gain access to the [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub menu, press , 4 times, and twice. Heading of the [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press .
[50N/51N] E/Gnd
Ie>? Yes
Selection of the first earth threshold (Ie>). Select Yes, No or Backup. If the user enters Ie>(Yes or Backup), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters > (No), go to Ie>> menu. Displays the current threshold value Ie>. To modify this value, press . The threshold Ie> is adjustable from: 0.002 to 1 Ien (0.002 to 1 Ien Range), 0.01 to Ien (0.01 to 8 Ien Range) and 0.1 to 25 Ien (0.1 to 40 Ien Range). Press to enable your adjustment.
le > 0.05 Ien
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 40/78 Ie> Delay Type DMT
User Guide MiCOM P521 Selection of the Ie> threshold time delay type. Select from DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves, RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve or LABOR. for Laborelec inverse curves. Make your selection using or and enable your choice using .
3.5.5.3.1 Ie> DMT threshold menu Ie> Delay Type DMT Displays the Ie> DMT time delay.
tIe > 100 ms
Selection of the Ie> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using or and enable your choice using .
3.5.5.3.2 Ie> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu Ie> Delay Type IDMT Displays the Ie> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves).
Ie> Curve IEC SI
Selection of the Ie> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI using or and enable your choice using the key . Displays the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) associated with the IDMT Curve. TMS is visible when any of the IEC curves are selected. Select the curve TMS value. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using or and enable your choice using . Displays the Time Dial associated with the IDMT Curve. Time Dial is visible when CO2, CO8 or IEEE curves are selected. Select from 0.1 to 100 using or and enable your choice using .
Ie> Tms 1.0
Ie> Time Dial 1.0
3.5.5.3.3 Ie> DMT reset time, IEEE/ANSI curves menu Reset Type DMT Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using or and enable your choice using . Selection of the tReset value associated with the DMT reset time choice. Select from 40 ms to 100 s using or and enable your choice using .
TReset 40 ms
User Guide MiCOM P521 3.5.5.3.4 Ie> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu Reset Type IDMT
Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using or and enable your choice using . Selection of the Rtms value associated with the IDMT reset time choice. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using or and enable your choice using .
Rtms
1.0
3.5.5.3.5 Ie> IDMT threshold, electromechanical RI curve menu Ie> Delay type RI Displays the Ie> inverse time delay (electromechanical RI curve).
K 1.0
Selection of the RI curve K value. Select from 0.100 to 10 using or and enable your choice using .
3.5.5.3.6 Ie> DMT reset time, IEC/RI curves menu tReset 60 ms Selection of the tReset value from 40 ms to 100 s using or and enable your choice using .
3.5.5.3.7 Ie> IDMT threshold, Laborelec curve menu Ie> Delay type LABOR. Displays the Ie> inverse time delay (Laborelec curve).
Ie> Curve 1
Selection of the Laborelec curve. Select from Curve 1, 2 or 3 using or and enable your choice using .
tReset 40 ms 3.5.5.3.8 Ie>> threshold menu Ie>>? No
Selection of the tReset value from 40 ms to 100 s using or and enable your choice using .
Selection of the Ie>> second earth threshold. Select Yes, No or Backup. If the user enters Ie>>(Yes or Backup), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters Ie>> (No) go to Ie>>> menu. If Backup is selected Ie>> will only function in the event of a Protection Comms Failure.
User Guide MiCOM P521 Selection of the Ie>> second threshold current value. To modify this value, press . The threshold Ie>> is adjustable from : 0.002 to 1Ien (0.002 to 1 Ien Range) 0.01 to 8 Ien (0.01 to 8 Ien Range), and 0.5 to 40 Ien (0.1 to 40 Ion Range). Press to validate your adjustment. Selection of the Ie>> threshold time delay type. Select DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves, RI for electromechanical inverse time curve. According to this setting, additional settings appear, as shown for I> above. Selection of the second threshold Ie>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using or and validate your choice using .
Ie>>
5 Ien
Ie>> Delay Type DMT
tIe>> 100 ms 3.5.5.3.9 Ie>>> threshold menu Ie>>>? No
Selection of the Ie>>> third earth threshold. Select Yes, No or Backup. If the user enters Ie>>> (Yes or Backup), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters Ie>>> (No) go to Ie>>> menu. If Backup is selected Ie>>> will only function in the event of a Protection Comms Failure.
Ie>>> 10 Ien
Selection of the Ie>>> third threshold current value. To modify this value, press . The threshold Ie>>> is adjustable from 0.5 to 40 Ien. Press to validate your adjustment. Selection of the third threshold Ie>>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using or and validate your choice using .
tIe>>> 100 ms 3.5.5.3.10 Ie>>>> threshold menu Ie>>>>? Yes
Selection of the Ie>>>> fourth earth threshold. Select Yes, No or Backup. If the user validates Ie>>>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters Ie>>> (No), the LCD display returns to the heading of the menu [50N/51N] E/Gnd. If Backup is selected Ie>>>> will only function in the event of a Protection Comms Failure.
Ie>>>> 10 Ien
Selection of the Ie>>>> fourth threshold current value. To modify this value, press . The threshold Ie>>>> is adjustable from 0.5 to 40 Ien. Press to validate your adjustment.
User Guide MiCOM P521 tIe>>>> 100 ms
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 43/78 Selection of the third threshold Ie>>>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using or and validate your choice using .
3.5.5.4 [46] Negative phase sequence I2> sub menu PROTECTION G1 Heading of the PROTECTION G1 menu. To gain access to the [46] Neg Seq OC sub menu, press , 4 times, then and 3 times. Heading of the [46] NEGATIVE Phase SEQUENCE I2>sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press .
[46] Neg Seq OC
I2>? No
Selection of the negative phase sequence overcurrent function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user selects (No), the menu is deactivated. Displays the negative sequence current threshold value I2>. To modify this value, press . The threshold I2> is adjustable from 0.1 to 40 In, in steps of 0.01 In. Press to validate your adjustment. Selection of the I2> threshold time delay type. Select from DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves or RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve. To make a selection use or and validate your choice using .
I2> 0.1 In
I2> Delay Type DMT
3.5.5.4.1 I2> DMT threshold menu I2> Delay Type DMT Displays the I2> DMT time delay.
t I2 > 100 ms
Selection of the I2> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using or and validate your choice using .
3.5.5.4.2 I2> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu I2> Delay Type IDMT Displays the I2> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves).
I2> Curve IEC SI
Selection of the I2> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI using or and validate your choice using the key .
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 44/78 I2> Tms 0,025
User Guide MiCOM P521 Displays the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) associated with the IDMT Curve. TMS is visible when any of the IEC curves are selected. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using or and validate your choice using . Displays the Time Dial associated with the IDMT Curve. Time Dial is visible when CO2, CO8 or IEEE curves are selected. Select from 0.1 to 100 using or and enable your choice using .
I2> Time Dial 1.0
3.5.5.4.2.1 I2> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu tReset 60 ms Selection of the tReset value from 40 ms to 100 s using or and validate your choice using .
3.5.5.4.2.2 I2> DMT reset time, IEEE/ANSI curves menu Reset Type DMT Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using or and validate your choice using . Selection of the tReset value associated with the DMT reset time choice. Select from 40 ms to 100 s using or and validate your choice using .
tReset 40 ms
3.5.5.4.2.3 I2> IDMT reset time, IEEE/ANSI curves menu Reset Type IDMT Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using or and validate your choice using . Selection of the Rtms value associated with the IDMT reset time choice. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using or and validate your choice using .
Rtms 0.025
3.5.5.4.3 I2> IDMT threshold, electromechanical RI curve menu I2> Delay Type RI Display of the I2> inverse time delay (electromechanical RI curve).
K 2.500
Selection of the RI curve K value. Select from 0.100 to 10 using or and validate your choice using .
User Guide MiCOM P521 3.5.5.4.3.1 I2> DMT reset time, RI curves t Reset 60 ms 3.5.5.4.4 I2>> threshold menu I2>>? Yes
Selection of the t Reset value from 40 ms to 100 s using or and validate your choice using .
Selection of the 2nd threshold of the negative phase sequence overcurrent function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user selects (No), the menu is deactivated. Displays the value of the 2nd threshold of the negative phase sequence overcurrent function. To modify this value, press . The threshold I2>> is adjustable from 0.1 In to 40 In, in steps of 0.01 In. Press to validate your adjustment. Selection of the 2nd threshold I2>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using or and validate your choice using .
I2>> 1 In
tI2>> 150 ms 3.5.5.5 [49] Therm OL sub menu PROTECTION G1
Heading of the PROTECTION G1 menu. To gain access to the [49] Thermal OL sub menu, press , 4 times, then and 4 times. Heading of the Thermal OL menu. To gain access to the sub menu content press .
[49] Therm OL
Therm OL? Yes
Selection of the thermal overload function. Select Yes or No. If the user enters Yes, the following menu is displayed. If the user enters No, the menu is deactivated. Displays the thermal current threshold value I>. To modify this value, press . The threshold I> is adjustable from 0.1 to 3.2 In, in steps of 0.01. Press to validate your choice.
I > 0.5 In
Te 10 mn
Displays the thermal time constant (Te) associated with the thermal overload formula. To modify this value, press . The time constant Te is adjustable from 1 to 200 minutes, in steps of 1 min. Press to validate your adjustment.
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 46/78 K 1.05
User Guide MiCOM P521 Displays the k factor associated with the thermal overload function. To modify this value, press . The k factor is adjustable from 1 to 1.5, in steps of 0.01. Press to validate your adjustment.
Trip 110 %
Displays the percentage applicable to the thermal overload trip threshold. To modify this value, press . Trip is adjustable from 50 % to 200 % in steps of 1%. Press to validate your adjustment.
Alarm? Yes
Selection of the thermal overload alarm function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user selects (No), the thermal overload alarm will be disabled. Displays the percentage applicable to the thermal overload alarm threshold. To modify this value, press . Trip is adjustable from 50 % to 200 % step of 1%. Press to validate your adjustment.
Alarm 90 %
3.5.5.6 [37] Undercurrent I< sub menu [37] Under Current Heading of the [37] Under-Current sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press .
I<? Yes
Selection of the undercurrent function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user selects (no) the menu is deactivated. Displays the undercurrent threshold value I<. To modify this value, press . The threshold I< is adjustable from 0.02 In to 1 In, in steps of 0.01 In. Press to validate your adjustment. Selection of the time delay associated with the undercurrent threshold. Select the time delay from 0 s to 150 s using or and validate your choice using .
I< 0.2 In
tI< 200 ms 3.5.6 Automat. ctrl menu
The AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu makes it possible to programme the various automation functions included in the MiCOM P521. The various sub menus are: Commissioning Trip Commands
User Guide MiCOM P521 Latch Functions (latch of the trip output relay RL1) I-Trip Commands (intertrips) Blocking Logic 1 Blocking Logic 2 Logic Select. 1 Logic Select. 2 Outputs Relays Latch Output Relays (latch of the auxiliary output relays) Invert Output Relays Inputs Broken Conductor Cold Load PU CB Fail CB Supervision To access the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu, press 3.5.6.1 Commissioning sub menu followed by
six times.
This sub menu has been designed as a commissioning tool to aid testing. It makes it possible to disable output contacts and freeze circuit breaker measurements (such as number of operation etc.). In addition, this menu allows the user to perform a contact and LED test. A Loopback facility is also provided so that the relay can be fully tested in the absence of a remote relay (see ??? section ??? for more information). AUTOMAT.CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the commissioning menu, press , 6 times then .
Commissioning
Heading of the Commissioning sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press .
Commissioning? No
Enables / Disables of the Commissioning facilities. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user selects (No) the menu is deactivated. Allows the user to illuminate all eight LEDs on the front of the P521. To illuminate the LEDs select (Yes) and Press . The LEDs will remain illuminated for 5 seconds after the key is pressed. If (No) is selected the relay will not perform an LED test.
LED Test No
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 48/78 Disable Relays No
User Guide MiCOM P521 Enables / Disables all outputs contacts. To disable the output contacts select (Yes). The TRIP LED and LCD will continue to function correctly even with the contacts disabled. An ISOLATED RELAYS ALARM (accompanied by the alarm LED) will be generated when the contacts are disabled. The alarm can only be reset when output contacts are re-enabled by selecting (No).
Trip Test:
Allocation of contacts to be tested. 87654321 , then 00000000 To allocate the trip test to the output relay(s), press select the desired output relay with the value 1 using . Repeat the operation on the other output relays if desired, then validate using . Allows the user to operate the selected contacts. To operate the selected contacts press followed by to select (Yes). The contacts will remain operated whilst (Yes) is selected. To deactivate the contacts select (No). Allows the user to freeze the Circuit breaker measurements in the RECORDS/CB Monitoring menu. To freeze the measurements press followed by to select (Yes). To re-activate the CB measurements, select (No) and validate your choice using . Allows the user to set the Loopback Test to CHANNEL_1 (=On). In this mode the relay will only accept messages from itself and no other relay. To avoid a COMMS FAIL alarm the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) must be connected together on the protection comms channel. To enable the Loopback Test press followed by to select (Yes). This will be accompanied by the LOOPBACK MODE alarm. To deactivate the Loopback Test, select (No). Indicates which phase (A, B or C) is currently operating due to the current differential protection. Indication is given as soon as the current enters the trip region but will reset once the current exits this region.
Contact Test No
Disable CB Stats: No
Loopback Test OFF
I Diff Trip Flags TRIP: A, B, C
User Guide MiCOM P521 3.5.6.2 Trip commands sub menu
This sub menu makes it possible to assign selected thresholds to the trip output (RL1). AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Trip Commands menu, press , 6 times, , then .
Trip Commands
Heading of the Trip ORDER sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press .
Trip Idiff Yes
Allocates the current differential protection to the trip output (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, the trip output relay (RL1) will be activated when the current differential protection operates. If the user validates No, the trip output relay (RL1) will not be activated even when the current differential protection operates. Allocates the Direct Intertrip function to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Trip Direct I-Trip Yes
Trip C Diff I-Trip Yes
Allocates the Current Differential Intertrip function to the trip output relay. Select Yes or No.
Trip PIT Yes
Allocates the Permissive Intertrip function to the trip output relay. Select Yes or No.
Trip tI> Yes
Allocates the first phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>) to the trip output (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, the trip output relay (RL1) will be activated at the end of the time delay tI>. If the user validates No, the trip output relay (RL1) will never be activated, even at the end of the time delay tI>. Allocates the second phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Trip tI>> Yes
Trip tI>>> Yes
Allocates the third phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 50/78 Trip tI>>>> Yes
User Guide MiCOM P521 Allocates the fourth phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Trip tIe> Yes
Allocates the first earth fault time delay threshold (tIe>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Trip tIe>> Yes
Allocates the second earth fault time delay threshold (tIe>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Trip tIe>>> Yes
Allocates the third earth fault time delay threshold (tIe>>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Trip tIe>>>> Yes
Allocates the fourth earth fault time delay threshold (tIe>>>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Trip tI< Yes
Allocates of the under current threshold (tI<) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Trip tI2> Yes
Allocates the first time delayed negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (tI2>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No. Allocates the second time delayed negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (tI2>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No. Allocates the thermal overload Trip (Trip) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Trip tI2>> Yes
Trip Thermal Yes
Trip Brkn.Cond Yes
Allocates the broken conductor detection to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Trip tAux 1 Yes
Allocates the auxiliary timer Aux 1 to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
User Guide MiCOM P521 Trip tAux 2 Yes 3.5.6.3 Latch functions sub menu
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 51/78 Allocates the auxiliary timer Aux 2 to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
This sub menu makes it possible to latch the trip output relay RL1 after being operated by one or several thresholds. AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Latch Functions menu, press , , 6 times, , then twice. Heading of the Latch Functions sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press .
Latch Functions
Latch Idiff No
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the current differential protection (Idiff) has operated (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 will be latched even after Idiff has reset. If the user validates No, RL1 will drop off after Idiff has reset. Latch the trip output RL1 once the Direct Intertrip function has operated.
Latch Direct I-Trip No
Latch C Diff I-Trip No
Latch the trip output RL1 once the Current Differential Intertrip function has operated.
Latch PIT No
Latch the trip output RL1 once the Permissive Intertrip function has operated.
Latch tI> No
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the first time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>) has operated. Select Yes or No. Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the second time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>) has operated. Select Yes or No. Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the third time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>>) has operated. Select Yes or No.
Latch tI>> No
Latch tI>>> No
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 52/78 Latch tI>>>> No
User Guide MiCOM P521 Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the fourth time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>>>) has operated. Select Yes or No. Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the first time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>) has operated. Select Yes or No.
Latch tIe> No
Latch tIe>> No
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the second time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>>) has operated. Select Yes or No. Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the third time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>>>) has operated. Select Yes or No. Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the fourth time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>>>>) has operated. Select Yes or No. Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the time delayed under current threshold (tI<) has operated. Select Yes or No. Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the first time delayed negative sequence over current threshold (tI2>) has operated. Select Yes or No. Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the second time delayed negative sequence over current threshold (tI2>>) has operated. Select Yes or No. Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the thermal element has operated. Select Yes or No.
Latch tIe>>> No
Latch tIe>>>> No
Latch tI< No
Latch tI2> No
Latch tI2>> No
Latch Thermal No
Latch Brkn.Cond No
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the broken conductor protection has operated. Select Yes or No.
Latch t Aux 1 No
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once auxiliary timer 1 has operated. Select Yes or No.
User Guide MiCOM P521 Latch t Aux 2 No
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 53/78 Latches the trip output relay RL1 once auxiliary timer 2 has operated. Select Yes or No.
3.5.6.4 I-Trip commands sub menu This sub menu makes it possible to assign functions to initiate a direct intertrip (DIT) command without additional wiring of logic inputs or output relays. AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the I-Trip Functions menu, press , , 6 times, , followed by 3 times. Heading of the I-Trip Commands sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press .
I-Trip Commands
I-Trip tI> No
Initiates a DIT command to the remote relay when stage 1 overcurrent (tI>) has operated. Select Yes or No. If the user validates Yes, the tI> function will initiate a DIT command. If the user validates No, the tI> function will not initiate a DIT command. Initiates a DIT command to the remote relay when stage 2 overcurrent (tI>>) has operated. Select Yes or No.
I-Trip tI>> No
I-Trip tI>>> No
Initiates a DIT command to the remote relay when stage 3 overcurrent (tI>>>) has operated. Select Yes or No.
I-Trip tI>>>> No
Initiates a DIT command to the remote relay when stage 4 overcurrent (tI>>>>) has operated. Select Yes or No.
I-Trip tIe> No
Initiates a DIT command to the remote relay when stage 1 time delayed earth fault (tIe>) has operated. Select Yes or No. Initiates a DIT command to the remote relay when stage 2 time delayed earth fault (tIe>>) has operated. Select Yes or No. Initiates a DIT command to the remote relay when stage 3 time delayed earth fault (tIe>>>) has operated. Select Yes or No.
I-Trip tIe>> No
I-Trip tIe>>> No
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 54/78 I-Trip tIe>>>> No
User Guide MiCOM P521 Initiates a DIT command to the remote relay when stage 4 time delayed earth fault (tIe>>>>) has operated. Select Yes or No. Initiates a DIT command to the remote relay when the time delayed under current (tI<) has operated. Select Yes or No.
I-Trip tI< No
I-Trip tI2> No
Initiates a DIT command to the remote relay when the first time delayed negative sequence over current (tI2>) has operated. Select Yes or No. Initiates a DIT command to the remote relay when the second time delayed negative sequence over current (tI2>>) has operated. Select Yes or No. Initiates a DIT command to the remote relay when the thermal element has operated. Select Yes or No.
I-Trip tI2>> No
I-Trip Thermal No
I-Trip Brkn.Cond No
Initiates a DIT command to the remote relay when the broken conductor protection has operated. Select Yes or No. Initiates a DIT command to the remote relay when auxiliary timer 1 has operated. Select Yes or No.
I-Trip tAux 1 No
I-Trip tAux 2 No
Initiates a DIT command to the remote relay when auxiliary timer 2 has operated. Select Yes or No.
I-Trip CB Fail No
Initiates a DIT command to the remote relay when the local relay has detected a CB Fail condition. Select Yes or No.
User Guide MiCOM P521 3.5.6.5 Blocking logic sub menu
The Blocking Logic sub menu (designated as Blocking Logic 1 and Blocking Logic 2 menus) enables the user to block any of the time delayed thresholds by allocating to a "Blk Log" input (refer to Inputs menu). AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Blocking Logic 1 menu, press , , 6 times, , followed by 4 times (5 times for Blocking Logic 2). Heading of the Blocking Logic sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu contents, press .
Blocking Logic
Block Idiff No
Blocking of the current differential protection (Idiff) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, Idiff will be blocked on the transition (logic state 1) of the "Blk log" logic input. If the user validates No, the transition of the "Blk log" logic input will not block Idiff. Blocking of the first time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, the first threshold will be blocked on the transition (logic state 1) of the "Blk log" logic input. If the user validates No, the transition of the "Blk log" logic input will not block the first phase threshold tI>. Blocking of the second time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>). Select Yes or No.
Block tI> No
Block tI>> No
Block tI>>> No
Blocking of the third time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>>). Select Yes or No.
Block tI>>>> No
Blocking of the fourth time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>>>). Select Yes or No.
Block tIe> No
Blocking of the first time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>). Select Yes or No.
Block tIe>> No
Blocking of the second time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>>). Select Yes or No.
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 56/78 Block tIe>>> No
User Guide MiCOM P521 Blocking of the third time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>>>). Select Yes or No.
Block tIe>>>> No
Blocking of the fourth time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>>>>). Select Yes or No.
Block tI2 > No
Blocking of the first time delayed negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (tI2>). Select Yes or No.
Block tI2 >> No
Blocking of the second time delayed negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (tI2>>). Select Yes or No.
Block Thermal No
Blocking of the thermal protection. Select Yes or No.
Block Brkn.Cond No
Blocking of the broken conductor protection. Select Yes or No.
Block t Aux 1 No
Blocking of the auxiliary timer 1 (tAux1). Select Yes or No.
Block t Aux 2 No 3.5.6.6 Logic select sub menus
Blocking of the auxiliary timer 2 (tAux2). Select Yes or No.
The Logic Select sub menus (designated as Logic Select. 1 and Logic Select. 2) sub menus enable the user to allocate a time delay threshold to the "Log sel" input (refer to Inputs menu). When the "Log sel" input is energized the selected overcurrent and earth fault time delays will change to the tSEL1 or tSEL2 time. AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Logic Select. 1 menu, press , , 6 times, , followed by 6 times (7 times for Logic Select. 2). Heading of the Logic Select. 1 sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu contents, press .
Logic Select. 1
User Guide MiCOM P521 Sel1 tI>> No
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 57/78 Logic selectivity of the second time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, operation of the second threshold will be delayed for tSel1 on the transition (logic state 1) of the "Log Sel 1" logic input. If the user validates No, the transition of the "Log Sel 1" logic input will not alter the second threshold tI>>. Logic selectivity of the third time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>>). Select Yes or No.
Sel1 tI>>> No
Sel1 tI>>>> No
Logic selectivity of the fourth time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>>). Select Yes or No.
Sel1 tIe>> No
Logic selectivity of the second time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>>). Select Yes or No.
Sel1 tIe>>> No
Logic selectivity of the third time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>>>). Select Yes or No.
Sel1 tIe>>>> No
Logic selectivity of the fourth time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>>>>). Select Yes or No.
tSel1 0 ms
Displays the selective scheme logic time delay t Sel1. To modify this value, press . The tSel1 is adjustable from 0 ms to 150 s in steps of 10 ms. Press to validate your adjustment.
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 58/78 3.5.6.7 Output relays sub menu
This sub menu makes it possible to allocate an output relay (except Watchdog RL0) to the various thresholds (instantaneous and/or time delay). Note that the TRIP contact RL1 is allocated in the Trip Commands menu (under AUTOMAT. CTRL). Output relay RL2 has change over contacts, whereas relays RL3 to RL8 have only normally open contacts. AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Output Relays menu, press , , 6 times, , followed by 8 times. Heading of the Output Relays sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu contents, press .
Output Relays
Trip
8765432 0000000
Allocates any trip order to the selected output relays (copies the trip contact onto one or several selected relays). To select the desired output relay(s), press , then select the desired output relay with a value 1 using .Repeat the operation on the other output relays if desired, then validate using . Allocates the current differential protection (Idiff) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Idiff
8765432 0000000
Backup Prot
8765432 0000000
Allocates the backup protection enabled function to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Comms Fail
8765432 0000000
Allocates the Comms Fail alarm (protection comms) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Direct I-TRIP
8765432 0000000
Allocates the Direct Intertrip received to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
C DIFF I-TRIP
8765432 0000000
Allocates the Current Differential Intertrip received to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
PIT
8765432 0000000
Allocates the Permissive Intertrip operation to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
User Guide MiCOM P521 I> 8765432 0000000
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 59/78 Allocates the first instantaneous phase overcurrent threshold (I>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
tI>
8765432 0000000
Allocates the first time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>) to the output relays. Select output relays.
I>>
8765432 0000000
Allocates the second instantaneous phase overcurrent threshold (I>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays. Allocates the second time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>) to the output relays. Select output relays.
tI>>
8765432 0000000
I>>>
8765432 0000000
Allocates the third instantaneous phase overcurrent threshold (I>>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays. Allocates the third time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
tI>>>
8765432 0000000
I>>>>
8765432 0000000
Allocates the fourth instantaneous phase overcurrent threshold (I>>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays. Allocates the fourth time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays. Allocates the first instantaneous earth fault threshold (Ie>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
tI>>>> 8765432 0000000
Ie>
8765432 0000000
tIe>
8765432 0000000
Allocates the first time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Ie>>
8765432 0000000
Allocates the second instantaneous earth fault threshold (Ie>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 60/78 tIe>> 8765432 0000000
User Guide MiCOM P521 Allocates the second time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Ie>>>
8765432 0000000
Allocates the third instantaneous earth fault threshold (Ie>>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
tIe>>> 8765432 0000000
Allocates the third time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Ie>>>> 8765432 0000000
Allocates the fourth instantaneous earth fault threshold (Ie>>>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays. Allocates the fourth time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>>>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays. Allocates the time delayed under current threshold (tI<) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
tIe>>>> 8765432 0000000
tI<
8765432 0000000
tI2>
8765432 0000000
Allocates the first negative phase sequence overcurrent time delay threshold (tI2>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays. Allocates of the second negative phase sequence overcurrent time delay threshold (tI2>>) to the output relays. Select output relays. Allocates the thermal alarm threshold to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
tI2>>
8765432 0000000
Therm Alarm
8765432 0000000
Therm Trip
8765432 0000000
Allocates the thermal trip threshold to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
CB Alarm
8765432 0000000
Allocates the circuit breaker alarm function to the selected output relays (excessive CB operations, An, excessive tripping, closing time, CB status DBI). Select output relays.
User Guide MiCOM P521 52 Fail 8765432 0000000
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 61/78 Allocates the circuit breaker (52) trip circuit supervision function to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Brkn. Cond
8765432 0000000
Allocates of the broken conductor function to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
CB Fail
8765432 0000000
Allocates the circuit breaker failure function to the selected output relays. Select output relays. CB Fail = CB not open at the end of tBF timer. Allocates the circuit breaker closing command to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
CB Close
8765432 0000000
tAux 1
8765432 0000000
Allocates auxiliary timer 1 (Aux 1) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
tAux 2
8765432 0000000
Allocates auxiliary timer 2 (Aux 2) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Active Group
8765432 0000000
Allocates setting group 2 indication to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
3.5.6.8 Latch of the auxiliary output relays This sub menu makes it possible to latch the individual output relays. The latch can be reset by key once the function that initiated the relay has reset. AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Latch Output Relays menu, press , , 6 times, , followed by 9 times. Heading of the Latch Output Relays sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press .
Latch Output Relays
Output 2 No
Latch output relay RL2. Select Yes or No.
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 62/78 Output 3 No Latch output relay RL3. Select Yes or No.
Output 4 No
Output 5 No
Output 6 No
Output 7 No
Output 8 No
3.5.6.9 Inversion of the auxiliary output relays This sub menu makes it possible to invert the state of the individual output relays while the relay is energized. AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Invert Output Relays menu, press , , 6 times, , followed by 10 times. Heading of the Invert Output Relays sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press .
Invert Output Relays
Output 2 No
Invert output relay RL2. Select Yes or No.
Output 3 No
Output 4 No
Output 5 No
Output 6 No
Output 7 No
Output 8 No 3.5.6.10 Inputs sub menu
This sub menu makes it possible to allocate any of the 5 logic inputs to either a label or an automation function. The available selections are shown in the following table: Label abstract None Unlatch 52 a 52 b Aux 1 Aux 2 Blk Log 1 Blk Log 2 Strt Dist Cold L PU Log Sel 1 Log Sel 2 Change set Reset Trip Circ Label signification No allocation Unlatches currently latched output contacts Status of 52a CB auxiliary contact Status of 52b CB auxiliary contact Initiates auxiliary timer AUX 1 Initiates auxiliary timer AUX 2 Blocking logic 1 Blocking logic 2 Triggers the disturbance recorder Enables cold load pick up functionality Logic select 1 Logic select 2 Changes setting group (default setting group = 1) Resets the thermal state Assigns an input for trip circuit supervision
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 64/78 Label abstract Strt tBF Permis IT Direct IT Comms RST Log Trip Log Close Label signification Starts the breaker fail timer Initiate a permissive intertrip Initiate a direct intertrip Reset protection comms statistics Assigns an input to trip the circuit breaker Assigns an input to close trip the circuit breaker
In addition to the input allocation the user can specify the required operating time for auxiliary timers 1 and 2. AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Inputs menu, press , , 6 times, , followed by 11 times. Heading of the Inputs sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press .
Inputs
Input 1 None
Allocation of logic input 1. To allocate a function to logic input 1, press then use or to select the desired function from the available list. Validate your choice using . Allocation of logic input 2. To allocate a function to logic input 2, press then use or to select the desired function from the available list. Validate your choice using . Allocation of logic input 3. To allocate a function to logic input 3, press then use or to select the desired function from the available list. Validate your choice using . Allocation of logic input 4. To allocate a function to logic input 4, press then use or to select the desired function from the available list. Validate your choice using . Allocation of logic input 5. To allocate a function to logic input 5, press then use or to select the desired function from the available list. Validate your choice using . Displays the time delay for auxiliary timer 1 (tAux1). To adjust the time, press . The tAux1 time is adjustable from 0 ms to 200 s in steps of 10 ms. Validate your choice using .
Input 2 None
Input 3 None
Input 4 None
Input 5 None
Aux1 Time tAux1 0 ms
Aux2 Time tAux2 0 ms
Displays the time delay for auxiliary timer 2 (tAux2). To adjust the time, press . The tAux1 time is adjustable from 0 ms to 200 s in steps of 10 ms. Validate your choice using .
3.5.6.11 Broken conductor sub menu This menu enables the broken conductor detection and its associated settings. AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Broken Conductor menu, press , , 6 times, , followed by 12 times. Heading of the Broken Conductor sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press .
Broken Cond.
Brkn. Cond.? Yes
Enables the broken conductor function. Select Yes or No. If the user selects (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user selects (No), the broken conductor function is disabled. Displays the broken conductor time delay tBC. To modify this value, press . The tBC is adjustable from 0 to 14400 s in steps of 1 s. Press to validate your adjustment. Displays the broken conductor threshold. This threshold is a ratio between the negative phase sequence and the positive phase sequence currents. To modify this value, press . The I2/I1 ratio is adjustable from 20% to 100 % in steps of 1 %. Press to validate your adjustment.
Brkn. Cond Time tBC 1 ms
Ratio I2/I1 20 %
3.5.6.12 Cold load pick-up sub menu The Cold Load PU allows the user to enable the cold load pick-up function and its associated settings. AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Cold Load PU menu, press , , 6 times, , followed by 13 times. Heading of the Cold Load PU sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press
Cold Load PU
Cold Load PU? No
Enables the cold load pick-up function. Select Yes or No. If the user selects (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user selects (No), the cold load pick-up function is disabled. Associates the I> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate tI> with the cold load pick up function, press and select (Yes). Select (No) if the user does not wish to associate tI> with the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using . Associates the I>> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate tI>> with the cold load pick up function, press and select (Yes). Select (No) if the user does not wish to associate tI>> with the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using . Associates the I>>> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate tI>>> with the cold load pick up function, press and select (Yes). Select (No) if the user does not wish to associate tI>>> with the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using . Associates the I>>>> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate tI>>>> with the cold load pick up function, press and select (Yes). Select (No) if the user does not wish to associate tI>>>> with the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using . Associates the Ie> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate tIe> with the cold load pick up function, press and select (Yes). Select (No) if the user does not wish to associate tIe> with the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using . Associates the Ie>> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate tIe>> with the cold load pick up function, press and select (Yes). Select (No) if the user does not wish to associate tIe>> with the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using . Associates the Ie>>> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate tIe>>> with the cold load pick up function, press and select (Yes). Select (No) if the user does not wish to associate tIe>>> with the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using .
Cold Load PU tI>? No
Cold Load PU tI>>? No
Cold Load PU tI>>>? No
Cold Load PU tI>>>>? No
Cold Load PU tIe>? No
Cold Load PU tIe>>? No
Cold Load PU tIe>>>? No
User Guide MiCOM P521 Cold Load PU tIe>>>>? No
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 67/78 Associates the Ie>>>> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate tIe>>>> with the cold load pick up function, press and select (Yes). Select (No) if the user does not wish to associate tIe>>>> with the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using . Associates the I2> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate tI2> with the cold load pick up function, press and select (Yes). Select (No) if the user does not wish to associate tI2> with the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using . Associates the I2>> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate tI2>> with the cold load pick up function, press and select (Yes). Select (No) if the user does not wish to associate tI2>> with the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using . Associates the thermal threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate the thermal threshold with the cold load pick up function, press and select (Yes). Select (No) if the user does not wish to associate the thermal threshold with the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using . Selection of the cold load pick up percentage scaling value associated with the selected thresholds. Select from 20% to 500% in steps of 1 % using or and validate your choice using . Selection of the cold load pick up time delay. Select from 100 ms to 3600 s in steps of 10 ms using or and validate your choice using .
Cold Load PU tI2>? No
Cold Load PU tI2>>? No
Cold Load PU t Therm.? Yes
Cold Load PU level 200 %
Cold Load PU tCL = 400 ms
3.5.6.13 Circuit breaker failure sub menu The CB Fail sub menu makes it possible to enable the circuit breaker failure detection function and its associated settings. AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the CB Fail menu, press , , 6 times, , followed by 14 times. Heading of the CB Fail sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press .
CB Fail
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 68/78 CB Fail? No
User Guide MiCOM P521 Enables / Disables the circuit breaker failure function. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user selects (No), the breaker failure function is inactive. Selects the under current threshold associated with the CB failure detection function. Select from 0.02 In to 1 In in steps of 0.01 In. Selects the circuit breaker failure time delay. Select from 30 ms to 10 s in steps of 10 ms using or and validate your choice using . Select the possibility to block the instantaneous signal I> in the event of a circuit breaker failure. Select Yes or No.
I<= 0.1 In
CB Fail Time tBF 100 ms
Block I>? No
Block Ie>? No
Select the possibility to block the instantaneous signal Ie> in the event of a circuit breaker failure detection. Select Yes or No.
3.5.6.14 Circuit breaker supervision sub menu The CB Supervision sub menu makes it possible to enable the circuit breaker supervision and monitoring function and the various settings associated with this function. AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the CB Supervision menu, press , , 6 times, , followed by 15 times. Heading of the CB Supervision sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press .
CB Supervision
TC Supervision Yes
Enables / Disables the trip circuit supervision function. Select Yes or No. If the user selects (Yes), the function is active. If the user selects (No) the TC supervision is disabled (go to CB Open Time menu). Selects the Trip circuit supervision time. Select from 0.1 s to 10s in steps of 10 ms using or and validate your choice using . Enables / Disables the CB operating time supervision function. Select Yes or No. If the user selects (Yes) the following menu is displayed. If the user selects (No) the CB operating time supervision function is disabled (go to CB Close menu).
t Trip Circuit t SUP 200 ms
CB Open S'vision Yes
CB Open Time 50 ms
Selects the maximum allowable CB operating time (tCBO). Select from 50 ms to 1.0 s in steps of 10 ms using or and validate your choice using . Enables / Disabled the CB closing time supervision function. Select Yes or No. If the user selects (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user selects (No) the CB closing time supervision function is disabled (go to CB Open Alarm menu). Selects the maximum allowable CB closing time (tCBC). Select from 50 ms to 1.0 s in steps of 10 ms using or and validate your choice using . Enables / Disables the maximum CB operations function. Select Yes or No. If the user selects (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user selects (No) the CB Operations supervision function is disabled (go to Amps(n) menu). Selects the maximum number of CB operations. Select from 0 to 50000 in steps of 1 using or and validate your choice using . Enables / Disables the Summation Amps (or square Amps) interrupted by the CB function. Select Yes or No. If the user selects (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user selects (No) the CB Amps(n) function is disabled (go to t Open Pulse menu). Selection of the summation Amps (or square Amps) alarm threshold. Select from 0 to 4000 E6 A (or A2) in steps of 1 E6 using or and validate your choice using . Selection of the type of summation (Amps or square Amps). Select 1 for just Amps or 2 for Amps squared using or and validate your choice using . Selection of the tripping pulse time. Select from 100 ms to 5 s in steps of 100 ms using or and validate your choice using . Selection of the closing pulse time. Select from 100 ms to 5 s in steps of 100 ms using or and validate your choice using .
CB Close S'vision Yes
CB Close Time 50 ms
CB Open Alarm? Yes
CB Open NB = 0
Amps(n)? Yes
Amps(n)? 1000 E6
t Open Pulse 100 ms
t Close Pulse 100 ms
CB Man Close Dly
Selects the circuit breaker manual closing delay. Select from 0 to 60s in steps of 0.1s using or and validate your choice using .
3.5.7
Records menu The RECORDS menu makes it possible to read the various records generated by the relay The various sub menus are: CB Monitoring Fault Record Instantaneous Disturb Record Time Peak Value Rolling Demand To gain access to the RECORDING menu, press then 7 times.
3.5.7.1 CB monitoring sub menu The CB Monitoring sub menu makes possible to read and clear the parameters and measurements associated to this function. RECORDS Heading of the RECORD Menu. To gain access to the CB Monitoring menu, press , , 7 times followed by .
CB Monitoring
Heading the CB Monitoring sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press .
CB Opening Time 95 ms
Displays the most recent circuit breaker opening time in ms.
CB Closing Time 115 ms
Displays the most recent circuit breaker closing time in ms.
CB Operations RST = [C] 5489
Displays the number of opening commands executed by the circuit breaker. To reset these values, press .
Amps (n) RST = [C]
Allows the user to clear the memorized summation of interrupted currents. All 3 phase currents are clear simultaneously. To clear these values, press .
User Guide MiCOM P521 Amps (n) IA 4 E4
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 71/78 Displays the summation of the Amps (or Amps squared) interrupted by the A phase circuit breaker.
Amps (n) IB 2 E4
Displays the summation of the Amps (or Amps squared) interrupted by the B phase circuit breaker.
Amps (n) IC 8 E3 3.5.7.2 Fault record sub menu
Displays the summation of the Amps (or Amps squared) interrupted by the C phase circuit breaker.
The FAULT RECORD sub menu makes it possible to read the various parameters and measurements for each of the five faults stored in the MiCOM P521. RECORD Heading of the RECORD Menu. To gain access to the Fault Record menu, press , , 7 times, , followed by once.
Fault Record
Heading of the Fault Record sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press .
Record Number 2
Selection of the fault record number (by selecting either 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5) to be displayed. To select the fault record number, press then using or enter the required number. Validate your choice using the key . Displays the time of the fault record. The format of the time is HH:MM:SS:ms. In this example the fault appeared at 12 hundred hours, 05 minutes, 23 seconds and 420 ms. Displays the date of the fault record. The format of the date is DD/MM/YY. In this example, the fault appeared on 12 November 1999. Displays the active setting group (1 or 2).
Fault Time 12:05:23:42
Fault Date 12/11/99
Active Set Group 1
Faulted Phase Phase A
Displays the faulty phase / phases for the chosen fault record. The list of possibilities are: NONE, phase A, B, C, EARTH, AB, AC, BC, or ABC.
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 72/78 Fault Flags I>>
User Guide MiCOM P521 Displays the origin of the fault that has generated the trip order.
Magnitude 1200 A
Display the magnitude of the fault current. This value is the 50/60 Hz amplitude.
IA Magnitude 1200 A
Displays the magnitude of the A phase current at the time of the fault.
IB Magnitude 500 A
Displays the magnitude of the B phase current at the time of the fault.
IC Magnitude 480 A
Displays the magnitude of the C phase current at the time of the fault.
IN Magnitude 103 A
Displays the magnitude of the earth fault current at the time of the fault.
IA Differential 1200 A
Displays the magnitude of the A phase differential current at the time of the fault.
IB Differential 500 A
Displays the magnitude of the B phase differential current at the time of the fault.
IC Differential 480 A
Displays the magnitude of the C phase differential current at the time of the fault.
Max I Bias 103 A
Displays the largest bias current of the three phases at the time of the fault.
Chann 1 Status Comms OK
Displays the status of the protection comms channel. Relays display either Comms OK or Comms Fail.
User Guide MiCOM P521 3.5.7.3 Instantaneous sub menu
The INSTANTANEOUS sub menu makes is possible to read the various parameters for each of the last five starts. RECORDS Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the CB Monitoring menu, press , , , 7 times, , followed by twice. Heading of the Instantaneous sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press .
Instantaneous
Number 5
Selection of the Instantaneous record number (by selecting either 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5) to be displayed. To select the Instantaneous record number, press then using or enter the required number. Validate your choice using .
Time 13:07:15:53
Display the time of the instantaneous record. The format is HH:MM:SS:ms. In this example the start information appeared at 13 hundred hours, 07 minutes, 15 seconds and 530 ms. Display the date of the instantaneous record. The format is DD/MM/YY. In this example the start information appeared on 09 January 2001. Displays the origin of the start signal.
Date 09/01/01
Origin Ie>
Length 57 ms
Displays the length of the start information.
Trip No
Displays if a trip has occurred due to the start.
P521/EN FT/C31 Page 74/78 3.5.7.4 Disturbance record sub menu
The DISTURBANCE sub menu makes it possible to set the various parameters and thresholds associated with this recording function. RECORD Heading of the RECORD Menu. To gain access to the Disturbance Record menu, press , , 7 times, , followed by 3 times. Heading of the Disturb Record sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press .
Disturb Record
Pre-Time 100 ms
Selection of the disturbance record pre-trigger time. Select from 100 ms to 3s in steps of 100 ms using or and validate your choice using . Selection of the disturbance record post-trigger time. Select from 100ms to 3s in steps of 100 ms using or and validate your choice using .
Post-Time 100 ms
WARNING:
THE TOTAL DISTURBANCE RECORDING TIME IS 3 SECONDS (PRE TIME + POST TIME).
Disturb Rec Trig ON INST.
Selects the start criteria for the disturbance recorder function. Select between ON INST. (start from instantaneous thresholds) or ON Trip (start from trip conditions) using or and validate your choice using .
3.5.7.5 Time peak value sub menu The Time Peak Value sub menu makes it possible to set parameters associated with the Peak and Average values displayed in the Measurements menu. RECORD Heading of the RECORD Menu. To gain access to the Time Peak Value menu, press , , 7 times, , followed by 4 times. Heading of the Time Peak Value sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press .
Time Peak Value
Time Window 5 mn
Selects the length of the time window over which the peak and average values are stored. Select from either 5mn, 10mn, 15mn, 30mn, or 60mn using or and validate your choice using .
User Guide MiCOM P521 3.5.7.6 Rolling demand sub menu
The Rolling Demand sub menu makes it possible to set the rolling sub-period and the number of the sub-periods for the calculation of the 3 phase Rolling Average and Peak Demand values, available in the Measurement menu. RECORDS Heading of the RECORD Menu. To gain access to the Rolling Demand menu, press , , 7 times, , followed by 5 times. Heading of the Rolling Demand sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press .
Rolling Demand
Sub period 5 mn
Selects the duration of the sub-period during over which the rolling average values are calculated. Select from either 5mn, 10mn, 15mn, 30mn, or 60mn using or and validate your choice using . Selects the number of sub-periods for the calculation of the average of the average values.
Num of Sub Per 1
4.
WIRING
The connection diagrams for the P521/EN CO of this Technical Guide. MiCOM P521 are provided in section
4.1
Auxiliary supply The auxiliary supply of the MiCOM P521 relay can be either AC or DC (the ranges are 24-60 Vdc, 48-150 Vdc, 130-250 Vdc or 100-250 Vac 50-60 Hz). The auxiliary voltage range is specified on the relay data plate under the upper flap on the front plate. Supply must only be connected to terminals 33 (+ve) and 34 (-ve).
4.2
Current measurement inputs The MiCOM P521 relay has eight current inputs. The nominal current value of these measuring inputs is either 1 Ampere or 5 Amperes (labeled in the connection diagrams). For the same relay the user can mix the 1 and 5 Ampere inputs between phases and earth. Note: All phases must have the same rated current value (1 or 5 Amps).
4.3
Logic inputs The MiCOM P521 relay has 5 opto-isolated logic inputs. Each input is electrically isolated from all other inputs. The voltage range of the inputs is identical to the dc or ac auxiliary supply range of the MiCOM relay (e.g. Uaux = 48-150 Vdc, logic input voltage range = 48-150 Vdc). On the same MiCOM P521 relay, the user can mix different voltage levels for the logic inputs (e.g. Uaux = 48-150 Vdc, Input 1= 48 Vdc, Input 2-5= 110 Vdc) The automation operations and signaling functions to which these logic inputs respond can be selected from the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. Note: Do not forget to select in the CONFIGURATION/Configuration Inputs Menu if the voltage input is "AC" or "DC".
4.4
Output relays Nine output relays are available on MiCOM P521. The first output relay (RL0) is dedicated to indicate a relay fault (Watchdog). normally closed (NC) and cannot be configured. It is
Relay RL1 is the main trip output. The trip functions which will operate RL1 are selected in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Trip Commands menu. RL2 to RL8 are freely programmable. The protection and control functions to which these relays respond can be selected by means of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. RL1 and RL2 have changeover contacts (1 common, 1 normally open contact, 1 normally closed contact). The other relays (RL3 to RL8) are of the normally open (NO) type. 4.5 4.5.1 Communication EIA(RS)485 rear communication port All MiCOM relays have an EIA(RS)485 rear communication port. The connection of communications is allocated to terminals 29-30-31-32, shown in the connection diagrams in section P521/EN CO of this Technical Guide.
User Guide MiCOM P521 4.5.2 EIA(RS)232 front communication port
MiCOM P521 relay provides the user with an EIA(RS)232 communication port. This link is dedicated to the MiCOM Setting software MiCOM S1. A standard EIA(RS)232 shielded cable should be used to connect the P521 front EIA(RS)232 port to a PC. The connecter on the P521 side must be male in gender. The wiring of this EIA(RS)232 cable must follow the following scheme.
EIA(RS)232 PC PORT 9 pin male connector MiCOM P521 9 pin female connector
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5
P0073ENb
Figure 4:
EIA(RS)232 front port communication cable wiring
Menu Content Tables MiCOM P521
P521/EN HI/B21
MENU CONTENT TABLES
8th November 2005 2 10P52101
P521/EN HI/B21
P521/EN HI/B21 Page 1/12
CONTENT
1.
MICOM P521 V2.A SOFTWARE MENU CONTENT
1.
DEFAULT DISPLAY A = 1245 A
MiCOM P521
OP PARAMETERS
CONFIGURATION
Password **** Display CT Ratios LED 5/6/7/8 Group Select Alarms
Menu Content Tables
Description P521 Default Display RMS A Line CT primary 1000 Setting Group 1 Phase A Text L1 5 Line CT sec Change Group Input = EDGE
Inst. Self-reset ?
No
Reference ALST
Alarm Battery = No
Software version 2.A Phase B Text L2 E/Gnd CT primary 1000
Frequency 50 Hz L3 E/Gnd Text E 5 Phase C Text E/Gnd CT sec
Active Group 1 CT Correct Ratio 1.0
Input Status
54321 10110
Vectorial Comp. Off
MICOM P521 V2.A SOFTWARE MENU CONTENT
Relay Status
87654321 01011101
Date
30/01/02
Time
13 : 57 : 44
P521/EN HI/B21
Page 3/12
Trip and Close No Operation
Led diff diff Fail B/up Prot. Comms Fail Direct I-Trip C-Diff I-Trip PIT > >> >>> >>>> t> t>> t>>> t>>>> e> e>> e>>> e>>>> te> te>> te>>> te>>>> Therm Trip Brkn. Cond. CB Fail t2> t2>> Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 tAux 1 tAux 2 CB Alarm
DEFAULT DISPLAY A = 1245 A MEASUREMENTS
Page 4/12
CONFIGURATION
P521/EN HI/B21
Configuration Inputs Current Diff Remote 1 A 640.10A A 640.10A Remote 1 B 629.00A B 629.00A C 634.50A Remote 1 C 634.50A Differential A 0A 1 = 103A N 3.15A Average A RMS 98.25A Average B RMS 97.88A Max C RMS 139.01A Max B RMS 156.28A Max A RMS 127.36A ROLLING AVERAGE RST = [C] ROLLING AVERAGE I A RMS = 0.00A ROLLING AVERAGE I B RMS = 0.00A ROLLING AVERAGE I C RMS = 0.00A Current/General
Phase Rotation
Inputs
54321 11111
Phase Rotation A-B-C
Voltage Input
= DC
Differential B 0A 2 = 50A
Differential C 0A RATIO 2/ I
Average C RMS 99.02A MAX. SUBPERIOD RST = [C]
Bias A 640.10A N - fn RST = [C] Thermal RST = [C]
50%
Bias B 629.00A
0.0A
MAX. SUBPERIOD A RMS = 245A
Bias C 634.50A
67% Max & Average RST = [C]
MAX. SUBPERIOD B RMS = 240A
Menu Content Tables
MAX. SUBPERIOD C RMS = 250A
MiCOM P521
DEFAULT DISPLAY A = 1245A MEASUREMENTS Communication Protection G1/G2
MiCOM P521
Menu Content Tables
Protection Comms Ctrl Comms
Protection
[87] Current Diff
CH1 Valid Msgs 00 Yes Data Rate 64k s2 s1 SDLC Yes Ctrl Comms ? Protocol Current Diff ?
PIT Time
50ms PIT Disable
CH1 Err Msgs 00 Parity None A1 Relay Address Baud Rate 19200Bd
0.2n
No DIT Rx tDwell 2.0n
CH1 Errored Secs 0.05 CH1 Sev Err Secs 0.05 Stop Bits 1 Relay Address 1
5.0s k1 Inrush Restraint 30% k2
Clock Source Ch1 INTERNAL
No High Set 150% diff Delay Type DMT
CH1 Prop Delay 0.05 Elapsed Time 0.05 Date Format PRIVATE
Comm Fail Timer 0ms Comms Delay Tol 1ms Char Mod Time s
4 IN
Comms Stats RST = [C]
tdiff
0ms diff Curve
Note: Menu for MODBUS protocol only. For menus on other protocols see User Guide (P521/EN FT), section 3.5.4.
IEC S Diff Tms
1.0 Diff Time Dial
P521/EN HI/B21
Page 5/12
1.0
Page 6/12
P521/EN HI/B21
PROTECTION G1/G2
[50/51] Phase O/C [50N/51N] E/Gnd e > ? Yes e >>> 1.0n Te 10 mn k EC S Trip 0.025 1.05 0.1n > 2 > Yes Yes Yes e >>> ? 2 > ? Therm OL ? [46] Neg Seq OC
[49] Therm OL
>? Yes e > 0.05 en te >>> 100ms 2 > Curve
Yes
>>> ?
> 10n
1.0n
>>>
0.1n
> Delay Type IDMT 100ms e > Curve EC S e >>>> 1.0n t Reset 100ms 2>> ? 2 > Tms Yes e >>>> ? e > Delay Type DMT 2 > Delay Type DMT
t >>>
> Curve Yes e > Tms 1.0 te >>>>
IEC S
>>>> ?
> Tms 10n t Reset 100ms e >> ? Yes 60ms
1.0
>>>>
100% Alarm ? 60ms
t Reset
60ms
t >>>>
Yes Alarm Yes 2>>
e >> ?
Yes e >> 1.0n
90%
e >>
10n
0.5n t2>>
>> Delay Type DMT te >>
e >> Delay Type DMT
110ms
Menu Content Tables
MiCOM P521
t >>
300ms
300ms
DEFAULT DISPLAY A = 1245 A AUTOMAT. CTRL.
MiCOM P521
PROTECTION G1/G2
Menu Content Tables
[37] Under Current Trip diff Yes No Trip te >>>> Yes Yes Trip te >>> Latch diff
Commissioning Trip Commands Latch Functions
<?
Yes LED Test No Trip t < Yes Latch PT Trip Direct -Trip Yes Latch Direct -Trip No
Commissioning No
Latch te >>>
No
<
0.2n Disable Relays No Trip PT Yes Trip t2 >> Yes Yes Trip t2 > Trip C Diff -Trip Yes
Latch te >>>> No Latch t <
t <
200ms Trip Test Contact Test No Trip t >> Yes Trip Thermal Trip t > Yes 87654321 00000000
Latch C Diff -Trip No
No Latch t2 > No
No Latch t > Latch t2 >> No Latch t >>
No
Disable CB Stats: No Loopback Test Off Trip t >>>> Yes Yes Trip t >>>
Yes
No Latch t >>>
Latch Thermal No
Trip Brkn. Cond. Yes Trip tAux1
No
Latch Brkn. Cond. No Latch tAux1 Yes Trip tAux2 Latch t >>>> No Latch te > No Latch tAux2
Diff Trip Flags Trip: Trip te >
Yes
Yes
No Latch te >> Yes
No
P521/EN HI/B21
Trip te >>
Page 7/12
No
Page 8/12
AUTOMAT. CTRL.
P521/EN HI/B21
I-Trip Commands I-Trip t2 >> Yes Block t > No Sel 1 t>>>> No Block Thermal No No Sel 1 t>>> No No No Trip Block diff Block t2 >> Sel 1 t>>
Blocking Logic 1/2
Logic Select 1/2 Output Relays
I-Trip t > Yes
8765432 1000100
I-Trip t >> Yes Block t >> No Block tAux1 No Sel 1 te>> I-Trip Brkn. Cond. Yes I-Trip tAux1 Yes I-Trip tAux2 Yes I-Trip CB Fail Yes Block te >> Yes Block te >>> No No No Block te > Yes No No Block t >>>> Block tAux2 No Block t >>> Block Brkn. Cond. No
I-Trip Thermal Yes
I-Trip t >>> Yes
I-Trip t >>>> Yes Sel 1 te>>>
No
I-Trip te >
No
I-Trip te >> Yes
Sel 1 te>>>> No tSel 1
I-Trip te >>>
0ms
I-Trip te >>>> Yes Block te >>>> No Block t2 > Yes
I-Trip t < Yes
Menu Content Tables
I-Trip t2 >
No
diff Back-up Prot. Comms Fail Direct -Trip C-diff -Trip PT > t> >> t>> >>> t>>> >>>> t>>>> e> te> e>> te>> e>>> te>>> e>>>> te>>>> t < t2 > t2 >> Therm Alarm Therm Trip CB Alarm 52 Fail Brkn. Cond. CB Fail CB Close tAux1 tAux2 Active Group
MiCOM P521
MiCOM P521
AUTOMAT. CTRL.
Menu Content Tables
Latch Output Relays Inputs 1/2/3/4/5 Brkn. Cond. ? Yes Broken Conductor Cold Load PU Output 2 No Output 3 No Output 4 No Output 5 No Output 6 No Output 7 No Output 8 No Aux1 Time tAux1 0ms Aux2 Time tAux2 20% Ratio 2/1 Brkn. Cond. Time tBC 1ms Cold Load PU t > ? No
Invert Output Relays
Output 2 Cold Load PU ? No
No
Cold Load PU t2 >> ? No
Output 3
No
Cold Load PU t Therm ? No
Output 4
No
Cold Load PU t >> ? No
Cold Load PU Level 200%
Output 5
No
Cold Load PU t >>> ? No
Cold Load PU tCL 400ms
Output 6
No
Cold Load PU t >>>> ? No
Output 7
No
Output 8
None Unlatch 52a 52b Comms RST Aux1 Aux2 Blk Log 1 Blk Log 2 Start Dist Cold L PU Log Sel 1 Log Sel 2 Change Set Reset Trip Circ Strt tBF Permiss T Direct T Log Trip Log Close Cold Load PU te > ? No Cold Load PU te >> ? No Cold Load PU te >>> ? No Cold Load PU te >>>> ? No 0ms Cold Load PU t2 > ? No
No
DEFAULT DISPLAY A = 1245 A RECORDS
Page 10/12
P521/EN HI/B21
AUTOMAT. CTRL.
CB Fail CB Supervision CB Monitoring n 1 2 Record Number Fault Record
CB Fail ? TC Supervision Yes CB Opening Time 95ms
No
N Magnitude 103A
<= tTrip Circuit tSup 200ms CB Open Svision Yes Active Set Group t Close Pulse 100ms CB Operations RST = [C] 5489 Fault Date 12/11/99 CB Closing Time 115ms Fault Time 12 : 05 : 23 : 42
0.1n
t Open Pulse 100ms
A Differential 1200A B Differential 500A
CB Fail Time tBF 100ms
Block > ? CB Open Time 50ms Amps(n) A 4E4 CB Man Trip Dly 0ms Amps(n) RST = [C]
No
C Differential 480A Max Bias
Block e > ? CB Close Svision Yes CB Close Time Amps(n) C Amps(n) B CB Man Close Dly 0ms
No
Faulted Phase Phase A Fault Flags
103A
2E4
>> Magnitude 8E3 1200A
Chann 1 Status Comms OK
CB Open Alarm ? Yes CB Open NB = 0 Amps(n) ? Yes
A Magnitude 1200A B Magnitude 500A
Menu Content Tables
MiCOM P521
Amps(n) ? 1000 E6
C Magnitude 480A
MiCOM P521
RECORDS
Menu Content Tables
Instantaneous Time Peak Value Sub Period 5mn Num of Sub Per 100ms 1 Rolling Demand
Disturb Record
Number 100ms Time Window 5mn
Pre-time
Time 13 : 07 : 15 : 53
Post-time
Date
09/01/01
Disturb Rec Trig On Inst
Origin
e >
Length
57ms
Trip
No
Technical Data and Curve Characteristics MiCOM P521
P521/EN TD/C31
TECHNICAL DATA AND CURVE CHARACTERISTICS
8th November 2005 2 10P52101
P521/EN TD/C31
P521/EN TD/C31 Page 1/44
CONTENTS
1.
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Current differential protection Phase overcurrent protection Neutral/ground/earth overcurrent protection Thermal overload protection Undercurrent protection Negative sequence overcurrent protection
5
5 6 7 9 9 9
2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7
AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS
Cold load pickup Auxiliary timers Broken conductor detection Circuit breaker failure Trip circuit supervision Circuit breaker control and monitoring Logic selectivity
11
11 11 11 11 11 11 11
3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
RECORDING FUNCTIONS
Event recorder Fault recorder Instantaneous recorder Disturbance recorder
12
12 12 12 12
4. 5.
5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2
RELAY COMMUNICATIONS PROTECTION COMMUNICATIONS

Propagation delays Maximum allowable propagation delay
13 13
14 14
Maximum propagation delay difference between send and receive communications paths 14
6.
6.1 6.2
INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

AC inputs Logic inputs and outputs
14
14 15
P521/EN TD/C31 Page 2/44 6.3 Power supply
Technical Data and Curve Characteristics MiCOM P521 16
7. 8. 9.
9.1 9.2 9.3
ACCURACY CT DATA HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND

Dielectric withstand Impulse Insulation resistance
16 17 17
17 17 17
10.
10.1
ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT
Performance criteria
18
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 19 19 19 19 19 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 21 21 21
10.1.1 Class A 10.1.2 Class B 10.1.3 Class C 10.2 Auxiliary supply tests, dc interruption, etc.
10.2.1 DC voltage interruptions 10.2.2 DC voltage fluctuations 10.3 AC voltage dips and short interruptions
10.3.1 AC voltage short interruptions 10.3.2 AC voltage dips 10.4 10.5 10.6 High frequency disturbance Fast transients Conducted/radiated emissions
10.6.1 Conducted emissions 10.6.2 Radiated emissions 10.7 Conducted/radiated immunity
10.7.1 Conducted immunity 10.7.2 Radiated immunity 10.7.3 Radiated immunity from digital radio telephones 10.8 10.9 10.10 10.11 Electrostatic discharge Surge immunity Power frequency magnetic field Pulse magnetic field immunity
Technical Data and Curve Characteristics MiCOM P521 10.12 10.13 10.14 10.15 Damped oscillatory magnetic field immunity Power frequency interference Surge withstand capability (SWC) Radiated immunity
P521/EN TD/C31 Page 3/44 21 21 21 22
11.
11.1 11.2 11.3
ATMOSPHERIC ENVIRONMENT
Temperature Humidity Enclosure protection
22
22 22 23
12.
12.1
MECHANICAL ENVIRONMENT
Performance criteria
23
23 23 23 24 24
12.1.1 Severity classes 12.1.2 Vibration (sinusoidal) 12.1.3 Shock and bump 12.1.4 Seismic
13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

17.1
EC EMC COMPLIANCE EC LVD COMPLIANCE BATTERY LIFE FREQUENCY RESPONSE CURVES

IDMT curves
24 24 24 25 25
25 25 27 29 35 36 42 43
17.1.1 Pick-up IDMT mathematical formula 17.1.2 Reset timer IDMT mathematical formula 17.1.3 IEC curves 17.1.4 RI curves 17.1.5 IEEE/ANSI & CO curves 17.1.6 Laborelec curve 17.2 Thermal overload curves
P521/EN TD/C31 Page 4/44 17.2.1 Mathematical formula 17.2.2 Tripping curve
Technical Data and Curve Characteristics MiCOM P521 43 44
1.
1.1
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Current differential protection Current Characteristic Fundamental Only Standard two slope s1 s2 k1 k2 Note: 0.1n to 2.0n, steps of 0.05n 1.0n to 30.0n, steps of 0.05n 0% to 150%, steps of 5% 30% to 150%, steps of 5% Default value 0.2n (see note) Default value 2.0n (see note) Default value 30% (see note) Default value 150% (see note) Use of default setting values is recommended. 75% < 45ms + signaling delays * < 60ms + signaling delays * Hysteresis Instantaneous Time Drop-off Time Time Delays: DMT IDMT Curves: 0s to 150s, steps of 0.01s IEC: Short Time Inverse (IEC), Standard Inverse (IEC), Very Inverse (IEC), Extremely Inverse (IEC), Long Time Inverse (UK). Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) 0.025 to 1.5, steps of 0.025 IEEE/ANSI: Short Time Inverse (CO2), Moderately Inverse (ANSI), Inverse (CO8), Very Inverse (ANSI), Extremely Inverse (ANSI). Time Dial Setting (TD) 0.1 to 100, steps of 0.1
Note: Valid for X/R ratios up to 120 and fault levels between 0.5In and 25In Note: Valid for X/R ratios up to 120 and fault levels between 0.5In and 25In
Technical Data and Curve Characteristics MiCOM P521 2% (or 50ms whichever is greater) at greater than 2s1.
IDMT Curve Tolerance Intertrip Operating Times Permissive Intertrip Time Direct Intertrip Time Current Differential Intertrip Time
15ms + PIT Time + signaling delay * 15ms + signaling delay * 5ms + signaling delay *
* Refer to Accuracy section for calculation of signaling delays. 1.2 Phase overcurrent protection Current Current Range Thresholds Fundamental Only 0.1 to 40 x rated current, steps of 0.01n 4 Independent (>, >>, >>>, >>>>) 0.1n to 25n (see note) >> >>> >>>> Note: 0.5n to 40n (see note) 0.5n to 40n 0.5n to 40n
When > or >> is associated with an IDMT curve, the maximum setting recommended should be 2.0n. 95% < 40ms < 30ms (t>, t>>, t>>>, t>>>>) 0s to 150s, steps of 0.01s IEC: Short Time Inverse (IEC), Standard Inverse (IEC), Very Inverse (IEC), Extremely Inverse (IEC), Long Time Inverse (UK).
Hysteresis Instantaneous Time Drop-off Time Time Delays: DMT IDMT Curves:
Time Multiplier Setting (TMS)
0.025 to 1.5, steps of 0.025 IEEE/ANSI: Short Time Inverse (CO2), Moderately Inverse (ANSI), Inverse (CO8), Very Inverse (ANSI), Extremely Inverse (ANSI).
Technical Data and Curve Characteristics MiCOM P521 Time Dial Setting (TD) RI: K Factor Setting (K) IDMT Curve Tolerance Reset Time IEEE Time Delay: RTMS DMT IEC Time Delay: DMT Transient Overreach Stages 1 & 2 (> & >>) Stages 3 & 4 (>>> & >>>>) 1.3 0.025 to 3.2, steps of 0.025 0.1 to 100, steps of 0.1 Electromechanical Type 0.1 to 10, steps of 0.005
2% (or 50ms whichever is greater) at >2n
0.04s to 100s, steps of 0.01s 0.04s to 100s, steps of 0.01s < 4% for X/R ratios up to 90 < 12% for X/R ratios up to 90
Neutral/ground/earth overcurrent protection Current Current Ranges Fundamental Only 0.002 to 1 x rated current, steps of 0.001en 0.01 to 8 x rated current, steps of 0.005en 0.1 to 40 x rated current, steps of 0.005en Thresholds: Range: 4 Independent (e>, e>>, e>>>, e>>>>) 0.002 to 1 x en e> e>> e>>> e>>>> Range: e> e>> e>>> e>>>> Range: e> e>> e>>> e>>>> 0.002en to 1en (see note 1) 0.002en to 1en (see note 1) 0.002en to 1en 0.002en to 1en 0.01en to 1en (see note 2) 0.01en to 8en (see note 2) 0.01en to 8en 0.01en to 8en 0.1en to 25en (see note 2) 0.5en to 40en (see note 2) 0.5en to 40en 0.5en to 40en
0.01 to 8 x en
0.1 to 40 x en
Note 1: When e> or e>> is associated with an IDMT curve the maximum setting recommended should be 0.05 en. Note 2: When e> or e>> is associated with an IDMT curve, the maximum setting recommended should be the maximum of the range / 20. Hysteresis Instantaneous Time Drop-off Time Time Delays: DMT IDMT Curves: 95% < 40ms < 30ms (te>, te>>, te>>>, te>>>>) 0s to 150s, steps of 0.01s IEC: Short Time Inverse (IEC), Standard Inverse (IEC), Very Inverse (IEC), Extremely Inverse (IEC), Long Time Inverse (UK). Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) 0.025 to 1.5, steps of 0.025 IEEE/ANSI: Short Time Inverse (CO2), Moderately Inverse (ANSI), Inverse (CO8), Very Inverse (ANSI), Extremely Inverse (ANSI). Time Dial Setting (TD) RI: K Factor Setting (K) LABORELEC: IDMT Curve Tolerance Reset Time IEEE Time Delay: RTMS DMT IEC Time Delay: DMT 0.04s to 100s, steps of 0.01s 0.025 to 3.2, steps of 0.025 0.04s to 100s, steps of 0.01s 0.1 to 100, steps of 0.1 Electromechanical Type 0.1 to 10, steps of 0.005 Curves 1, 2 and 3 (0.01 to 8 Range only) 2% (or 50ms whichever is greater) at >2en
Technical Data and Curve Characteristics MiCOM P521 Transient Over-reach Figures quoted are for X/R ratios up to 90 0.1 to 40n earth fault board: Stages 1 & 2 (e> & e>>) Stages 3 & 4 (e>>> & e>>>>) 0.01 to 80n earth fault board: Stages 1 & 2 (e> & e>>) Stages 3 & 4 (e>>> & e>>>>) 0.002 to 1en earth fault board: Stages 1 & 2 (e> & e>>) Stages 3 & 4 (e>>> & e>>>>) 1.4 Thermal overload protection 1.5 Current Current Threshold (>) Thermal State (alarm and trip) Constant Time (Te) K Factor RMS <2% < 5% < 3% < 12% < 4% < 12%
0.1 to 3.2 x rated current, steps of 0.01 50% to 200% x , steps of 1% 1min to 200mins, steps of 1min 1 to 1.5, steps of 0.01
Undercurrent protection Current Phase Current Range (<) Time Delay (t<) Hysteresis Fundamental Only 2% to 100% x rated current, steps of 1% 0s to 150s, steps of 0.01s 105%
1.6
Negative sequence overcurrent protection Current Current Range Thresholds Fundamental Only 0.1 to 40 x rated current, steps of 0.01n 2 Independent (2>, 2>>) 2> 2>> Note: 0.1n to 40n (see note) 0.1n to 40n
When 2> is associated with an IDMT curve the maximum setting recommended should be 2n. 95% < 40ms < 30ms
Hysteresis Instantaneous Time Drop-off Time
P521/EN TD/C31 Page 10/44 Time Delays: DMT IDMT Curves: (t2>, t2>>)
0s to 150s, steps of 0.01s IEC: Short Time Inverse (IEC), Standard Inverse (IEC), Very Inverse (IEC), Extremely Inverse (IEC), Long Time Inverse (UK).
Time Multiplier Setting (TMS)
0.025 to 1.5, steps of 0.025 IEEE/ANSI: Short Time Inverse (CO2), Moderately Inverse (ANSI), Inverse (CO8), Very Inverse (ANSI), Extremely Inverse (ANSI).
Time Dial Setting (TD) RI: K Factor Setting (K)
0.1 to 100, steps of 0.1
Electromechanical Type 0.1 to 10, steps of 0.005
IDMT Curve Tolerance Reset Time IEEE Time Delay: RTMS DMT IEC Time Delay: DMT
2% (or 50ms whichever is greater) at default values.
0.025 to 3.2, steps of 0.025 0.04s to 100s, steps of 0.01s 0.04s to 100s, steps of 0.01s
2.
2.1
AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS
Cold load pickup Range Time Delay (tCL) 20% to 500% x nominal settings, steps of 1% 0.1s to 3600s, steps of 0.1s
2.2
Auxiliary timers Auxiliary Timer Numbers tAux1 & tAux2 Range 2 independent associated to the Logic Inputs Aux 1 and Aux2 0s to 200s, steps of 0.01s
2.3
Broken conductor detection Principle Used Threshold Time Delay (tBC) 2/1 20% to 100%, steps of 1% 1s to 14400s, steps of 1s
2.4
Circuit breaker failure Undercurrent Threshold (<) Threshold Accuracy Threshold Hysteresis CB Failure Time (tBF) 2% to 100% x rated current, step of 1% from 0.02n to 0.1n : from 0.1n to 1n : Max. 0.008n or 0.95s 0.03s to 10s, steps of 0.01s 0.006n 2%s
2.5
Trip circuit supervision Time Value (tSUP) 0.1s to 10s, steps 0.05s
2.6
Circuit breaker control and monitoring CB Opening Time (tOpen) CB Closing Time (tClose) CB Opening Alarm Threshold Amps Alarm Threshold CB Trip Time Alarm Threshold CB Close Time Alarm Threshold 0.05s to 1s, steps of 0.01s 0.05s to 1s, steps of 0.01s 0 to 50000 Operations 0 to 4x109, steps of 106 0.1s to 5s, steps of 0.1s 0.1s to 5s, steps of 0.1s
2.7
Logic selectivity Timer Number tSel1 & tSel2 Range 2 Independent : tSel1 and tSel2
0 to 150s, steps of 0.01s
3.
3.1
RECORDING FUNCTIONS
Event recorder Capacity Time-Tag Triggers 75 Events to 1 millisecond Any selected Protection Alarm and Threshold Logic input state change Self test events Setting changes
3.2
Fault recorder Capacity Time-Tag Triggers Data Stored 5 Faults to 1 millisecond Any selected protection alarm and threshold Fault date Protection thresholds Setting group AC inputs measurements (RMS) Fault magnitudes
3.3
Instantaneous recorder Capacity Time-Tag Triggers Data Stored 5 Starting records (instantaneous threshold pick-up) 1 millisecond resolution Any selected phase or earth threshold Time and date Origin of fault (threshold) Duration of the instantaneous flag Trip (Yes or No)
3.4
Disturbance recorder Capacity Sampling Rate Settings: Triggers Pre-Time Post-Time 5 Records of up to 3s each 32 Samples per frequency cycle 0.1s to 3s. steps of 0.1s 0.1s to 3s. steps of 0.1s Any selected protection alarm and threshold Logic input Remote command Data Stored AC Input channels Digital input/output states
4.
RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
EIA(RS)485 Port: Connectors Protocols Data Rate EIA(RS)232 Port: Connector Protocol Data Rate Rear Port, Screened Twisted Pair Screws or Snap-On MODBUSTM RTU IEC 60870-5-103 300 to 38400 Baud (Programmable) Front Port, Screened twisted cable Sub-D 9 pin female connector MODBUSTM RTU 19200 Baud Asynchronous
5.
PROTECTION COMMUNICATIONS
EIA(RS)485 Port: Connectors Transmission Mode Data Rate EIA(RS)232 Port: Connector Transmission Mode Data Rate Fiber Port: Rear Port, Screened twisted pair Full Duplex Connection Phoenix Contact model KGG-MC 1,5/ 7 NRZ (recommended) SDLC 9600 to 64000 Baud (Programmable) Rear Port, Screened twisted cable Phoenix Contact Model KGG-MC 1,5/ 7 NRZ (recommended) SDLC 9600 to 64000 Baud (Programmable) 850nm Multi-Mode 1300nm Multi-Mode 1300nm Single-Mode Connector: Transmission Mode Data Rate ST Type Fiber Connector NRZ SDLC (recommended) 9600 to 64000 Baud (Programmable) <0.02 ITU-T G.821
Errored Secs Time Available
Severe Error Secs Time Available
<0.008 ITU-T G.821
P521/EN TD/C31 Page 14/44 5.1 5.1.1 Propagation delays Maximum allowable propagation delay System Frequency 50Hz 60Hz 5.1.2 Data Rate 9.6kB/s 162ms 158ms 19.2kB/s 94ms 80ms
56kB/s 29ms 24ms
64kB/s 29ms 24ms
Maximum propagation delay difference between send and receive communications paths System Frequency 50Hz 60Hz Data Rate 9.6kB/s 2ms 1ms 19.2kB/s 2ms 1ms 56kB/s 2ms 1ms 64kB/s 1ms 1ms
6.
6.1
INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

AC inputs Phase Current Inputs Earth Current Inputs Frequency: Nominal Range Current Inputs Burden: Phase Earth Thermal Withstand <0.025VA (1A) <0.3VA (5A) <0.008VA at 0.1e (1A) <0.01VA for 0.1e (5A) 1s @ 100 x Rated Current with 400A Maximum 2s @ 40 x Rated Current Continuous @ 4 x Rated Current 50 or 60Hz by setting selection Nominal 5Hz 1 and 5 Amps by connection 1 and 5 Amps by connection
Technical Data and Curve Characteristics MiCOM P521 6.2 Logic inputs and outputs Logic input
The logic inputs should be powered with a DC voltage, except for the M auxiliary voltage range which accepts both DC and AC voltage. RELAY AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY
Ordering Code (Cortec) Relay Auxiliary Power Supply Nominal Voltage Range 24 - 60 Vdc 48 - 150 Vdc 130 - 250 Vdc 100 - 250 Vac T (**) U (**) 48 -150 Vdc 130 - 250 Vdc Relay Auxiliary Power Supply Operating Range (*) 19.2 - 72 Vdc 38.4 - 180 Vdc 104 - 300 Vdc 80 - 275 Vac 38.4 - 180 Vdc 104 - 300 Vdc
LOGIC INPUT VOLTAGES

Auxiliary Nominal Voltage for the Logic Inputs 19 - 60 Vdc 32 - 150 Vdc 48 - 250 Vdc 48 - 250 Vac 32 - 150 Vdc 48 - 250 Vdc Auxiliary voltage Operating Range for the Logic Inputs(*) 15.2 - 60 Vdc 25.6 - 180 Vdc 38.4 - 300 Vdc 38.4 - 275 Vac 25.6 - 180 Vdc 38.4 - 300 Vdc Minimum Operating Current (mA)
A F M
3.35 mA dc 3.35 mA dc 2.20 mA dc 1.90 mA ac 3.35 mA dc 2.20 mA dc
(*) The tolerance on the auxiliary voltage variation for the auxiliary supply voltage and logic inputs is 20% for DC voltage and -20%, +10% for AC voltage. (**) Logic input immunity to AC voltage for ENA. Dedicated filtering on 24 samples (15 ms recognition time at 50 Hz). Intended for UK applications which require compliance with EATS PAP 48-5 Issue 2: 2000 and NGTS 3.24.15 Issue 1 Dec 2000 section 7.55. These logic inputs (dc only) provide immunity to ac-coupled differential power frequency interference. Logic output Type Rating: Make Carry Break 30 Amps and carry for 3s 5 Amps continuous 135Vdc, 0.3 Amps (L/R=30 ms) 250Vdc, 50W resistive or 25W inductive (L/R=40ms) 220Vac, 5 Amps (cos =0.6) Operation Time Mechanical Durability <7ms >100 000 Operations Dry Contact Ag CdO
P521/EN TD/C31 Page 16/44 6.3 Power supply Auxiliary Voltages, Vaux 24 - 60Vdc 48 - 150Vdc
130 - 250Vdc/100 - 250Vac, 50/60Hz Power Supply Variations Ripple DC Interruption Burden dc 20% ac 20%, +10% 12% 50ms 3W Standby + 0.4W per Energized Relay + 10mA per logic input 6VA Standby + 0.4VA per Energized Relay + 10mA per logic input
7.
ACCURACY
Protection Thresholds Time Delay Measurements Additional Error Due to Frequency Variation 2% (5% - current differential) 2 % with a minimum of 0.05s Typical 0.2% at n for measured quantities and 0.5% for derived quantities f -fn fn % between 45 and 65Hz where f = actual frequency fn = nominal frequency (e.g. 50/60Hz) Calculation of Signaling Delay Signaling Delay = 2 Integer (in seconds) Where: BR NB Dp = Baud rate setting (e.g. 9600, 19200, 56000, 64000) = Number of bits in the message (NRZ = 210 bits, SDLC = 204 bits) = Propagation delay of system (select zero seconds for direct fiber connected systems, or refer to modem configuration section for typical modem propagation delays)
NB/ BR KF
+ 1 . KF
+ Dp
Integer = Nearest whole number (rounded up) KF 1 = 4.F S
Technical Data and Curve Characteristics MiCOM P521 FS = System frequency setting (50Hz or 60Hz)
8.
CT DATA
Phase CT Primary Earth CT Primary Phase CT Secondary Earth CT Secondary CT Correction Factor Earth Current 1 to 9999, steps of 1 1 to 9999, steps of 1 1 or 5 1 or 5 0.05 to 2.0, steps of 0.001 Residual Connection or Core Balanced CT (preferred in isolated and compensated neutral systems)
9.
9.1
HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND

Dielectric withstand IEC60255-5: 2000 2.0kVrms for one minute between all terminals and case earth (including EIA(RS)485/EIA(RS)232 socket SK1). 2.0kVrms for one minute between all terminals of each independent circuit grouped together, and all other terminals (including EIA(RS)485/EIA(RS)232 socket SK1). 1.0kVrms for one minute across dedicated normally open contacts of output relays. 1.0kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts of changeover and watchdog output relays.
9.2
Impulse IEC60255-5: 2000 The product will withstand without damage impulses of 5kV peak, 1.2/50s, 0.5J across: Each independent circuit and the case with the terminals of each independent circuit connected together. Independent circuits with the terminals of each independent circuit connected together. Terminals of the same circuit except normally open metallic contacts.
9.3
Insulation resistance IEC60255-5: 2000 The insulation resistance is greater than 100 M at 500Vdc.
10.
10.1
ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT
Performance criteria The following three classes of performance criteria are used to specify the performance of the MiCOM relay when subjected to the electrical interference. The performance criteria are based on the performance criteria specified in EN 500822:1995.
10.1.1 Class A During the testing, the relay will not mal-operate and upon completion of testing the relay will function as specified. A mal-operation will include a transient operation of the output contacts, operation of the watchdog contacts, reset of any of the relays microprocessors or an alarm indication. The relay communications must continue uncorrupted via the communications ports during the test, however, relay communications may be momentarily interrupted, provided they recover with no external intervention. 10.1.2 Class B During the testing, the relay will not mal-operate and upon completion of the testing, the relay will function as specified. A mal-operation will include a transient operation of the output contacts, operation of the watchdog contacts, reset of any of the relays microprocessors or an alarm indication. Transitory operation of the output LEDs is acceptable, provided no permanent false indications are recorded. The relay communications must continue uncorrupted via the communications ports during the test. However, relay communications may be momentarily interrupted, provided they recover with no external intervention. 10.1.3 Class C The relay will power down and power up again in a controlled manner within 5 seconds. The output relays are permitted to change state during the test as long as they reset once the relay powers up. Communications to the relay may be suspended during the testing, as long as communication recovers with no external intervention after the testing. 10.2 Auxiliary supply tests, dc interruption, etc.
10.2.1 DC voltage interruptions IEC 60255-11: 1979. DC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 2, 5, 10, 20, 50ms. Performance criteria - Class A. DC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 100, 200ms, 40s. Performance criteria - Class C. 10.2.2 DC voltage fluctuations IEC 60255-11: 1979. AC 100Hz ripple superimposed on the DC max. and min. auxiliary supply at 12% of highest rated DC. Performance criteria - Class A.
Technical Data and Curve Characteristics MiCOM P521 10.3 AC voltage dips and short interruptions
10.3.1 AC voltage short interruptions IEC 61000-4-11: 1994. AC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 2, 5, 10, 20, 50ms. Performance criteria - Class A. AC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 100, 200ms, 1s, 40s. Performance criteria - Class C. 10.3.2 AC voltage dips IEC 61000-4-11: 1994 AC Auxiliary Supply 100% Voltage Dips 2, 5, 10, 20, 50ms. Performance criteria - Class A. AC Auxiliary Supply 100% Voltage Dips 100, 200ms, 1s, 40s. Performance criteria - Class C. 10.4 High frequency disturbance IEC 60255-22-1: 1988 Class III. 1MHz burst disturbance test. IEC 61000-4-12: 1995 Class III. 100kHz burst disturbance test. 2.5kV common mode. Power supply, CTs, opto inputs, output contacts, rear EIA(RS)485 protection communications port. 1kV differential mode. Power supply, CTs, opto inputs and output contacts. Performance criteria Class A. 10.5 Fast transients IEC 60255-22-4: 2002 (EN 61000-4-4: 1995), Class III and Class IV. 2kV 5kHz (Class III) and 4kV 2.5kHz (Class IV) direct coupling. Power supply, opto inputs, output contacts, CTs. 2kV 5kHz (Class III) and 4kV 2.5kHz (Class IV) capacitive clamp. EIA(RS)485 / EIA(RS)232 protection communications port. Performance criteria Class A.
P521/EN TD/C31 Page 20/44 10.6 Conducted/radiated emissions
10.6.1 Conducted emissions EN 55022: 1995 Class A, IEC 60255-25: 2000 Class A. 0.15 - 0.5MHz, 79dBV (quasi peak) 66dBV (average). 0.5 - 30MHz, 73dBV (quasi peak) 60dBV (average). 10.6.2 Radiated emissions EN 55022: 1995 Class A, IEC 60255-25: 2000 Class A. 30 - 230MHz, 40dBV/m at 10m measurement distance. 230 - 1000MHz, 47dBV/m at 10m measurement distance. 10.7 Conducted/radiated immunity
10.7.1 Conducted immunity IEC 60255-22-6: 1996/A1 2001, IEC 61000-4-6: 2002 Level 3. 10V emf @ 1kHz 80% AM, 150kHz to 80MHz. Spot tests at 27MHz, 68MHz. Performance criteria Class A. 10.7.2 Radiated immunity IEC 60255-22-3: 2000 Class III, IEC 61000-4-3: 1995 Level 3. 10 V/m 80MHz - 1GHz @ 1kHz 80% AM. Spot tests at 80MHz, 160MHz, 450MHz, 900MHz (10V/m). Performance criteria Class A. 10.7.3 Radiated immunity from digital radio telephones IEC 60255-22-3: 2000 Class III, IEC 61000-4-3: 2002 Class 4. 30V/m 800MHz - 960MHz @ 1kHz 80% AM. 30V/m 1.4GHz - 2.0GHz @ 1kHz 80% AM. 10 V/m 900MHz 5 MHz and 1.89GHz 5MHz, 200Hz rep. Freq., 50% duty cycle pulse modulated. Performance criteria Class A. 10.8 Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255-22-2: 1996 Class 3 & Class 4, IEC 61000-4-2: 1995. Class 4: 15kV air discharge (front panel excluding front comms.). Class 3: 8kV air discharge (communications port). Class 3: 6kV contact discharge (front panel). Performance criteria Class A.
Technical Data and Curve Characteristics MiCOM P521 10.9 Surge immunity IEC 60255-22-5: 2002, IEC 61000-4-5: 1995 Levels 3 and 4. Level 4 - AC/DC PSU, CTs, optos, output contacts.
Level 3 - DC PSU, EIA(RS)485 rear protection communications channel. Performance criteria Class A under reference conditions. 10.10 Power frequency magnetic field IEC 61000-4-8: 1993 Level 5. 100A/m field applied continuously in all planes with the EUT configured in its quiescent and tripping states. 1000A/m field applied for 3s in all planes with the EUT configured in its quiescent and tripping states. Performance criteria Class A. 10.11 Pulse magnetic field immunity IEC 61000-4-9: 1993 Level 5. 6.4s/16s magnetic pulse, 1000A/m, applied in both polarities in each plane with the EUT configured in its quiescent state. Performance criteria Class A. 10.12 Damped oscillatory magnetic field immunity IEC 61000-4-10: 1993 Level 5. 0.1MHz and 1MHz damped oscillatory pulses, 100A/m, applied in both polarities in each plane with the EUT configured in its quiescent state. Performance criteria Class A. 10.13 Power frequency interference IEC 60255-22-7: 2003 NGTS* 2.13 Issue 1 Dec 2000, section 7.55 EATS 48-5, Issue 2: 2000. 300Vrms common mode. 250Vrms differential mode. Voltage applied to all non-mains frequency inputs. Permanently connected communications circuits tested to Class 3 (100-1000m) test level 50mV. Performance criteria Class A. * National Grid Technical Specification 10.14 Surge withstand capability (SWC) ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 (2002) Oscillatory SWC Test
2.5kV - 3kV, 1 - 1.5MHz - common and differential mode - applied to all circuits except for terminal block communications, which are tested common mode only via the cable screen. Fast Transient SWC Tests 4 - 5kV crest voltage - common and differential mode - applied to all circuits except for terminal block communications, which are tested common mode only via the cable screen. Performance criteria Class A 10.15 Radiated immunity ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 1995 35 V/m 25MHz - 1GHz, no modulation, applied to all sides. 35 V/m 25MHz - 1GHz, 100% pulse modulated, to front only. Performance criteria Class A.
11.
11.1
ATMOSPHERIC ENVIRONMENT
Temperature IEC 60068-2-1: 1990/A2: 1994 - Cold test IEC 60068-2-2: 1974/A2: 1994 - Dry heat test IEC 60255-6: 1988 Operating Temperature Range C (Time Period in Hours) Cold Temperature 25 (96) Dry Heat Temperature 55 (96) Storage Temperature Range C (Time Period in Hours) Cold Temperature 25 (96) Dry Heat Temperature 70 (96)
Operating Temperature Range: Continuous Withstand Limit Storage Temperature Range Note 1: 11.2 Humidity IEC 60068-2-3: 1969 Damp heat, steady state, 40 C 2 C and 93% relative humidity (RH) +2% 3%, duration 56 days. IEC 60068-2-30: 1980 Damp heat cyclic, six (12 + 12 hour cycles) of 55C 2C 93% 3% RH and 25C 3C 93% 3% RH. -25 to +55oC -25 to +70oC -25 to +70oC
(Note 1)
The upper limit is permissible for a single 6 hour duration within any 24 hour period.
Technical Data and Curve Characteristics MiCOM P521 11.3 Enclosure protection IEC 60529: 2001 IP52 Category 2 IP5x Protected against dust, limited ingress permitted.
IPx2 Protected against vertically falling drops of water with the product in 4 fixed positions of 15 tilt with a flow rate of 3mm/minute for 2.5 minutes.
12.
12.1
MECHANICAL ENVIRONMENT
Performance criteria The following two classes of performance criteria are used within sections to (where applicable) to specify the performance of the MiCOM relay when subjected to mechanical testing.
12.1.1 Severity classes The following table details the Class and Typical Applications of the vibration, shock bump and seismic tests detailed previously Class 1 Typical Application Measuring relays and protection equipment for normal use in power plants, substations and industrial plants and for normal transportation conditions Measuring relays and protection equipment for which a very high security margin is required or where the vibration (shock and bump) (seismic shock) levels are very high, e.g. shipboard application and for severe transportation conditions.
12.1.2 Vibration (sinusoidal) IEC 60255-21-1: 1988 Cross over frequency - 58 to 60 Hz Vibration response Severity Class 2 Peak Displacement Below Cross Over Frequency (mm) 0.075 Peak Acceleration Above Cross Over Frequency (gn ) 1 Number of Sweeps in Each Axis 1 Frequency Range (Hz) 10 150
Vibration endurance Severity Class 2 Peak Acceleration (gn ) 2.0 Number of Sweeps in Each Axis 20 Frequency Range (Hz) 10 150
P521/EN TD/C31 Page 24/44 12.1.3 Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2: 1988 Type of Test Shock Response Shock Withstand Bump 12.1.4 Seismic IEC 60255-21-3: 1993 Cross over frequency - 8 to 9Hz x = horizontal axis, y = vertical axis Peak Displacement Below Cross Over Frequency (mm) x 2 7.5 y 3.5 Peak Acceleration Above Cross Over Frequency (gn) x 2.0 y 1.0 Severity Class 2 1 1 Peak Acceleration ( gn ) 10 15 10
Duration of Pulse ( ms ) 11 11 16
Number of Pulses in Each Direction 3 3 1000
Severity Class
Number of Sweep Cycles in Each Axis 1
Frequency Range (Hz) 1- 35
13.
EC EMC COMPLIANCE
Compliance to the European Community Directive 89/336/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC is claimed via the Standards route. The following Product Specific Standard was used to establish conformity: EN 50263: 2000
14.
EC LVD COMPLIANCE
Compliance with European Community Directive on Low Voltage 73/23/EEC is demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards: EN 61010-1: 2001 EN 60950-1: 2001
15.
BATTERY LIFE
Battery life (assuming relay energized for >90% of time) > 10 years.
16.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE
With exception of the RMS measurements and thermal overload protection all other measurements are based upon the Fourier derived fundamental component. The fundamental component is extracted by using a 16 sample Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). This gives good harmonic rejection for frequencies up to the 15th harmonic. The 15th is the first predominant harmonic that is not attenuated by the fourier filter and is known as an Alias. The Alias, however, is attenuated by approximately 70% by an additional analogue, anti-aliasing filter (low pass filter). The combined affect of the anti-aliasing and fourier filters is shown below.
1 0.9 Anti-aliasing filter response 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
P1124ENb
Magnitude (per unit)
Combined response of fourier and anti-aliasing filter
Frequency (Hz)
17.
17.1
CURVES
IDMT curves
17.1.1 Pick-up IDMT mathematical formula Inverse Time Curves Formulae: The first and second stage phase and earth overcurrent threshold can be selected with a dependent time characteristic. The time delay is calculated with a mathematical formula. There are eleven inverse time characteristics available. The mathematical formula applicable to the first ten curves is:
K + L t=Tx (/s) - 1
P521/EN TD/C31 Page 26/44 Where: t = Operating time (secs)
K = Coefficient (see table) = Value of measured current
S = Value of the programmed threshold (Pick-up value) = Coefficient (see table) L = ANSI/IEEE coefficient (zero for IEC curves) T = Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for IEC curves or Time Dial (TD) for ANSI/IEEE curves. Type of Curve Short Time Inverse Standard Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long time Inverse Short Time Inverse Moderately Inverse Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Standard IEC IEC IEC IEC UK CO2 ANSI/IEEE CO8 ANSI/IEEE ANSI/IEEE K Factor 0.05 0.14 13.5 80 120 0.02394 0.0515 5.95 19.61 28.2 Factor 0.04 0.02 1 2 1 0.02 0.02 2 2 2 L Factor 0 0 0 0 0 0.01694 0.114 0.18 0.491 0.1215
The RI curve (electromechanical) is given by the following formula: 1 0.339 - 0.236 /(/s)
t=Kx
when 1.1 < = (/s) < = 20
Although the curves tend towards infinity when the current approaches s, the minimum guaranteed value of the operating current for all the curves with the inverse time characteristic is 1.1s (with a tolerance of 0.05s). Laborelec Curves: The first and second earth thresholds can be selected with dedicated Laborelec curves. There are 3 curves available with the following formula:
t = + b
Where: t = Tripping time
= Coefficient (see table) b = Coefficient (see table) = Primary residual current (between 1 and 40A)
Technical Data and Curve Characteristics MiCOM P521 Type of Curve LABORELEC 1 LABORELEC 2 LABORELEC 3 0.0897 0.0897 0.0897
P521/EN TD/C31 Page 27/44 b 4.0897 4.5897 5.0897
In order to be compliant with the Laborelec specifications the relay must be used with: An earth current range 0.01en to 8en A rated current wiring 1A A core balanced CT with a ratio 20/1.
For a complete operating of the curve, the relay must be set to 0.05en (secondary residual current). 17.1.2 Reset timer IDMT mathematical formula Reset Timer Description: The first and second phase and earth overcurrent stages are provided with a timer hold facility tReset, which may be set to a definite time value or to an inverse time characteristic (IEEE/ANSI curves only). This may be useful in certain applications, for example when grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays which have inherent reset time delays. Another possible situation where the timer hold facility may be used to reduce fault clearance times is where intermittent faults occur. An example of this may occur in a plastic insulated cable. In this application, it is possible that the fault energy melts and reseals the cable insulation, thereby extinguishing the fault. This process repeats to give a succession of fault current pulses, each of increasing duration with reducing intervals between the pulses, until the fault becomes permanent. When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is minimum the relay will be repeatedly reset and not be able to trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the Timer Hold facility the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time. The reset timer tReset facility can be found in the following menu configurations: If the threshold is selected with an IDMT IEC or RI curve, the reset timer tReset with DMT characteristic is settable in the menu and can be found at the following locations: Phase fault reset timer setting: Protection [50/51] Phase OC tReset Earth fault reset timer setting: Protection [50N/51N] E/Gnd tReset If the threshold is selected with an IDMT IEEE or CO curve, the reset timer tReset with a DMT or IDMT characteristic is settable in the menu at the following locations: Phase fault reset timer setting: Protection [50/51] Phase OC Reset Type Earth fault reset timer setting: Protection [50N/51N] E/Gnd Reset Type
P521/EN TD/C31 Page 28/44 Inverse Time Curves Formulae: The mathematical formula applicable to the five curves is: K t=Tx 1 - (/s) Where: t = Reset time
K = Coefficient (see table) = Value of the measured current
S = Value of the programmed threshold (pick-up value) = Coefficient (see table) T = Reset Time Multiplier (Rtms) between 0.025 and 3.2 Type of Curves Short Time Inverse Moderately Inverse Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Standard CO2 ANSI/IEEE CO8 ANSI/IEEE ANSI/IEEE K Factor 2.261 4.85 5.95 21.6 29.1 Factor 2 2 2 2 2
Technical Data and Curve Characteristics MiCOM P521 17.1.3 IEC curves
IEC & UK Curves (TMS=0,025)
Short Time Inverse Very Inverse Long Time Inverse (UK)
Standard Inverse Extremely Inverse
P0006ENa
Technical Data and Curve Characteristics MiCOM P521 Short Time Inverse (IEC)
P0007ENa
P0008ENa
P0009ENa
EXTREMELY INVERSE (IEC)
P0010ENa
Technical Data and Curve Characteristics MiCOM P521 Long Time Inverse (UK)
P0011ENa
Technical Data and Curve Characteristics MiCOM P521 17.1.4 RI curves
P0012ENa
P521/EN TD/C31 Page 36/44 17.1.5 IEEE/ANSI & CO curves
Short Time Inverse (CO2) Inverse (CO8) Extremely Inverse
Moderately Inverse Very Inverse
P0013ENa
P0014ENa
P0015ENa
Inverse (CO8)
TIME IN SECONDS
P0016ENa
P0017ENa
P0018ENa
P521/EN TD/C31 Page 42/44 17.1.6 Laborelec curve
1.5
1.0
0.5
40 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 1
Time (sec)
P0020ENa
50 5 10 Primary zero sequence current (A) 20 30
Technical Data and Curve Characteristics MiCOM P521 17.2 Thermal overload curves
17.2.1 Mathematical formula The thermal time characteristic is given by:

2 2 - t - (K. FLC) loge = (2 - p2)
Where: t = Time to trip, following application of the overload current, = Heating and cooling time constant of the protected plant = Largest phase current (RMS value)
FLC = Full load current rating (relay setting 'Thermal Trip') k P = 1.05 constant, allows continuous operation up to < 1.05 FLC = Steady state pre-loading before application of the overload
The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from "hot" or "cold". Mathematical formula applicable to the MiCOM Relays: The calculation of the time to trip is given by:
(K2 - 2) Ttrip = Te .loge 2 (K - trip2)

Where: Ttrip = Time to trip (in seconds) Te K eq = Thermal time constant of the protected element (in seconds) = Thermal overload equal to eq k . >
= Equivalent current corresponding to the RMS value of the largest phase current
> = Full load current rating (FLC) given by the national standard or by the supplier k 2 = Factor associated to the thermal state formula = Initial thermal state. If the initial thermal state = 30% then 2 = 0.3
trip2 = Trip thermal state. If the trip thermal state is set at 100%, then trip2 = 1
The calculation of the thermal state is given by the following formula:
eq +1 = (k . >)
2 . 1 - log -t + . log -t e e Te Te
where is being calculated every 0.1s. 17.2.2 Tripping curve
P0021Ena
Application Guide MiCOM P521
P521/EN AP/C31
APPLICATION GUIDE
8th November 2005 2 10P52101
P521/EN AP/B11
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 1/84
CONTENTS
1.
1.1 1.2
INTRODUCTION
P521 protection features Non-protection features
7
7 8
2.
2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

Current differential protection Current differential characteristics Time alignment of current vectors Capacitive charging current Ratio compensation Additional protection considerations
9
9 9 11 13 14 14 14 15 16 16 16 17 18 19 20 20 23 23 26 26 27 27 28 28 30 30
2.1.5.1 The minimum operating current 2.1.5.2 Relay sensitivity under heavy load conditions 2.1.5.3 Setting k1 less than 30% 2.1.6 Example settings
2.1.6.1 Differential element (Is1) 2.1.6.2 CT ratio correction 2.1.7 Protection of transformer feeders
2.1.7.1 Transformer magnetizing inrush 2.1.7.2 Ratio correction 2.1.7.3 Phase correction and zero sequence current filtering 2.1.8 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 In zone teed loads Overcurrent and earth fault protection Instantaneous (start) function (50/50N) Definite time operation (DMT) DMT thresholds
2.2.3.1 Inverse time curves 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.3 Laborelec curves Reset timer Time graded protection Thermal overload protection
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 2/84 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.7 2.7.1 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 Thermal overload characteristic Setting guidelines Circuit breaker failure protection (CBF) Circuit breaker failure protection operation Breaker fail timer settings Breaker fail undercurrent settings CBF fail logic Broken conductor detection Setting guidelines Example setting Intertripping facilities Permissive intertrip Direct intertrip Selective intertripping Negative sequence overcurrent protection 2> and 2>> setting guidelines Undercurrent protection function Blocked overcurrent protection Selective scheme logic Cold load pick-up
Application Guide MiCOM P521 31 31 33 33 37 37 37 37 38 39 39 39 40 41 42 42 44 45 46 47 48 48 48 49
2.11.1 Air conditioning/resistive heating loads 2.11.2 Motor feeders 2.11.3 Earth fault protection applied to transformers 2.11.4 Switch onto fault protection (SOTF)
3.
3.1 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

Auxiliary timers (tAux 1 and tAux 2) Setting group selection Change of setting group by a logic input Manual setting group change via front interface Latch functions Blocking functions Circuit breaker state monitoring CB control
49
49 49 50 50 50 51 52 53
Application Guide MiCOM P521 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3 3.7.4 3.7.5 3.7.6 3.8 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 CB trip and close via user interface CB trip and close via opto inputs CB manual trip and close delays Circuit breaker condition monitoring Circuit breaker condition monitoring features CB supervision settings
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 3/84 53 54 54 54 54 55 56 56 56 57 57 57 60 61 61 62 62 63 63 64 64 64 65 65 65 65 65 65 65
Setting the operating time thresholds (CB Open Time/CB Close Time) Setting the number of operations thresholds (CB Open NB =) Setting the n thresholds ( Amps (n)) Setting the trip and close pulse times (t Open Pulse/t Close Pulse) Trip circuit supervision MiCOM P521 trip circuit supervision mechanism Calculation of external resistor R1 Event records Fault records Instantaneous recorder Disturbance recorder Rolling and peak demand values
3.13.1 Rolling demand 3.13.2 Peak value demand 3.14 Measurements
3.14.1 Current diff 3.14.2 Current/general 3.14.2.1 Measured currents 3.14.2.2 Ratio of 2/1 3.14.2.3 Residual harmonic currents (N fn) 3.14.2.4 Peak and average currents 3.14.2.5 Demand values 3.14.3 Protection comms
4.
4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.2
CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

Current differential protection Ks calculation Kt calculation Typical equations for current differential protection
66
66 66 66 67
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 4/84 4.3 4.4 Selection of X/R ratio and fault level SEF protection as fed by core-balance CT
Application Guide MiCOM P521 67 67
5.
5.1 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.4 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.6 5.6.1 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RELAYS

Communications link options Direct optical fiber Direct optical fiber link, 850nm multi-mode fiber Direct optical fiber link, 1300nm multi-mode fiber Direct optical fiber link, 1300nm single-mode fiber Switched communication networks Optical budgets Multiplexer link via P59x optical fiber to electrical interface units Multiplexer link with G.703 electrical interface using auxiliary optical fibers and type P591 interface Multiplexer link with V.35 electrical interface using auxiliary optical fibers and type P592 interface Multiplexer link with X.21 electrical interface using auxiliary optical fibers and type P593 interface Unconditioned 4 wire pilot communications for distances greater than 1.2km (P595) Unconditioned 2 wire pilot communications for distances greater than 1.2km Leased line modem set up (e.g. TD32 modem)
68
68 69 69 69 69 69 72 72 73 73 74 76 76 77
Baseband modem set up (Patton Netlink 1095 mDSL modem, Patton Campus 1092A modem) 77 Modem isolation Clock source settings Conditioned pilot communications Gas discharge tubes (GDTs) Direct 4 wire EIA(RS)485 up to 1.2km Pilot isolation Protection communications address Clock source 77 77 78 78 78 79 79 80 80 81 81 81
5.10.1 Internal clock source signaling 5.10.2 External clock source 5.11 5.12 Data rate Communication failure
Application Guide MiCOM P521 5.12.1 Communications fail timer 5.12.2 Communications failure logic 5.13 5.14 Communication error statistics Communications delay tolerance timer
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 5/84 81 81 82 82
FIGURES
Figure 1: Figure 2: Figure 3: Figure 4: Figure 5: Figure 6: Figure 7: Figure 8: Figure 9: Figure 10: Figure 11: Figure 12: Figure 13: Figure 14: Figure 15: Figure 16: Figure 17: Figure 18: Figure 19: Figure 20: Figure 21: Figure 22: Figure 23: Figure 24: Figure 25: Figure 26: Figure 27: Relay bias characteristic Propagation delay measurement Typical plain feeder circuit Plain feeder with unmatched CTs Transformer magnetizing characteristic Magnetizing inrush waveforms Need for zero-sequence current filtering First stage phase overcurrent protection (>/t>) logic Logic for overcurrent stages two, three and four CB fail detection principle CB open before TBF expired CB not yet open before TBF expired De-energization of the phase CT Circuit breaker failure protection logic Permissive intertrip Direct intertrip Undercurrent protection logic Blocked overcurrent scheme Typical scheme logic Blocking logic for selected protection features CB Status DBI logic diagram Trip circuit supervision logic diagram Trip coil monitoring Trip coil and auxiliary contact monitoring Trip coil and auxiliary contact monitoring regardless of CB position Switched communication network Modified bias characteristic 10 12 17 18 19 20 22 24 24 35 35 36 36 37 40 41 44 45 46 52 53 58 58 59 60 71 71
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 6/84 Figure 28: Figure 29: MT-RS485 connection diagram Communications failure logic
Application Guide MiCOM P521 79 82
1.
INTRODUCTION
MiCOM P521 relay has been designed to provide more functionality in terms of protection, measuring, automatic operation and control in any low/medium voltage electrical network. These relays can be used at industrial and distribution levels to overcome grading difficulties in complex networks. For distribution systems, continuity of supply is of paramount importance. Faults within the protected zone will be cleared very quickly by the MiCOM P521, thus minimizing damage and disruption to the rest of the system. The majority of overhead line faults are semi-permanent in nature. Multishot auto-reclose can therefore be used in conjunction with the P521 once again minimizing disruption to the system. The relay also has various other protection features such as overcurrent and earth fault protection. These features can be either permanently enabled or enabled when the differential communication channel fails. The phase and earth fault protection have four stages that can be set either instantaneous or DMT (stages 1 and 2 only). There is also a wide choice of operating time curves (EC, UK, ANSI/IEEE, C0, LABORELEC and Rectifier) which makes it possible to adapt these relays to an existing protection scheme, irrespective of the other relays already installed on the network. A choice of protection communications mediums are also available; these include electrical (i.e. pilot wires etc.), modem communications, multiplexed networks and direct fiber optic links. The P521 also offers the ability to change the protection communications interface from electrical to fiber optic without the need for a software/firmware upgrade. This allows the P521 to be applied to networks that are to have their protection communication upgraded in the future.
1.1
P521 protection features The P521 has the following protection features: Phase current differential protection [87] - Phase segregated biased differential protection provides the main protection element for the relay. Provides high speed, discriminative protection for all fault types. Phase fault overcurrent protection [50/51] - Four stage time delayed or instantaneous backup protection. Earth fault protection [50N/51N] - Four stage backup time delayed or instantaneous protection. (Normal, sensitive and very sensitive earth fault ranges are available at the ordering stage). True RMS thermal protection [49] - Thermal protection for overhead lines and cables. Undercurrent protection [37] - To detect loss of load conditions. Broken conductor protection - To detect open circuit faults Negative sequence overcurrent protection [46] - This can be selected to provide remote backup protection for phase to phase or phase to earth faults. Circuit breaker fail protection - To take remedial action in the event of slow or inoperable circuit breaker.
Trip circuit supervision - Checks the integrity of the trip circuit and the trip circuit supply voltage. In the event that the trip circuit becomes open circuit, or the trip circuit supply voltage is lost, the relay will issue a trip circuit fail alarm. Direct/permissive intertrip - Independent intertripping facility using the relay's protection communications channels. Protection communications supervision - To detect failure of protection communications and enable remedial action to be taken, i.e. switch in communication independent backup protections (e.g. overcurrent and earth fault protection). Cold load pick-up logic - May be used to transiently raise the setting for both the phase and the earth fault protection. Selective overcurrent logic - Provides the capability of temporarily altering the time settings of stages 2, 3 and 4 of the phase overcurrent and earth fault elements.
1.2
Non-protection features Below is a summary of the P521 relay non-protection features. Local/remote measurements - Various measurement values from the local and remote line ends available for display on the relay or accessed from the serial communications. Front EIA(RS)232 communication port (MODBUS only). Rear EIA(RS)485 communication port - Provides remote serial communications. The following communications protocols are supported: MODBUS, IEC608705-103. Fault/event/disturbance records - Available from the serial communications or on the relay LCD (fault and event records only). Two setting groups - Independent setting groups to cater for switched feeding or customer specific applications. Selectable phase rotation. Circuit breaker control - Control of the circuit breaker can be achieved either locally via the user interface or remotely. Circuit breaker condition monitoring - Provides records/alarm outputs regarding the number of CB operations, cumulative interruption duty, and the breaker operating/closing time. Commissioning test facilities - Allows the user to test the LEDs, energize selected output relays, freeze circuit breaker measurements and enable LOOPBACK mode. Continuous self-monitoring - Power on diagnostics and self checking routines to provide maximum relay reliability and availability.
2.
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

The following sections detail the individual protection functions in addition to where and how they may be applied. Each section also gives an extract from the respective menu columns to demonstrate how the settings are actually applied to the relay.
2.1
Current differential protection The primary protection element of the P521 relay is the current differential protection. This technique involves the comparison of the currents at each end of the line. A communications path is therefore an essential requirement of any such scheme. The P521 relay utilizes a 9.6/19.2/56/64 kbits/s digital communications system either for direct optical fiber between ends, direct EIA(RS)485 link, modem connections, or via a multiplexed link.
2.1.1
Current differential characteristics The basic operating principle of differential protection is to calculate the difference between the currents entering and leaving a protected zone. The protection operates when this difference exceeds a set threshold. Differential currents may also be generated during external fault conditions due to CT saturation. To provide stability for through fault conditions, the relay adopts a biasing technique. This method effectively raises the setting of the relay in proportion to the value of through fault current to prevent relay maloperation. Figure 1 shows the operating characteristics of the P521 phase differential element. The differential current is calculated as the vector summation of the currents entering the protected zone. The bias current is the average of the measured current at each line end. It is found by the scalar sum of the current at each terminal, divided by two. Both of these calculations are based upon the fundamental component of the line currents only. Each of these calculations is done on a phase by phase basis. The level of bias used for each element is the highest of the three calculated for optimum stability.
I1 Idiff
=
I2
I1 + I 2
Operate 2Is2 Percentage bias k2
Percentage bias k1
Restrain
Is1
I s2
Ibias
I 1 + I2
2
P1001ENd
Figure 1:
Relay bias characteristic
The characteristic is determined by four protection settings: s1 k1 The basic differential current setting which determines the minimum pick-up level of the relay. The lower percentage bias setting used when the bias current is below s2. This provides stability for small CT mismatches, whilst ensuring good sensitivity to resistive faults under heavy load conditions. A bias current threshold setting, above which the higher percentage bias k2 is used. The higher percentage bias setting used to improve relay stability under heavy through fault current conditions.
s2 k2
The tripping criteria can be formulated as: 1. for |bias| < s2, |diff| > k1.| bias| + s1 2. for |bias| > s2, |diff| > k2.| bias| - (k2 - k1). s2 + s1 When a trip is issued by the differential element, in addition to tripping the local breaker, the relay will send a differential intertrip signal to the remote relay. This will ensure tripping of both ends of the protected line, even for marginal fault conditions. The relay receiving the intertrip signal will indicate that it has operated due to a differential intertrip by displaying DIFF -TRIP.
The differential protection can be time delayed using either a definite or inverse time characteristic by selecting either DMT or DMT in the delay type cell. The table below details the settings available for the Current Differential protection element. The following settings can be found in the PROTECTION G1 (G2)/[87] Current Diff menu. It is possible to block operation of the current differential element by energizing a chosen digital input (see Blocking functions section). If the Block diff input is energized, the current differential element is prevented from operating. Furthermore, the relay will ignore any current differential intertrip signals ( DIFF -TRIP) sent by the remote relay. The direct and permissive intertrip functions, however, will continue to function even if the current differential protection is blocked by the digital input. [87] Current Diff Current Diff ? s1 s2 k1 k2 Diff Delay Type tdiff Diff Curve Diff Tms Diff Time Dial PT Time PT Disable DIT Rx tDwell Inrush Restraint High Set Table 1: Default Setting Yes 0.2n 2n 30% 150% DMT 0s EC S 1 1 0.2s No 0.1s No 4n Current differential settings Min No 0.1n 1n 0% 30% DMT 0s Max Yes 2n 30n 150% 150% DMT 150s Step N/A 0.05n 0.05n 5% 5% N/A 0.01s
EC ST, EC S, EC V, EC E, EC LT, CO2, EEE M, CO8, EEE V 0.025 0.1 0.05s No 0.1s No 4n 1.5 100 2s Yes 5s Yes 32n 0.025 0.1 0.01s N/A 0.05s N/A 0.01n
The High Set element is an unrestrained element designed to provide high speed operation in the event of CT saturation or where a fault occurs during an inrush condition in a transformer feeder application. Where transformer inrush restraint is used, the resultant second harmonic current produced from transformer inrush or CT saturation may cause slow relay operation. The High Set element is activated when Inrush Restraint is enabled, to overcome this condition. The High Set element should be set in excess of 40% of the peak magnetizing inrush current. 2.1.2 Time alignment of current vectors To calculate differential current between line ends it is necessary that the current samples from each end are taken at the same moment in time. This can be achieved by time synchronizing the sampling, or alternatively, by the continuous calculation of the propagation delay between line ends. The P521 relay has adopted this second technique.
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 12/84 Consider the two-ended system as shown in Figure 2.
Two identical relays, A and B are placed at the two ends of the line. Relay A samples its current signals at time tA1, tA2 etc., and relay B at time tB1, tB2 etc. Note that the sampling instants at the two ends will not, in general, be coincidental or of a fixed relationship, due to slight drifts in sampling frequencies.
A End A
Digital communications link
B End B
Measure sampling time tB3* = (tA - tp2) Curren t vector tA1 s tA2 tB3* tA3 tA4 tp2
1 td tB3 tA
Propagation delay time tp1 = tp2 = 1/2 (tA* - tA1 - td) tB1
tA1
tp1
tB2 td tB3 tB4 tB5
tB*
Curren
s t vector
tA*_ _ tA5
tA1, tA2 tB1, tB2 tp1 tp2 td tA* tB* tB3*
sampling instants of relay A sampling instants of relay B propagation delay time from relay A to B propagation delay time from relay B to A time between the arrival of message tA1 at relay B and despatch of message tB3 arrival time of message tB3 at relay A arrival time of message tA1 at relay B the measured sampling time of tB3 by relay A
P1002ENa
Figure 2:
Propagation delay measurement
Assume that at time tA1, relay A sends a data message to relay B. The message contains a time tag, tA1, together with other timing and status information and the current vector values calculated at tA1. The message arrives at end B after a channel propagation delay time, tp1. Relay B registers the arrival time of the message as tB*. Since relays A and B are identical, relay B also sends out data messages to end A. Assume relay B sends out a data message at tB3. The message therefore contains the time tag tB3. It also returns the last received time tag from relay A (i.e. tA1) and the delay time, td, between the arrival time of the received message, tB*, and the sampling time, tB3, i.e. td = (tB3 - tB*). The message arrives at end A after a channel propagation delay time, tp2. Its arrival time is registered by relay A as tA*. From the returned time tag, tA1, relay A can measure the total elapsed time as (tA* - tA1). This equals the sum of the propagation delay times tp1, tp2 and the delay time td at end B.
Application Guide MiCOM P521 Hence, (tA* - tA1) = (td + tp1 + tp2)
The relay assumes that the transmit and receive channels follow the same path and so have the same propagation delay time. This time can therefore be calculated as: tp1 = tp2 = (tA* - tA1 - td) Note that the propagation delay time is measured for each received sample and this can be used to monitor any change on the communication link. As the propagation delay time has now been deduced, the sampling instant of the received data from relay B (tB3*) can be calculated. As shown in Figure 2, the sampling time tB3* is measured by relay A as: tB3* = (tA* - tp2) In Figure 2, tB3* is between tA3 and tA4. To calculate the differential and bias currents, the vector samples at each line end must correspond to the same point in time. It is necessary therefore to time align the received tB3* data to tA3 and tA4. This can be achieved by rotating the received current vector by an angle corresponding to the time difference between tB3* and tA3 (and tA4). For example a time difference of 1ms would require a vector rotation of 1/20 * 360 = 18 for a 50Hz system. As two data samples can be compared with each data message, this process will have the effect of increasing the operating speed for any given bandwidth. Note that the current vectors of the three phases need to be time aligned separately. 2.1.3 Capacitive charging current The charging current of a line or cable will be seen as differential current. If this current is of a sufficiently high magnitude, as is the case for cables and long feeders, then relay maloperation could occur. Two issues are apparent with charging current; the first being inrush during line energization and the second being steady state charging current. Inrush charging current is normally a high order harmonic (9th or 11th for example). The Fourier filtering used by the P521 relay will remove these frequency components and hence provide stability. Steady state charging current is nominally at fundamental frequency and hence may cause relay maloperation. To overcome this problem it must be ensured that the base current setting on the relay (s1) is set to at least 2.5x the steady state line charging current to avoid possible maloperation. The table below shows some typical steady state charging currents for various lines and cables.
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 14/84 Voltage (kV) 11 kV Cable 33 kV Cable 33 kV Cable 66 kV Cable 132 kV Overhead Line 132 kV Overhead Line 132 kV Cable 132 kV Cable 275 kV Overhead Line 275 kV Overhead Line 275 kV Cable 275 kV Cable 400 kV Overhead Line 400 kV Overhead Line 400 kV Cable 400 kV Cable Table 2: 2.1.4 Core Formation and Spacing Three-core Three-core Close-trefoil Flat, 127mm Three-core Flat, 520mm Flat, 205mm Flat, 260mm Flat, 145mm Tref., 585mm
Application Guide MiCOM P521 Conductor Size in mm2 120 120 300 630 175 400 500 600 2 x 175 2 x 400 1150 2000 2 x 400 4 x 400 2000 3000 Charging Current A/km 1.2 1.8 2.5 10 0.22 0.44 10 20 0.58 0.58 19 24 0.85 0.98 28 33
Typical cable/line charging currents (UK, 50Hz)
Ratio compensation To ensure correct operation of the differential element, it is important that under load and through fault conditions, the currents into the differential element of the relay are balanced. In some cases, the current transformer primary ratings at each end of the line will not exactly match. A ratio correction factor (CONFIGURATION/CT Ratio/CT Correct Ratio) is therefore provided which is adjustable from 0.05 to 2 in steps of 0.01. The CT ratio correction factor is applied to ensure that the signals to the differential algorithm are correct. Ideally, the compensated current values should be arranged to be as close as possible to the relay rated current to provide optimum relay sensitivity. The corrected currents should not, however, be arranged to exceed relay rated current under through load conditions.
2.1.5
Additional protection considerations
2.1.5.1 The minimum operating current It should be noted that the minimum operating current is related, but not equal to, the Is1 setting. Consider a single end fed fault with no load but fault current, I: |diff| = |bias| =
Assuming |bias| < s2, then, using the equation 1 from section 2.1.1, the relay will operate if: |diff| > k1.| bias| + s1 > k1. + s1 > s1 / (1 - 0.5 k1) or or
The minimum operating current is therefore a function of the s1 and k1 settings. Since k1 is recommended to be set to 30%, the minimum operating current will be: min = 1.176 s1 For most applications a minimum setting of 0.2 pu is recommended. This will give the relay a sensitivity of 0.235 pu. 2.1.5.2 Relay sensitivity under heavy load conditions The sensitivity of the relay is governed by its settings and also the magnitude of load current in the system. For a two-ended system, with relays X and Y, the following applies: |diff| = |(X + Y)| |bias| = 0.5 (|X| + |Y|) Assume a load current of L flowing from end X to Y. Assume also a high resistance fault of current F being singly fed from end X. For worst case analysis, we can assume also F to be in phase with L: X = L + F Y = L |diff| = |F| |bias| = |L| + 0.5 |F| Relay sensitivity when |bias| < s2: For |bias| < s2, the relay would operate if |diff| > k1 |bias| + s1 or or or |F| > k1 (|L| + 0.5 |F|) + s1 (1 - 0.5 k1) |F| > (k1 |L| + s1) |F| > (k1 |L| + s1) / (1 - 0.5 k1)
For s1 = 0.2 pu, k1 = 30% and s2 =2.0 pu, then 1. for |L| = 1.0 pu, 2. for |L| = 1.59 pu, the relay would operate if |F| > 0.59 pu the relay would operate if |F| > 0.80 pu
If |F| = 0.80 pu and |F| = 1.59 pu, then |bias| = 1.99 pu which reaches the limit of the low percentage bias curve. Relay sensitivity when |bias| > Is2: For |bias| > s2, the relay would operate if |diff| > k2 |bias| - (k2 - k1) s2 + s1 or or |F| > k2 (|L| + 0.5 |F|) - (k2 - k1) s2 + s1 (1 - 0.5 k2) |F| > (k2 |L| - (k2 - k1) s2 + s1)
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 16/84 or |F| > (k2 |L| - (k2 - k1) s2 + s1) / (1 - 0.5 k2)
For s1 = 0.2 pu, k1 = 30%, s2 = 2.0 pu and k2 = 100%, then, 3. 4. for |L| = 2.0 pu, the relay would operate if |F| > 1.6 pu for |L| = 2.5 pu, the relay would operate if |F| > 2.6 pu
Fault resistance coverage: Assuming the fault resistance, RF, is much higher than the line impedance and source impedance, then for a 33kV system and 400/1 CT: |F| = ( Vph-n /RF ) * ( 1/CT ratio) pu = ((33000 / 3 ) / RF) / 400 pu
= 47.63/RF pu Based on the above analysis, the relay will detect a fault current in excess of 0.59 pu with a load current of 1 pu flowing. The fault resistance would have to be less than 47.63/0.59 = 81 in this case. With a short time overload current of 2.0 pu, the relay will be able to detect a fault resistance of 47.63/1.6 = 30 or lower. 2.1.5.3 Setting k1 less than 30% If desired, k1 can be set less than the recommended setting of 30%, down to a minimum of 0%, to increase relay sensitivity. However, if doing so the user should consult AREVA T&D concerning the CT requirements. This is because under certain conditions on systems with high X/R ratio and low fault currents there may be stability issues with a very low k1 setting. 2.1.6 Example settings
2.1.6.1 Differential element (Is1) All four settings are user adjustable. This flexibility in settings allows the relay characteristic to be tailored to suit a particular sensitivity and CT requirements. To simplify the protection engineers task, we strongly recommend three of the settings be fixed to: s2 k1 k2 = = = 2.0 pu 30% 150%
These settings will give a relay characteristic suitable for most applications. It leaves only the Is1 setting to be decided by the user. The value of this setting should be in excess of any mismatch between line ends although the CT ratio correction factor can be used to alleviate this problem. The effects of capacitive line charging current, if any, must also be considered when deciding the s1 setting. By considering the circuit shown in Figure 3, the settings for the current differential element can be established.
33kV
400/1
25km
400/1
33kV
P5xx
Digital communications link
P5xx
Steady state charging current = 2.5 A/km - cable = 0.1 A/km - overhead line
P1010ENa
Figure 3:
Typical plain feeder circuit
The following settings should be set as follows: s2 = 2.0 pu k1 = 30 % k2 = 150 % (for a two terminal application) This leaves the setting of s1 to be established. The Is1 setting for the P521 relay must be set above 2.5 times the steady state line charging current value. In this example, assume a cable is used: s1 > 2.5 x ch s1 > 2.5 x (25km x 2.5 A/km) s1 > 156.25 A The line CTs are rated at 400 amps primary. exceed 156.25/400 = 0.391 pu. Therefore select: s1 = 0.4 pu 2.1.6.2 CT ratio correction In cases where different CT ratios are used at each line end the relay can be set with a CT ratio correction factor CT Correct Ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT Ratio). Assuming the relay is applied to the system shown in Figure 4 and the maximum full load current was 375 Amps the relay can be set as follows. The setting of s1 must therefore
33kV
400/1
375A
350/1
33kV
0.94A Relay 1 Digital communications link
1.07A Relay 2
P2055ENa
Figure 4:
Plain feeder with unmatched CTs
It is good practice to correct the mismatched current to rated current to maintain good sensitivity for high resistance faults. In this example the current entering relay 1 must be scaled upwards, whereas the current entering relay 2 must be scaled down. To calculate the correction factor for relay 1: Current entering relay 1 = 375 / 400 = 0.938A To correct to rated current our correction factor must be 1/0.938 = 1.071 The same can be done for relay 2. To calculate the correction factor for relay 2: Current entering relay 1 = 375 / 350 = 1.071A To correct to rated current our correction factor must be 1/1.071 = 0.938 The differential spill current will now be reduced to practically zero instead of 0.133A (1.071-0.938) which was the current before the any correction. 2.1.7 Protection of transformer feeders In applying the well established principles of differential protection to transformers, a variety of considerations have to be taken into account. These include compensation for any phase shift across the transformer, possible unbalance of signals from current transformers either side of windings, and the effects of the variety of earthing and winding arrangements. In addition to these factors, which can be compensated for by correct application of the relay, the effects of normal system conditions on relay operation must also be considered. The differential element must restrain for system conditions which could result in maloperation of the relay, such as high levels of magnetizing current during inrush conditions. In traditional transformer feeder differential schemes, the requirements for phase and ratio compensation were met by correct selection of the line current transformers. The P521 (from software version 2.A) provides software interposing current transformers (ICTs) to give the required vector compensation. The advantage of having replica ICTs is that they give the P521 relays the flexibility to cater for line CTs connected in either star or delta, as well as being able to compensate for a variety of system earthing arrangements. A further consideration is the operation of differential protection for faults during transformer inrush conditions. An unrestrained differential High Set element is provided to ensure high speed operation under these conditions, as well as in the event of CT saturation, which produces second harmonics.
Ratio compensation, however, is provided by adjusting a software CT ratio correction factor (see section 2.1.6.2). 2.1.7.1 Transformer magnetizing inrush The magnetizing inrush current to a transformer appears as a large operating signal to the differential protection. Special measures are taken with the relay design to ensure that no maloperation occurs during inrush. Figure 5 shows a transformer magnetizing characteristic. To minimize material costs, weight and size, transformers are generally operated near to the knee point of the magnetizing characteristic. Consequently, only a small increase in core flux above normal operating levels will result in a high magnetizing current.
Flux, j 2jm
jm
Magnetizing current, Ie
P1006ENb
Figure 5:
Transformer magnetizing characteristic
Under normal steady state conditions, the magnetizing current associated with the operating flux level is relatively small (usually less than 1% of rated current). However, if a transformer winding is energized at a voltage zero, with no remnant flux, the flux level during the first voltage cycle (2 x normal max. flux) will result in core saturation and in a high, non-sinusoidal magnetizing current waveform. This current is commonly referred to as magnetizing inrush current and may persist for several cycles. The magnitude and duration of magnetizing inrush current waveforms are dependent upon a number of factors, such as transformer design, size, system fault level, point on wave of switching, number of banked transformers, etc. Figure 6 shows typical transformer magnetizing currents for steady state and inrush conditions. The magnetizing inrush current contains a high percentage of second harmonic. The MiCOM P521 relay filters out this component of the waveform and uses it as an additional bias quantity. The total bias used by the relay will therefore be a combination of the average load current on the line plus a multiple of the second harmonic component of the current. The multiplying factor is used to ensure stability
Inrush Restraint).
and is a factory pre-set value. To enable the inrush restraint facility the user must select Yes in the Inrush Restraint cell (PROTECTION G1 (G2)/[87] Current Diff/
V + jm
Ie
- jm
Steady state
Ie
j V Switch on at voltage zero
+2jm
P1007ENa
Figure 6:
Magnetizing inrush waveforms
2.1.7.2 Ratio correction To ensure correct operation of the differential element, it is important that under load and through fault conditions, the currents into the differential element of the relay balance. In many cases, the HV and LV current transformer primary ratings will not exactly match the transformer winding rated currents. Ratio correction factors are therefore provided to ensure that the signals to the differential algorithm are correct. section 2.1.6.2 explains how this feature can be applied to a plain feeder with different CT ratios at each end of the line. The same method can be used when applying the relay to a transformer feeder, although extra attention must be paid to transformers with tap changers. To minimize unbalance due to tap changer operation, current inputs to the differential element should be matched for the midtap position. Ideally, the compensated current values should be arranged to be as close as possible to relay rated current to provide optimum relay sensitivity. The corrected currents should not, however, be arranged to exceed relay rated current under through load conditions. 2.1.7.3 Phase correction and zero sequence current filtering To compensate for any phase shift between two windings of a transformer, it is necessary to provide phase correction. This was traditionally provided by the appropriate delta connection of main line CTs. Phase correction is provided in the P521 relay via software interposing CTs. The phase correction (vector compensation) settings available in the P521 relay (CONFIGURATION/CT Ratio/Vector Comp) are given in the following table:
Application Guide MiCOM P521 Setting Off Yy0 Yd1 0 30 lag Phase Shift None None
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 21/84 Action
Ia = (IA - IC) / 3 Ib = (IB - IA) / 3 Ic = (IC - IB) / 3 Ia = IA + IB Ib = IB + IC Ic = IC + IA Ia = (IB - IC) / 3 Ib = (IC - IA) / 3 Ic = (IA - IB) / 3 Ia = IB Ib = IC Ic = IA Yd11 and Invert Invert currents Yd1 and Invert Ia = IC Ib = IA Ic = IB Yd3 and Invert Ia = IA + IC Ib = IB + IA Ic = IC + IB Ia = (IA - IB) / 3 Ib = (IB - IC) / 3 Ic = (IC - IA) / 3 Ia = IA - (IA + IB + IC) / 3 Ib = IB - (IA + IB + IC) / 3 Ic = IC - (IA + IB + IC) / 3 Ydy0 and Invert
Yy2
60 lag
Yd3
90 lag
Yy4
120 lag
Yd5 Yy6 Yd7 Yy8
150 lag 180 lag 150 lead 120 lead
Yd9 Yy10
90 lead 60 lead
Yd11
30 lead
Ydy0
Ydy6 Table 3:
180 lag Vector compensation settings Note1:
Ia, Ib and Ic are the corrected currents and IA, IB and IC are the uncorrected phase currents. Any setting other than OFF will disable the remote current measurements and they will become invisible.
Note2:
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 22/84 Caution:
Application Guide MiCOM P521 Regrettably, the equations for Yy2 and Yy10 used within the P521 in version 2 firmware and as listed above in the Action column, are incorrect (they will perform correctly for balanced loads but not where unbalance exists). Hence the Yy2 and Yy10 settings should not be selected. Please refer to AREVA T&D if further setting advice is required.
In addition to compensating for the phase shift of the protected transformer, it is also necessary to mimic the distribution of primary zero sequence current in the protection scheme. Figure 7 shows the need for zero sequence current filtering for differential protection across a transformer. The power transformer delta winding acts as a trap to zero sequence current. This current is therefore only seen on the star connection side of the transformer and hence as differential current. The filtering of zero sequence current has traditionally been provided by appropriate delta connection of main line CT secondary windings. In the P521 relay, zero sequence current filtering is automatically implemented in software when a delta connection is set for a software interposing CT. Where a transformer winding can pass zero sequence current to an external earth fault, it is essential that some form of zero sequence current filtering is employed. This would also be applicable where in-zone earthing transformers are used.
I0 IR1 P521 Digital communication channel Relay 1 IR1 Received IR2 Idiff = = = 0 I0 I0 Received Relay 2 IR2 IR1 Idiff = = = I0 I0 I0
P1008ENb
I0
IR2 P521
Figure 7:
Need for zero-sequence current filtering
Some examples of selection of phase compensation factors are shown in table 4. Transformer Connection Dy1 Yd1 Dy5 Yd5 Dy7 Yd7 Dy11 Yd11 Table 4: 2.1.8 Transformer Phase Shift - 30o - 30o - 150o - 150o + 150 + 150 + 30o + 30o
o o
Vectorial Compensation (Relay setting) HV Yy0 (0 deg) Yd1 (-30 deg) Yy0 (0 deg) Yd5 (-150 deg) Yy0 (0 deg) Yd7 (+150 deg) Yy0 (0 deg) Yd11 (+30 deg) LV Yd11 (+30 deg) Yy0 (0 deg) Yd7 (+150 deg) Yy0 (0 deg) Yd5 (-150 deg) Yy0 (0 deg) Yd1 (-30 deg) Yy0 (0 deg)
Examples of selection of phase compensation factors
In zone teed loads Many rural feeders have small fuse protected loads tapped off the line within the zone of protection. In most cases the load is small enough to be ignored when setting the s1 threshold. The problem, however, is when a fault occurs downstream of the fuse. The current differential protection would assume the fault was on the feeder, instead of at the load, and may trip before the fuse has a chance to blow. This could cause considerable and unnecessary disruption to rest of the system. To prevent this from occurring the operating time of the current differential element can be time delayed to grade with the fuse. The time delay can be either definite time (DMT) or Inverse time (DMT), selectable in the Diff Delay Type cell under PROTECTION G1 (G2)/[87] Current Diff. If DMT is chosen the relay can be set with a definite time delay setting. If, however, DMT is chosen a curve and its associated TMS/Time dial can be selected to grade with the fuse. To reduce fault clearance times for heavy internal faults the DMT delay type is preferable as the operating time reduces for larger fault currents.
2.2
Overcurrent and earth fault protection The overcurrent and earth fault protection is provided as an alternative form of backup protection. The P521 relay has four stages overcurrent and four stages of earth fault. The first two stages have a selectable DMT or DMT characteristic. The third and fourth stages have a DMT characteristic only. The overcurrent and earth fault protection can be selectively enabled or disabled in the > ? cell (Yes = enabled, No = disabled). A feature also exists whereby the protection can be enabled upon failure of the differential protection communication channel (select backup in the > ? cell). The overcurrent protection stages are labeled >/t>, >>/t>>, >>>/t>>> and >>>>/t>>>>. The earth fault protection stages are labeled e>/te>, e>>/te>>, e>>>/te>>> and e>>>>/te>>>>. Figure 8 below shows the logic associated with the first stage phase overcurrent protection (>/t>). Figure 9 shows the logic for overcurrent stages two, three and four (logic is duplicated for each stage). The logic diagrams in Figure 8 and 9 are identical to the earth fault logic, which is why the earth fault logic is not shown.

INPUT Block t I>
[50/51] Phase OC I>? Yes No Backup I> threshold exceeded
&
>=1
&
tI> &
RELAY
I > TRIP
RELAY
I > START
Protection Comms Failed CB Fail Blocks > I Yes No CB Failed t CBF
&
&
BLOCK I> Start
I-Trip Commands I-Trip tl> Yes No

P2003ENb
&
Initiate DIT
Figure 8:
First stage phase overcurrent protection (>/t>) logic
[50/51] Phase OC I> ? > Yes No Backup I> > threshold exceeded RELAY I > START >
&
>=1
&
t I> > & t sel 1/2 t I> >
Protection Comms Failed INPUT BLOCK t I> >
&
INPUT
Select Logic 1/2 t I> >
&
>=1
RELAY
I > TRIP >
I-Trip Commands I-Trip tl>> Yes No

P2004ENb
&
Initiate DIT
Figure 9:
Logic for overcurrent stages two, three and four
Application Guide MiCOM P521 Note:
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 25/84 Both the overcurrent and earth fault protection operate from only the fundamental component of the line current.
The overcurrent and earth fault elements will need to be co-ordinated with any other protection elements on the system, in order to provide discriminative fault clearance. The overcurrent menu column is shown in table 5 below followed by the earth fault settings in table 6. [50/51] Phase OC > ? > > Delay Type t> > Curve > Tms > Time Dial K Reset Type tReset Rtms > ? >> >>> ? >>> t>>> >>>> ? >>>> t>>>> Table 5: Default Setting No 1n DMT 40ms EC S 1 1 0.1 DMT 40ms 0.025 No 1n No 20n 10ms No 20n 10ms Overcurrent protection settings Default Setting Yes 0.1en*, 0.01en**, 0.002en*** DMT 40ms EC S 1 0s 0.1en*, 0.01en**, 0.002en*** Min Max Yes, No, Backup 25en*, 1en**, 1en*** 150s 0.01en*, 0.005en**, 0.001*** 0.01s Step 0.5n 0s 0.5n 0s 0.5n 0s 0.1n Min Max Yes, No, Backup 25n DMT, DMT, R 150s 0.01s EC ST, EC S, EC V, EC E, EC LT, CO2, EEE M, CO8, EEE V, EEE E 0.025 0.1 0.1 DMT 40ms 0.025 1.5 100 10 DMT 100s 3.2 Yes, No, Backup 40n Yes, No, Backup 40n 150s Yes, No, Backup 40n 150s 0.05n 0.01s 0.05n 0.01s 0.05n 0.025 0.1 0.005 N/A 0.01s 0.025 0.01n Step
{Remaining >> cells are identical to > above}
[50N/51N] E/Gnd e> ? e> e> Delay Type te> e> Curve e> Tms
DMT, DMT, R, LABOR EC ST, EC S, EC V, EC E, EC LT, CO2, EEE M, CO8, EEE E; 1, 2, 3 0.025 1.5 0.025
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 26/84 [50N/51N] E/Gnd e> Time Dial K Reset Type tReset Rtms e>> ? e>> Default Setting 1 0.1 DMT 40ms 0.025 No 1n 0.5en*, 0.01en**, 0.002en*** Min 0.1 0.1 DMT 40ms 0.025 Max 100 10 DMT 100s 3.2
Application Guide MiCOM P521 Step 0.1 0.005 N/A 0.01s 0.025 0.01en*, 0.005en**, 0.001en***
Yes, No, Backup 40en*, 8en**, 1en*** Yes, No, Backup 0.5en*, 0.01en**, 0.002en*** 0s 0.5en*, 0.01en**, 0.002en*** 0s 40en*, 8en**, 1en*** 150s Yes, No, Backup 40en*, 8en**, 1en*** 150s 0.01en*, 0.005en**, 0.001en*** 0.01s 0.01en*, 0.005en**, 0.001en*** 0.01s
{Remaining e>> cells are identical to e> above} e>>> ? e>>> te>>> e>>>> ? e>>>> te>>>> Table 6: * No 1n 10ms No 20n 10ms Earth fault protection settings
- denotes the standard earth fault board (0.1 to 40en)
** - denotes the sensitive earth fault board (0.01 to 8en) *** - denotes the very sensitive earth fault board (0.002 to 1en) 2.2.1 Instantaneous (start) function (50/50N) As soon as a phase (earth) threshold is exceeded, the instantaneous (start) output associated with this threshold is active. This output indicates that the protection has detected a phase (earth) fault and that the time delay associated with the threshold has started. This time delay can be blocked via the logic input "Blk Log" associated with this threshold. If this blocking input is activated by an output contact of a downstream relay, operation is blocked so that the relay closest to the fault can trip. This principle is known as Blocking logic or merely Blocking. It is described in more detail later in this document. 2.2.2 Definite time operation (DMT) The four phase (earth) overcurrent thresholds can be selected with a definite time delay. The operating time is equal to the set time delay, plus the operating time of the output contact (typically 20 to 30ms; 20ms for a current greater than or equal to twice the threshold) and the time required to detect the overcurrent state (maximum 20ms at 50Hz and 16.7ms at 60Hz).
Application Guide MiCOM P521 2.2.3 DMT thresholds
2.2.3.1 Inverse time curves The first and second phase (earth) overcurrent thresholds can be selected with an inverse time characteristic (DMT). There are eleven DMT characteristics in total. The operating time for all but the RI curve can be calculated with the following equation. The sensitive earth fault protection (0.01 to 8Ien) has 3 additional LABORELEC curves. These are explained in section 2.2.4. K + L t=Tx (/s) - 1 Where: t K S L = Operating time (seconds) = Constant (see table 7) = Value of measured current = Value of the selected threshold (Pick-up value) = Constant (see table 7) = ANSI/IEEE coefficient (zero for EC curves)
T = Time multiplier setting (Tms) for EC curves or Time Dial for EEE/CO2/CO8 curves. Type of Curve EC STI (Short Time Inverse) EC SI (Standard Inverse) EC VI (Very Inverse) EC EI (Extremely Inverse) UK LTI (Long Time Inverse) CO2 (Short Time Inverse) EEE MI (Moderately Inverse) CO8 (Inverse) EEE VI (Very Inverse) EEE EI (Extremely Inverse) Table 7: Standard EC EC EC EC UK CO2 ANSI/EEE CO8 ANSI/EEE ANSI/EEE K Factor 0.05 0.14 13.5 80 120 0.02394 0.0515 5.95 19.61 28.2 Factor 0.04 0.02 1 2 1 0.02 0.02 2 2 2 L Factor 0 0 0 0 0 0.01694 0.114 0.18 0.491 0.1215
DMT characteristic coefficients
The operating time for the RI curve (electromechanical) is given by the following formula: 1 t=Kx 0.339 - 0.236 /(/s) With K adjustable from 0.10 to 10 in steps of 0.05 This equation is valid for 1.1<= (I/Is) <= 20
Although the curves tend towards infinity, as the current approaches Is, the minimum guaranteed current, for all inverse time characteristics, is 1.1s (with a tolerance of 0.05s). If DMT (definite time characteristic) is chosen the minimum operating current is equal to the selected threshold, which also has a tolerance of 0.05s. 2.2.4 Laborelec curves The first and second earth thresholds (sensitive version only) can be selected with one of three dedicated Laborelec curves. The three Laborelec curves have the following formula: t = a + b Where: t = Operating time (seconds) a and b = Constants (see table 8) I = Primary residual current Type of Curve LABORELEC 1 LABORELEC 2 LABORELEC 3 Table 8: a 0.0897 0.0897 0.0897 b 4.0897 4.5897 5.0897
Laborelec curve coefficients
In order to be compliant with the Laborelec specifications the relay must be used with: An earth current range of 0.01 en to 8 en A rated current of 1A A core balanced CT with a ratio of 20/1.
For a complete operating curve, the relay must be set to 0.05en (secondary residual current). 2.2.5 Reset timer The first and second phase and earth overcurrent stages in the P521 relay are provided with a timer hold facility "t Reset", which may be set to a definite time value or to an inverse time characteristic (IEEE/ANSI curves only). This may be useful in certain applications when the current differential protection has failed. For example, when grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays which have inherent reset time delays. Another possible situation where the timer hold facility may be used to reduce fault clearance times is where intermittent faults occur when the current differential protection has failed. An example of this may occur in a plastic insulated cable. In this application it is possible that the fault energy melts and reseals the cable insulation, thereby extinguishing the fault. This process repeats to give a succession of fault current pulses, each of increasing duration with reducing intervals between the pulses, until the fault becomes permanent. If the reset timer had been set to minimum the relay would repeatedly reset and not be able to trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the Timer Hold facility the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time.
If the first and second phase (earth) threshold is selected with an DMT IEC or RI curve, the reset timer "t Reset" has a definite time characteristic, settable between 40ms and 100s in steps of 10ms. The reset time tReset can be found in the following locations: PROTECTION G1 (G2)/[50/51] Phase OC /t Reset and PROTECTION G1 (G2)/[50N/51N] E/Gnd /t Reset If the first phase (earth) threshold is selected with an DMT IEEE or CO curve, the reset timer can be set either DMT or DMT in the Reset Type cell. If DMT is chosen the reset time becomes definite time with the time set in the "t Reset" cell. If DMT is chosen the reset time is based upon an inverse curve which is current dependent. A time multiplier Rtms can also be applied to this curve so that it can be tailored to the application. The reset function menu cells are located as follows: PROTECTION G1 (G2)/[50/51] Phase OC /Reset Type PROTECTION G1 (G2)/[50/51] Phase OC /t Reset (if Reset Type = DMT) PROTECTION G1 (G2)/[50/51] Phase OC /Rtms (if Reset Type = DMT) and PROTECTION G1 (G2)/[50N/51N] E/Gnd /Reset Type PROTECTION G1 (G2)/[50N/51N] Phase OC /t Reset (if Reset Type = DMT) PROTECTION G1 (G2)/[50N/51N] Phase OC /Rtms (if Reset Type = DMT)
The DMT reset time is dependent upon the chosen operating time curve and the selected Rtms value. The DMT reset time formula, applicable to the 5 CO/ANSI/IEEE curves, is as follows: t=Tx Where: t = Reset time K S T = Constant (see table 9) = Value of the measured current = Value of the selected threshold (pick-up value) = Reset Time Multiplier (Rtms) between 0.025 and 3.2 Standard CO2 ANSI/IEEE CO8 ANSI/IEEE ANSI/IEEE K Factor 2.261 4.85 5.95 21.6 29.1 K 2 1 - (/s)
Type of Curves CO2 (Short time inverse) IEEE MI (Moderately inverse) CO8 (Inverse) IEEE VI (Very inverse) IEEE EI (Extremely inverse) Table 9: Reset curve coefficients
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 30/84 2.2.6 Time graded protection
Inverse definite minimum time relays are time graded such that the relay nearer to the fault operates faster than the upstream relays. This is referred to as relay coordination because if the relay nearest to the fault fails operate, the upstream relay will trip in a slightly longer time. The time grading steps are typically 400ms, thus the operating time for each upstream relay becomes progressively longer. Where difficulty is experienced in arranging the required time grading steps the use of a blocked overcurrent scheme should be considered (described in a later section). 2.3 Thermal overload protection Thermal overload protection can be used to prevent electrical plant from operating at temperatures in excess of the designed maximum withstand. Prolonged overloading causes excessive heating, which may result in premature deterioration of the insulation, or in extreme cases, insulation failure. The MiCOM P521 incorporates a current based thermal replica, using the RMS load current to model the heating and cooling of the protected plant. The element can be set with both alarm and trip stages. The heat generated within an item of plant, such as a cable or a transformer, is created by the resistive loss (2R x t). Thus, heating is directly proportional to current squared. The thermal time characteristic used in the relay is therefore based on current squared, integrated over time. MiCOM relays automatically use the largest phase current for input to the thermal model. Equipment is designed to operate continuously at a temperature corresponding to its full load rating, where heat generated is balanced with heat dissipated by radiation etc. Over-temperature conditions therefore occur when currents in excess of rating are allowed to flow for a period of time. It can be shown that temperatures during heating follow exponential time constants and a similar exponential decrease of temperature occurs during cooling. In order to apply this protection element, the thermal time constant for the protected item of plant is therefore required. The settings associated with the thermal menu are shown in table 10. These settings can found under PROTECTION G1 (G2)/[49] Therm OL. [49] Thermal OL Therm OL ? > Te K Trip Alarm ? Alarm Table 10: Default Setting No 1n 1 mn 1.05 100% No 90% Thermal overload settings 50% 0.1n 1 mn 1 50% Min Max Yes, No 3.2n 200 mn 1.5 200% Yes, No 200% 1% 0.01n 1 mn 0.01 1% Step
The following sections will show that different items of plant possess different thermal characteristics, due to the nature of their construction.
Application Guide MiCOM P521 2.3.1 Thermal overload characteristic
This characteristic is used to protect cables, dry type transformers (e.g. type AN), and capacitor banks. When protecting these devices, the trip time varies depending on the load current carried before application of the overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from hot or cold. Curves of the thermal overload time characteristic are given in the Technical Data and Curve Characteristics (P521/EN TD) section of the service manual. The operating time of the thermal element is given by:
K2 - p/ > Ttrip = Te. loge 2 K - Trip2

With: Ttrip = Time to trip (in seconds). Te K eq k p
)
2
= Thermal time constant of the protected element (in seconds). = Thermal overload equal to eq/k >. = Equivalent current, corresponds to the RMS value of the largest phase current. = Overload factor by which the > setting must be multiplied to determine the trip threshold. = Steady state pre-loading before application of the overload.
> = Thermal current setting.
Trip = Trip thermal state. If the trip thermal state is set at 100%, then Trip = 1 The calculation of the thermal state is given by the following formula: +1 = ( eq/ I >)2 [1- exp(-t/Te)] + exp(-t/Te) being calculated every 100ms 2.3.2 Setting guidelines The thermal trip level in terms of current can be determined as follows: Thermal trip = Note: Trip x K2 x 1> 100
The Trip setting must be entered as a percentage i.e. 90 for 90%.
There are two methods of setting the > and k settings in the P521. The selected method may depend upon company standards or personal preference. This also assumes that the Trip value is set to 100%. The first method assumes that the > setting is set to the maximum current that the plant can withstand before it becomes damaged. This is normally greater than the permissible continuous load current. In this case the plant can not tolerate any further loading, which means the overload factor k should be set to 1. Hence the thermal trip level, in amps, will be equal to >. If, however, the > setting was set equal to the permissible continuous load current, an overload factor k may be applied, since it is likely that the plant has been designed to tolerate a current in excess of this amount. For example, if a line has a permissible continuous load current of 762A (> setting), but the line can actually
tolerate 800A, the k factor can set to 1.05 (800A/762A). Hence the thermal trip level, in amps, will be k x >. The thermal trip threshold can also be modified by the Trip setting if necessary. This sets the thermal threshold in terms of the thermal state (i.e. a percentage). If the Trip threshold is set to 100% the relay will operate a thermal state of K2 x 100%. For example, if the relay is has a K factor of 1.05 and Trip threshold of 100% the relay will trip at a thermal state of 110% (1.052 x 100%). The relay also has a thermal alarm that can be used to indicate that the trip threshold has almost been exceeded. The alarm is also set in terms of the thermal state, as with the Trip setting. It is common to set the alarm lower than the trip threshold (say 90%) in order to give a warning of an impending overload. Much like the Trip setting the alarm threshold is also modified by the K factor. Hence the actual alarm message will occur at K2 x alarm setting. The thermal state can be viewed in MEASUREMENTS/Current/General/Thermal . If necessary the thermal state can be manually reset by pressing the (C) key when in this cell. The thermal state can also be reset by energizing an opto input that has been assigned to the Reset command (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs/Input #). Note: The thermal state is stored in none-volatile memory (battery backed memory). In the event of a DC supply interruption the thermal state, prior to the interruption, will be recovered once the DC has been restored.
As mentioned earlier, to accurately model thermal characteristics of a piece of plant, it is necessary to set a thermal time constant. The manufacturer of the plant should be able to supply this information but some typical time constants are given in the following tables. Paper insulated lead sheathed cables or polyethylene insulated cables, placed above ground or in conduits. The table shows the time constant in minutes, for different cable rated voltages and conductor cross-sectional areas: CSA mm2 25 - 50 70 - 120 150 185 240 300 6 -11 kV 10 15 25 25 40 40 22 kV 15 25 40 40 40 60 33 kV 40 40 40 60 60 60 66 kV 60 60 60 60 90
Time Constant Te (Minutes)
Application Guide MiCOM P521 Other plant items: Time Constant (Minutes) Dry-type transformers Air-core reactors Capacitor banks Overhead lines Busbars 2.4 40 60 90 40 10 10 60
Limits Rating < 400 kVA Rating 400 - 800 kVA
Cross section 100 mm2 Cu or 150mm2 Al
Circuit breaker failure protection (CBF) Following inception of a fault one or more main protection devices will operate and issue a trip output to the circuit breaker(s) associated with the faulted circuit. Operation of the circuit breaker is essential to isolate the fault, and prevent damage/further damage to the power system. For transmission/sub-transmission systems, slow fault clearance can also threaten system stability. It is therefore common practice to install circuit breaker failure protection, which monitors that the circuit breaker has opened within a reasonable time. If the fault current has not been interrupted following a set time delay from circuit breaker trip initiation, breaker failure protection (CBF) will operate. CBF operation can be used to backtrip upstream circuit breakers to ensure that the fault is isolated correctly. CBF operation can also reset all start output contacts, ensuring that any blocks asserted on upstream protection are removed. The settings associated with the circuit breaker fail protection is shown in table 11 below. They can be found in AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Fail. CB Fail CB Fail ? < CB Fail Time tBF Block > ? Block e> ? Table 11: Default Setting No 0.1 n 100 ms No No Circuit breaker fail settings 0.02 n 30 ms Min Max Yes, No 1 n 10 s Yes, No Yes, No 0.01 n 0.01 s Step
2.4.1
Circuit breaker failure protection operation When a trip order is given through the output relay RL1, the t BF timer is started. Note, the trip order can be issued either from a protection element, or a logic input. In order to initiate the tBF timer by a logic input the Start tBF command must be assigned to that input (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs/Input #). The MiCOM relay then monitors the currents in each phase and compares them with the zone defined by the undercurrent < threshold (not to be confused with the [37] under current protection function). This threshold value is settable within the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Fail menu.
Following the start of the t BF timer, the relay detects the first time that current goes out of the < zone. On detection of this transition, the relay starts another timer which has a non-settable duration of 20 samples. Since the relay sampling rate is 32 samples by cycle, this timer duration is 12.5 ms for a 50 Hz system and 10.4 ms for a 60 Hz system. During this time, the relay is checking if the current goes out of the < zone again. In the case where the current is not switched off (CB has failed to trip), the current signal should again go out of the < zone at a time equal to 16 samples after the former detection (i.e. half a cycle). Each time the relay detects the current going out of the < zone, the relay once again starts a timer which has a duration of 20 samples and it checks if the current goes out of the < zone once again. In the window of 20 samples, the relay checks that the current signal going out of the < zone is in the opposite direction. If there is no current signal going out in the opposite direction within the 20 sample duration, the relay states that the CB pole has opened. The CB pole open internal signal is then initiated. If there is a current signal going out in opposite direction within the 20 sample duration the relay states that the CB pole has not yet opened. The CB pole closed internal signal is maintained.
Once the t BF time delay has elapsed, the relay checks the status of the CB pole internal signal for each pole of the circuit breaker. If one or more internal signals indicate that their CB poles have not yet opened, the relay initiates the CB FAIL signal. The CB fail signal can be arranged to remove the start signals of the > and e> elements, in order to remove blocking signals from any upstream protection. Alternatively, the CB fail signal can operate a selectable contact (AUTOMAT. CTRL/ Output relays/ CB Fail). This contact can be used to backtrip upstream switchgear, generally tripping all infeeds connected to the same busbar section. To remove the > and e> start signals once the breaker fail timer has elapsed the following cells must be set to Yes:
AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Fail/Block > ?

and
AUTOMAT. CTRL /CB Fail/Block e> ?
As mentioned earlier the CB fail timer can be started by an external input that can be connected to external protection equipment. Note the option to start the CB fail detection function by a digital input (labeled Strt TBF) without a trip order given by the MiCOM relay. In this case the tBF timer starts from the digital input. If the CB is not opened (by an another protection relay) at the end of tBF, the MiCOM relay outputs the CB FAIL signal. It is possible to automatically send a direct intertrip command to the remote relay whenever a CB fail condition occurs. This is enabled by selecting Yes in the I-Trip CB Fail cell (AUTOMAT. CTRL/I-Trip Commands).
Figure 10 shows a CB Fail detection start following a trip command:

Trip command t BF timer 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples
I< threshold
I< threshold
20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples 20 samples
P0033ENa
Figure 10: CB fail detection principle The Figure 11 shows a normal CB operation before tBF expires. No CB fail signal is given.
CB pole opened detection
CB pole closed internal signal Trip command t BF timer

20samples 20samples 20samples
I<threshold
I<threshold
20samples
20samples
20samples
20 samples
P0034Ena
Figure 11: CB open before TBF expired Figure 12 below shows a CB failure condition. At the drop off of the t BF timer, the relay has not detected an opening of the CB pole, hence a CB FAIL signal is initiated.

CB failed CB FAIL signal CB pole closed internal signal Trip Command
20 samples
t BF timer
20 samples 20 samples 20 samples
20 samples
I<threshold I<threshold
20 samples
20samples
20 samples
20 samples
20 samples
P0035Ena
Figure 12: CB not yet open before TBF expired The Figure 13 shows another case of normal CB operation. On fault clearance, the removal of the phase current signal takes time, often due to the de-energization of the phase CT. This is a typical case for TPY class CTs which are built with an air gap in their magnetic core. Before the drop off of the t BF timer, the relay has detected an opening of the CB pole, thus no CB failure signal is given. A basic Breaker Failure element based on a simple undercurrent element would detect a false CB failure condition as the current signal value is still outside the < zone after the t BF timer has elapsed. Note: Both CB pole closed and CB pole opened internal signals mentioned in the above diagrams are derived from the Circuit Breaker Failure function algorithm. They are not affected by the status of the relay opto-inputs wired to the 52a and 52b CB auxiliary contacts.
CB pole opened detection
CB pole closed internal signal Trip command t BF timer

20samples 20samples 20 samples 20samples
I<threshold I<threshold
20samples
20samples
20samples
20samples
20samples
P0036ENa
Figure 13: De-energization of the phase CT
Application Guide MiCOM P521 2.4.2 Breaker fail timer settings
A typical timer setting used with a 2 cycle circuit breaker is around 150ms. 2.4.3 Breaker fail undercurrent settings The phase undercurrent settings (<) must be set to less than load current, to ensure that < operation indicates that the circuit breaker pole is open. A typical setting for overhead lines or cable circuits is 20% n. 2.4.4 CBF fail logic Figure 14 shows the logic associated with circuit breaker failure protection.
CB Fail Undercurrent Elements
Ia<
Ib<
>=1
&
CB Failed
RELAY
CB Fail
Ic<
RL1 Energized INPUT CB Fail Block I>? Yes No CB Fail Block Ie>? Yes No I-Trip Commands I-Trip CB Fail Yes No Start tBF
>=1
tBF
&
Block I> Start
&
Block Ie> Start
&
Initiate DIT
P2005ENb
Figure 14: Circuit breaker failure protection logic 2.5 Broken conductor detection The majority of faults on a power system occur between one phase and ground or two phases and ground. These are known as shunt faults and arise from lightning discharges and other overvoltages which initiate flashovers. Alternatively, they may arise from other causes such as birds on overhead lines or mechanical damage to cables etc. Such faults result in an appreciable increase in current and in the majority of applications are easily detectable.
Another type of unbalanced fault, which can occur on the system, is the series or open circuit fault. These can arise from broken conductors, maloperation of single phase switchgear, or the operation of fuses. Series faults will not cause an increase in phase current on the system and hence are not readily detectable by standard overcurrent relays. However, they will produce an unbalance and a resultant level of negative phase sequence current, which can be detected. It is possible to apply a negative phase sequence overcurrent relay to detect the above condition. However, on a lightly loaded line, the negative sequence current resulting from a series fault condition may be very close to, or less than, the full load steady state unbalance arising from CT errors, load unbalance etc. A negative sequence element therefore would not operate at low load levels. The MiCOM P521 relay incorporates an element which measures the ratio of negative to positive phase sequence current (2/1). This will be affected to a lesser extent than the measurement of negative sequence current alone, since the ratio is approximately constant with variations in load current. Hence, a more sensitive setting may be achieved. The settings associated with the broken conductor detection is shown in table 12 below. Broken Conductor Brkn. Cond ? tBC Ratio 2/1 Table 12: 2.5.1 Default Setting No 1s 20% 1s 20% Min Max Yes, No 14400 s 100% 1s 1% Step
Broken conductor detection settings
Setting guidelines In the case of a single point earthed power system, there will be little zero sequence current flow and the ratio of 2/1 that flows in the protected circuit will approach 100%. In the case of a multiple earthed power system (assuming equal impedances in each sequence network), the ratio 2/1 will be 50%. It is possible to calculate the ratio of 2/1 that will occur for varying system impedances, by referring to the following equations: 1F = Z Z + Z Z + Z Z 1 2 1 0 2 0 Eg (Z2 + Z0)
-Eg Z0 2F = Z Z + Z Z + Z Z 1 2 1 0 2 0 Where: Eg = System Voltage
Z0 = Zero sequence impedance Z1 = Positive sequence impedance Z2 = Negative sequence impedance
Application Guide MiCOM P521 Therefore: 2F 1F = Z0 Z0 + Z 2
It follows that, for an open circuit in a particular part of the system, 2/1 can be determined from the ratio of zero sequence to negative sequence impedance. It must be noted however, that this ratio may vary depending upon the fault location. It is desirable therefore to apply as sensitive a setting as possible. In practice, this minimum setting is governed by the levels of standing negative phase sequence current present on the system. This can be determined from a system study, or by making use of the relay measurement facilities at the commissioning stage. If the latter method is adopted, it is important to take the measurements during maximum system load conditions, to ensure that all single phase loads are accounted for. Since sensitive settings are employed, it can be expected that the element will operate for any unbalance condition occurring on the system (for example, during a single pole auto-reclose cycle). Therefore, a long time delay is necessary to ensure coordination with other protective devices. A 60 second time delay setting may be typical. 2.5.2 Example setting The following information was recorded by the relay during commissioning; full load 2 = 500A = 50A
Therefore the quiescent 2/1 ratio is given by: 2/1 = 50/500 = 0.1
To allow for tolerances and load variations a setting of 200% of this value may be typical: Therefore set RATIO 2/1 = 20% Set tBC = 60 s to allow adequate time for short circuit fault clearance by time delayed protections. 2.6 2.6.1 Intertripping facilities Permissive intertrip The P521 relay includes a facility to send a permissive intertrip command over the protection communication channel, as shown in Figure 15.
P5xx
P5xx
Data message
P1021ENa
Figure 15: Permissive intertrip An opto input can be assigned for this purpose (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs/Input When the associated opto input is energized at END B, the PT #/ Permis T). flag is set in the communication message. Upon receipt of this message the relay at END A initiates the PT timer which times out and trips the circuit breaker, providing that the END B current remains above the END A s1 threshold. The END A relay provides the PERMISSIVE electrical system alarm indicating a permissive intertrip has occurred. The permissive intertrip timer PT Time is settable between 50ms and 2 s. This time should be set to provide discrimination with other protection. For example, in Figure 15, the time delay should be set to allow the busbar protection to clear the fault in the event of a genuine busbar fault. A typical setting may be 100 - 150ms. In some circumstances it may be desirable to disable the current check from the PT function. This would give the user a second multipurpose intertrip/signaling channel if required. Disabling the current check facility makes the PT function operate much the same as the Direct Intertrip command. The current check can be disabled by selecting Yes in the PT Disable menu cell. The PT function menu cells are located as follows: 2.6.2
PROTECTION G1 (G2)/[87] Current Diff /PT Time PROTECTION G1 (G2)/[87] Current Diff /PT Disable
Direct intertrip This is an example of user defined intertripping. The P521 relay includes a facility to send a direct intertrip command over the protection communication channel as shown in Figure 16.
Transformer protection Data message Opto

P1022ENa
DDT = 1
Figure 16: Direct intertrip An opto input can be assigned for this purpose. When energized, the DIT flag is set in the communication message. Upon receipt of this message the remote relay will operate a user specified output contact for a time not less than the value in the DIT Rx tDwell cell (PROTECTION G1 (G2)/[87] Current Diff). The remote relay will also provide indication of the direct intertrip by displaying the DIRECT I-TRIP system alarm. 2.6.3 Selective intertripping In certain applications it may be desirable to send a direct intertrip (DIT) command when a protection function, other than current differential, operates (e.g. phase overcurrent protection). Traditionally this would require an output contact, associated with the desired protection element, to be wired to the DIT opto input, thereby using up valuable I/O. The P521 however allows the user to initiate a DIT command internally by use of the I-Trip Commands menu (AUTOMAT. CTRL). By selecting a given function, or more than one function, the relay will initiate a DIT command when that function operates. The list of available functions, which can be selected, is shown below: I-Trip Commands I-Trip tI> I-Trip tI>> I-Trip tI>>> I-Trip tI>>>> I-Trip tIe> I-Trip tIe>> I-Trip tIe>>> I-Trip tIe>>>> I-Trip tI< I-Trip tI2> I-Trip tI2>> I-Trip Thermal Default Setting No No No No No No No No No No No No Settings Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 42/84 I-Trip Commands I-Trip Brkn. Cond I-Trip tAux1 I-Trip tAux2 I-Trip CB Fail Table 13: 2.7 I-Trip command menu Default Setting No No No No
Application Guide MiCOM P521 Settings Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No
Negative sequence overcurrent protection When applying traditional phase overcurrent protection, the overcurrent elements must be set higher than maximum load current, thereby limiting the elements sensitivity. Most protection schemes also use an earth fault element operating from residual current, which improves sensitivity for earth faults. However, certain faults may arise which can remain undetected by such schemes. Any unbalanced fault condition will produce negative sequence current of some magnitude. Thus, a negative phase sequence overcurrent element can operate for both phase-to-phase and phase to earth faults. This section describes how negative phase sequence overcurrent protection may be applied in conjunction with standard overcurrent and earth fault protection in order to alleviate some less common application difficulties. Negative phase sequence overcurrent elements give greater sensitivity to resistive phase-to-phase faults, where phase overcurrent elements may not operate. In certain applications, residual current may not be detected by an earth fault relay due to the system configuration. For example, an earth fault relay applied on the delta side of a delta-star transformer is unable to detect earth faults on the star side. However, negative sequence current will be present on both sides of the transformer for any fault condition, irrespective of the transformer configuration. Therefore, a negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be employed to provide time-delayed back-up protection for any un-cleared asymmetrical faults. Where rotating machines are protected by fuses, a blown fuse produces a large amount of negative sequence current. This is a dangerous condition for the machine due to the heating effects of negative phase sequence current at double frequency. A negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be applied to provide efficient back-up protection for dedicated motor protection relays. It may also be required to simply alarm for the presence of negative phase sequence currents on the system. Operators are then prompted to investigate the cause of the unbalance.
The negative phase sequence overcurrent element has a current pick up setting 2>, and is time delayed in operation by the adjustable timer t2> Delay Time. 2.7.1 2> and 2>> setting guidelines The current pick-up threshold (PROTECTION G1 (G2)/[46] Neg Seq OC menu) must be set higher than the normal negative phase sequence current due to the normal load unbalance on the system. This can be set at the commissioning stage, making use of the relay measurement function to display the standing negative phase sequence current, and apply a setting at least 20% above this figure.
Where the negative phase sequence element is required to operate for specific uncleared asymmetric faults, a precise threshold setting has to be based on an individual fault analysis for that particular system due to the complexities involved. However, to ensure operation of the protection, the current pick-up setting must be set approximately 20% below the lowest calculated negative phase sequence fault current for a specific remote fault condition. The correct setting of the time delay for this function is vital. It should also be noted that this element is applied primarily to provide back-up protection to other protective devices or to provide an alarm. Therefore, it would be associated with a long time delay. It must be ensured that the time delay is set greater than the operating time of any other protective device (at minimum fault level) on the system which may respond to unbalanced faults, such as: Phase overcurrent elements Earth fault elements Broken conductor elements Negative phase sequence influenced thermal elements
The 2> element can be set to either DMT, IDMT, RI inverse or definite time delay in the 2> Delay Type cell. The 2>> threshold is definite time only. The 2 settings are located in the PROTECTION G1 (G2)/[46] Neg Seq OC menu. The time multiplier setting, time dial, curve selection and reset time, associated with the 2> threshold, are set in much the same way as the [50] phase overcurrent menu. The settings associated with the negative sequence overcurrent protection are shown in table 14 below: [46] Neg Seq OC 2> ? 2> 2> Delay Type t2> 2> Curve 2> Tms 2> Time Dial K Reset Type tReset Rtms 2>> ? 2>> t2>> Table 14: Default Setting No 1n DMT 0ms IEC S 1 0.1 0.1 DMT 40ms 0.025 No 1n 0ms 0.1n 0s 0s 0.1n Min Max Yes, No 40n DMT, IDMT, RI 150s 0.01s IEC STI, IEC SI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI 0.025 0.1 0.1 DMT 40ms 0.025 1.5 100 10 IDMT 100s 3.2 Yes, No 40n 150s 0.01n 0.01s 0.025 0.1 0.005 N/A 0.01s 0.025 0.01n Step
Negative sequence overcurrent settings
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 44/84 2.8 Undercurrent protection function
The MiCOM P521 relay includes 2 undercurrent elements, one of which is dedicated to the CB fail detection (see CB failure protection section). Another undercurrent element is provided as a protection function to detect loss of load conditions.
Protection Undercurrent Elements
I a<
I b<
>=1
&
RELAY
I < TRIP
I c<
INPUT
52a
P2002ENb
Figure 17: Undercurrent protection logic The undercurrent protection function is available only if the 52a auxiliary contact, indicating the CB status, is connected to one of the 5 logic inputs in the relay. The chosen logic input should be energized via the 52a contact of the circuit breaker. To allocate a logic input to the 52a auxiliary contact, 52a must be selected in the following location:
AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs/Input #/ 52a
An < alarm is given when at least one of the 3 phase current falls below the < threshold and the CB is closed (indicated by the 52a input). When the alarm condition has been present for longer than the set time t<, one or more output relays can be energized. See the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Trip Commands/ Trip t< menu for the allocation of t< to the trip output relay RL1. See the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Output Relays/ t< menu for the allocation of t< to the auxiliary output relays RL2 to RL8. Table 15 below shows the undercurrent protection settings: [37] Under Current < ? < t< Table 15: Default Setting No 0.2n 0ms Undercurrent protection settings 0.02n 0s Min Max Yes, No 1n 150s 0.01n 0.01s Step
Application Guide MiCOM P521 2.9 Blocked overcurrent protection
This type of protection is applicable for radial feeder circuits where there is a little or no back feed. However for parallel feeders, ring circuits or where there can be a back feed from generators blocked overcurrent protection should not be used. In the case of the P521, blocked overcurrent protection is more likely to be used for back-up purposes only. Figure 18 shows a typical arrangement for blocked overcurrent protection. This application relies on the up-stream IDMT relay being blocked by the start output from a down-stream relay that detects the presence of fault current above its setting. Both the up-stream and down-stream relays can then have the same current and time settings with grading being provided by the blocking feature. If the breaker failure protection is active, the block on the up-stream relay will be released if the downstream circuit breaker fails to trip (see Circuit breaker failure section). For a fault below relay C, the start contact from relay C will block operation of relay B. Furthermore, the start contact of relay B will block operation of relay A. Hence all 3 relays could have the same time and current settings, with the grading being obtained by the blocking signal received from a relay closer to the fault. This gives a constant, close time grading, but there will be no back-up protection in the event of the pilots being short circuited. It is important to note that there is a small window where operation may not occur with this arrangement. This occurs because the start relay picks-up at the current setting (>), but the DMT curve requires the current to be 1.05 > before it operates. Hence the up-stream relay should have a slightly lower current setting than the downstream relay to prevent this situation arising. However, the up-stream relay may have an increased current flowing through it due to the load current for other feeders and this may provide a solution.
C
P1251ENa
Figure 18: Blocked overcurrent scheme The blocking functions can be allocated in the "Blocking Logic 1 or 2" functions in the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. For more information on blocking functions refer to the blocking functions section.
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 46/84 2.10 Selective scheme logic
The blocked overcurrent protection section describes the use of non-cascade protection schemes which use the start contacts from downstream relays to block operation of upstream relays. In the case of Selective Overcurrent Logic (SOL), the start contacts are used to temporarily increase the time delays of upstream relays, instead of blocking them. This provides an alternative approach to achieving a noncascade type of overcurrent scheme. It may be more familiar to some utilities than the blocked overcurrent arrangement.
C
P1251ENa
Figure 19: Typical scheme logic The SOL function temporarily changes the time delay settings of the second, third and fourth stages of phase overcurrent and earth fault elements (>>, >>>, >>>>, e>>, e>>> and e>>>>) to the tSel1 or tSel2 timer settings. The choice of timers will depend upon which selective logic function is enabled, either Log Sel1 or Log Sel 2. The Log Sel1 or Log Sel2 functions are enabled by selecting, then energizing, one of the 5 opto inputs (AUTOMAT.CTRL/Inputs/Input #). The Logic Select 1 settings (AUTOMAT. CTRL) are shown in the table 16 below. These settings are identical to the Logic Select 2 menu. Logic Select. 1 (2) Sel1 t>> Sel1 t>>> Sel1 t>>>> Sel1 te>> Sel1 te>>> Sel1 te>>>> tsel1 Table 16: Default Setting No No No No No No 0ms Selective logic settings Choosing Yes selects the function to modified by the Logic Select function. 0s Min Max Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No 150s 0.01s Step
Note:
To allow time for a start contact to initiate a change of setting, the time settings of the second, third and fourth stages should include a nominal delay. Guidelines for minimum time settings are identical to those given for blocked overcurrent schemes. 2.11 Cold load pick-up The cold load pickup feature enables the selected settings of the MiCOM P521 relay to be changed to cater for temporary overload conditions that may occur during cold starts, such as switching on large heating loads after a sufficient cooling period, or loads that draw high initial starting currents. When a feeder is energized, the current levels for a period of time following energization may differ greatly from the normal load levels. Although this will not affect the current differential protection, the back-up overcurrent settings that have been applied may not be suitable during this period. The Cold Load Pick-Up (CLP) logic serves to raise the settings of selected stages for a selectable duration. This allows the protection settings to be set closer to the load profile by automatically increasing them after energization. The CLP logic provides stability, without compromising protection performance during starting. Note that any of the disabled overcurrent stages in the main relay menu will not appear in the Cold Load PU Menu. Table 17 below shows the relay menu for the Cold Load Pick-up logic, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults. Cold Load PU Cold Load PU ? t>? t>>? t>>>? t>>>>? te>? te>>? te>>>? te>>>> t2>? t2>>? tTherm? Level tCL Table 17: Default Setting No No No No No No No No No No No No 50% 1s Cold load pick-up settings 20% 0.1s Min Max Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No 500% 3600s 1% 0.1s Step
The tCL timer controls the time for which the relevant overcurrent and earth fault settings are altered following an external input (e.g. circuit breaker closure). When the set tCL time has elapsed, all of the relevant settings revert back to their original values. The tCL timer is initiated via a dedicated logic input (refer to AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs/Input #/ Cold L PU) signal generated by connecting an auxiliary contact from the circuit breaker or starting device to the relays opto-inputs.
The Level setting indicates by what percentage the current thresholds are modified. For example, a 0.8A setting will be increased to 1.6A if the Level setting is 200%. The following sections describe applications where the CLP logic may be useful and the settings that need to be applied. 2.11.1 Air conditioning/resistive heating loads Where a feeder is used to supply air conditioning or resistive heating loads there may be a conflict between the steady state overcurrent settings and those required following energization. This is due to the temporary increase in load current that may arise during starting. The CLP logic is used to alter the applied settings during this time. With the Cold Load PU enabled, the affected thresholds are selected to be adjusted for the required time to allow the start condition to subside. A percentage value is selected as the amount by which the selected threshold is increased/decreased. The time for which the adjusted thresholds are valid is defined by the tCL setting. After this time, the settings return to normal. It may not be necessary to alter the protection settings following a short supply interruption. In this case the CLP function is not activated. 2.11.2 Motor feeders In general, feeders supplying motor loads would be protected by a dedicated motor protection device, such as the MiCOM P220 or P241 relay. However, if no specific protection has been applied (possibly due to economic reasons) then the CLP function in the MiCOM P521 relay may be used to modify the overcurrent settings accordingly during starting. Depending upon the magnitude and duration of the motor starting current, it may be sufficient to simply block operation of instantaneous elements or, if the start duration is long, the time delayed protection settings may also need to be raised. Hence, a combination of both blocking and raising of settings of the relevant overcurrent stages may be adopted. The CLP overcurrent settings in this case must be chosen with regard to the motor starting characteristic. As previously described, the CLP logic includes the option of raising the current settings of the overcurrent and earth fault protection. This may be useful where instantaneous earth fault protection needs to be applied to the motor. During conditions of motor starting, it is likely that incorrect operation of the earth fault element would occur due to asymmetric CT saturation. This is a result of the high level of starting current causing saturation of one or more of the line CTs feeding the overcurrent/earth fault protection. The resultant transient imbalance in the secondary line current quantities is thus detected by the residually connected earth fault element. For this reason, it is normal to either apply a nominal time delay to the element, or to utilize a series stabilizing resistor. The CLP logic may be used to allow reduced operating times or current settings to be applied to the earth fault element under normal running conditions. These settings could then be raised prior to motor starting, via the logic. 2.11.3 Earth fault protection applied to transformers Where an earth fault relay is residually connected on the primary side of a delta-star transformer, no time delay is required for co-ordination purposes, due to the presence of the delta winding. However, a nominal time delay or stabilizing resistor is recommended to ensure transient stability during transformer energization.
The CLP logic may be used in a similar manner to that previously described for the motor application. It should be noted that this method will not provide stability in the event of asymmetric CT saturation which occurs as a result of an unbalanced fault condition. If problems of this nature are encountered, the best solution would still be the use of a stabilizing resistor. 2.11.4 Switch onto fault protection (SOTF) In some feeder applications, fast tripping may be required if a fault is present on the feeder when it is energized. Such faults may be due to a fault condition not having been removed from the feeder, or due to earthing clamps having been left on following maintenance. In either case, it may be desirable to clear the fault condition in an accelerated time, rather than waiting for the time delay associated with DMT overcurrent protection. The above situation may be catered for by the CLP logic. Selected overcurrent/earth fault stages could be set to a lower threshold (typically 30% of the nominal threshold) for a defined period following circuit breaker closure (typically 200ms). Hence, fault clearance would be achieved for a switch onto fault (SOTF) condition.
3.
3.1
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

Auxiliary timers (tAux 1 and tAux 2) Two auxiliary timers tAux1 and tAux2 are available associated to Aux1 and Aux2 logic inputs (refer to AUTOMAT.CRTL/INPUTS menu). When these inputs are energized, the associated timers start and after the set time, the output relays close (refer to AUTOMAT.CRTL/OUTPUTS menu). The time delays are independently settable from 0 ms to 200 s. The timer settings tAux1 and tAux2 can be found under AUTOMAT.CRTL/INPUTS/Aux1 Time (or Aux2 Time).
3.2
Setting group selection The MiCOM P521 relay has two setting groups related to the protection functions named PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2. Only one group is active at any one time. Changes between the two groups are done via the front interface (CONFIGURATION/Group Select/Setting Group 1 or 2), a dedicated logic input (AUTOMAT CTRL/Inputs/Input #/Changeset) where # is the chosen logic input or through the communication ports (refer to Communication Mapping Guide P521/EN GC for more detailed information). The relative priority of the different ways of changing the active setting group is listed below: ORIGIN OF THE ORDER FRONT PANEL LOGIC INPUT REMOTE COMMUNICATION PRIORITY LEVEL HIGHEST MEDIUM LOWEST
To avoid nuisance tripping the setting group change is only executed when no protection function (except for current differential and thermal overload functions) or automation function is running. If a setting group change is received during any protection or automation function it is stored and executed after the last protection timer has elapsed. The active group is displayed in the OP PARAMETERS menu. The active group can also be assigned to an output relay by selecting Active Group in AUTOMAT. CTRL/Output relays. If a normally open contact is chosen: 3.2.1 an open contact will indicate Group 1 a closed contact will indicate Group 2
Change of setting group by a logic input It is possible to configure how the digital inputs are activated, either on a falling edge/ low level or on a rising edge/ high level. The choice is made in the CONFIGURATION/Configuration Inputs/Inputs menu (0=falling edge/ low level, 1=rising edge/ high level). The setting group input mode (EDGE or LEVEL) can be selected in the CONFIGURATION/Group Select/Change Group Input menu.
3.2.2
Manual setting group change via front interface The setting group can be selected to be 1 or 2 in the CONFIGURATION/Group Select/Setting group menu. Manual changes can only be made if EDGE is selected in the Change Group Input cell.
3.3
Latch functions Following a protection trip the trip contact (RL1) remains closed until the current falls below the undercurrent threshold or for the tOpen Pulse time (AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu), whichever is the greater. Some applications, however, demand that the trip contact must latch following a protection trip. The MiCOM P521 caters for this requirement by allowing the user to latch RL1 after being operated by one or several thresholds. This means, for example, that RL1 can be latched for a current differential trip, but could be selected not to latch for an overcurrent trip. Table 18 below shows the Latch Functions menu; to latch a given function, following a trip, select Yes. Selecting No means that the function will not be latched. The Latch Functions menu can be found under AUTOMAT. CTRL. Latch Functions Latch diff Latch Direct I-Trip Latch C Diff I-Trip Latch PIT Latch t> Latch t>> Latch t>>> Latch t>>>> Default Setting No No No No No No No No Choices Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No
Application Guide MiCOM P521 Latch Functions Latch te> Latch te>> Latch te>>> Latch te>>>> Latch t< Latch t2> Latch t2>> Latch Thermal Latch Brkn. Cond Latch t Aux 1 Latch t Aux 2 Table 18: Latch functions menu Default Setting No No No No No No No No No No No
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 51/84 Choices Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No
The latched RL1 contact can be reset by reading ( protection alarm. 3.4 Blocking functions
) and clearing (C) the relevant
The P521 allows the user to block operation of any protection function by energizing a selected digital input. To block operation of a protection function the user must first select the function to be blocked, followed by a digital input to perform the block. The Blocking Logic 1 and Blocking Logic 2 (AUTOMAT. CTRL) contain a list of protection functions that can be blocked. Selecting Yes adds the chosen function to the list of functions that will be blocked when the appropriate input is energized. Table 19 below shows a list of the protection functions available in the Blocking Logic 1 and Blocking Logic 2 menus. Blocking Logic 1 (2) Block diff Block t> Block t>> Block t>>> Block t>>>> Block te> Block te>> Block te>>> Block te>>>> Block t2> Block t2>> Block Therm Block Brkn. Cond Default Setting No No No No No No No No No No No No No Choices Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No Yes, No
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 52/84 Blocking Logic 1 (2) Block t Aux 1 Block t Aux 2 Table 19: Blocking logic menu Default Setting No No
Application Guide MiCOM P521 Choices Yes, No Yes, No
Energizing the chosen digital input will block every protection function that has been selected. To perform the blocking function the digital input must be allocated to either Blk Log 1 or Blk Log 2. Figure 20 illustrates the blocking logic for selected protection features.
INPUT Blk Log 1 Enable Blocking logic Block 1 Idiff No Yes
Operate
Idiff
&
t I diff
RELAY
t Idiff
ALARM Idiff Disabled Enable Back-up Protection

Block 1 tI> Block 1 tI>> No Yes No Yes
See Overcurrent and Earth Fault Section Figures 5 and 6
Block 1 Thermal q
No Yes
Freeze Thermal state (%)
Block 1 t Aux 1
No Yes Aux1
&
t Aux 1
RELAY t Aux1
INPUT
P2001ENb
Figure 20: Blocking logic for selected protection features 3.5 Circuit breaker state monitoring An operator at a remote location requires a reliable indication of the state of the switchgear. Without an indication that each circuit breaker is either open or closed, the operator has insufficient information to decide on switching operations. The MiCOM P521 relay incorporates circuit breaker state monitoring, giving an indication of the position of the circuit breaker. This indication is available either at the front of the relay or via the communication network. The position of the circuit breaker is determined by wiring the 52a and 52b, circuit breaker auxiliary, contacts to the digital inputs (AUTOMAT.CTRL/Inputs/Input #/52a or 52b). The programmable LEDs on the front of the relay can be configured to indicate the position of the circuit breaker. This can be done by selecting the appropriate digital input in the LEDs menu (CONFIGURATION/Led #/Led Input #).
Once the 52a and 52b contacts have been assigned to a digital input the P521 automatically checks that the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are not simultaneously in the same state for more than 5 seconds (i.e. both open or both closed). This could only occur if there was a fault with the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts or if the circuit breaker becomes jammed whilst operating. In the event that both auxiliary contacts are in the same state for more than 5 seconds the relay issues the CB STATUS DBI latched alarm (DBI meaning Dont Believe It). If necessary the CB Alarm output relay can be used to signal this condition to the annunciator. The logic behind this feature is shown in Figure 21.
INPUT
52a XOR
XOR
INPUT
52b
5 sec DPU Timer
ALARM RELAY
CB STATUS DBI CB ALARM
52b 0 0 1 1
52a 0 1 0 1
XOR 1 0 0 1
P2066ENa
Figure 21: CB Status DBI logic diagram 3.6 CB control The P521 allows the circuit breaker to be manually tripped or closed by any one of the following three methods: 1. 2. 3. Via user interface Via opto inputs Via control communications (SCADA etc.)
Methods 1 and 2 are explained below. Method 3, via control communications, is clearly described in the P521 communication mapping guide (P521/EN GC). If an attempt to close the breaker is being made, and a protection trip signal is generated, the protection trip command overrides the close command. 3.6.1 CB trip and close via user interface To manually trip or close the circuit breaker via the user interface the user must first locate the Trip and Close cell in the OP PARAMETERS menu. Pressing the key in this cell, followed by or will display either Trip, Close or No Operation. If No Operation is selected a CB trip or close will not be performed. Selecting Trip will cause the trip contact (RL1) to operate for a duration equal to the t Open Pulse time (AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision). The operation will be accompanied by the illumination of the Trip LED and the REM TRIP alarm (indicating a remote trip has been performed). An event and fault record will be generated every time a remote trip is performed. If Close is selected in the Trip and Close cell the relay closes the output contact assigned to CB Close for a duration equal o the t Close Pulse time. The CB Close command will also generate a protection event.
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 54/84 3.6.2 CB trip and close via opto inputs
If necessary the circuit breaker can be tripped or closed by energizing the appropriate opto input. To assign an opto to either of these functions the user must select either Log Trip or Log Close in the inputs column (AUTOMAT. CTRL). Energizing the Log Trip input will cause the trip contact to operation for a duration equal to the t Trip Pulse time + the total time the opto input is energized. The operation will be accompanied by the TRIP LED illuminating and the REM TRIP alarm being displayed. An event and fault record will be generated every time a remote trip is performed. Energizing the Log Close input causes the contact assigned to CB Close to operate for a duration equal to t Close Pulse time + the total time the opto input is energized. Closing the breaker via an opto input will also generate a protection event. 3.6.3 CB manual trip and close delays The P521 relay also offers the facility of delaying the manual trip or close operation. This would give personnel time to move away from the circuit breaker following a trip or close command. The associated delays are set using the CB Man Trip Dly and CB Man Close Dly settings (AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision). Once a manual trip or close has been initiated the relay displays either Tripping or Closing for the duration of the selected delays. Pressing the key, while either of the messages are being displayed, will cancel the operation. The manual delay time will apply to all manual CB trip or close commands from any interface (keypad, opto input, front port or rear port). 3.7 Circuit breaker condition monitoring Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is necessary to ensure that the trip circuit mechanism operates correctly and also that the interrupting capability has not been compromised due to previous fault interruptions. Generally such maintenance is based on a fixed time interval or a fixed number of fault current interruptions. These methods of monitoring circuit breaker condition give a rough guide only and can lead to excessive maintenance. The relay records various statistics related to each circuit breaker trip operation, allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be determined. These monitoring features are discussed in the following section. 3.7.1 Circuit breaker condition monitoring features For each circuit breaker trip operation the relay records statistics as shown in the following table, taken from the relay menu. The RECORDS/CB Monitoring menu cells shown, are counter values only. In the event that any of the counters exceed a settable threshold (explained later), an output contact or LED can be operated (both labeled CB Alarm). In addition to operating an LED or contact, the relay will also display an alarm message, on the LCD, which is unique to each monitoring feature.
Application Guide MiCOM P521 These cells are read only: MENU TEXT CB Monitoring CB Opening Time CB Closing Time CB Operations Amps(n) A Amps(n) B Amps(n) C Displays the most recent CB opening time. Displays the most recent CB closing time.
Displays the number of opening commands executed by the CB. Displays the summation of the Amps (or Amps squared) interrupted by the phase A CB. Displays the summation of the Amps (or Amps squared) interrupted by the phase B CB. Displays the summation of the Amps (or Amps squared) interrupted by the phase C CB.
The counters may be reset to zero by pressing the (C) key in the relevant cell. The user may wish to reset the counters following a circuit breaker maintenance inspection or overhaul. If necessary the counters can be frozen during commissioning or maintenance testing of the relay. To disable the counters select Yes in the Disable CB Stats cell (AUTOMAT.CTRL/Commissioning). 3.7.2 CB supervision settings Table 20 below, details the CB supervision settings that affect the CB condition monitoring functions. It includes the setup of the current broken facility and those features that can be set to raise an alarm. All the settings are available in the AUTOMAT.CTRL/CB supervision menu. CB Supervision TC Supervision ? t trip circuit tSUP CB Open Svision CB Open Time CB Close Svision CB Close Time CB Open Alarm ? CB Open NB = Amps (n) ? Amps (n) n t Open Pulse t Close Pulse CB Man Trip Dly Default Setting No 100ms No 50ms No 50ms No 0 No 0 1 100ms 100ms 0s Min Yes, No 100ms Yes, No 50ms Yes, No 50ms Yes, No 0 Yes, No 0 1 100ms 100ms 0s 4000 E6 2 5s 5s 60s 1 E6 1 50ms 50ms 0.1s 50000 1 1s 50ms 1s 50ms 10s 50ms Max Step
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 56/84 CB Supervision CB Man Close Dly Table 20: Default Setting 0s Min 0s Max 60s
Application Guide MiCOM P521 Step 0.1s
CB supervision menu
For more information on the TC supervision refer the trip circuit supervision section. 3.7.3 Setting the operating time thresholds (CB Open Time/CB Close Time) Slow CB operation is also indicative of the need for mechanism maintenance. Therefore, two alarms are provided to indicate that the breaker is either slow to trip or slow to close. These timers are set in relation to the specified interrupting and closing times of the circuit breaker. In the event that the opening time of the breaker exceeds the CB Open Time setting the relay will display the T Operating CB alarm message. If, however the circuit breaker closing time is no longer than the CB Close Time the relay will display the CB CLOSE FAILURE alarm message. Note: The 52a auxiliary contact must be mapped to a digital input in order for this feature to work. The feature will be automatically disabled if the 52a contact is not mapped to a digital input.
3.7.4
Setting the number of operations thresholds (CB Open NB =) Every operation (opening or closing) of a circuit breaker results in some degree of wear for its components. Thus, routine maintenance, such as oiling of mechanisms, may be based upon the number of operations. Suitable setting of the maintenance threshold will allow an alarm to be raised, indicating when preventative maintenance is due. Certain circuit breakers, such as oil circuit breakers (OCBs) can only perform a certain number of fault interruptions before requiring maintenance attention. This is because each fault interruption causes carbonizing of the oil, degrading its dielectric properties. The circuit breaker condition monitoring counters will be updated every time the relay issues a trip command (RL1 operating) or when a remote trip is performed (see section 3.6). In cases where the breaker is tripped by an external protection device it is also possible to update the CB operations counter. This is achieved by allocating one of the logic inputs to close RL1 via an auxiliary timer (tAUX1 to tAUX2). In the event that the number of circuit breaker operations exceeds the CB Open NB = setting the relay will display the CB Open NB alarm message.
3.7.5
Setting the n thresholds ( Amps (n)) Where overhead lines are prone to frequent faults and are protected by oil circuit breakers (OCBs), oil changes account for a large proportion of the life cycle cost of the switchgear. Generally, oil changes are performed at a fixed interval of circuit breaker fault operations. However, this may result in premature maintenance where fault currents tend to be low, and hence oil degradation is slower than expected. The n counter monitors the cumulative severity of the duty placed on the interrupter, allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be made. For OCBs, the dielectric withstand of the oil generally decreases as a function of 2t. This is where is the fault current broken, and t is the arcing time within the interrupter tank (not the interrupting time). As the arcing time cannot be determined
accurately, the relay would normally be set to monitor the sum of the broken current squared, by setting n = 2. For other types of circuit breaker, especially those operating on higher voltage systems, practical evidence suggests that the value of n = 2 may be inappropriate. In such applications n may be set to 1. An alarm in this instance may be indicative of the need for gas/vacuum interrupter HV pressure testing, for example. It is imperative that any maintenance programme must be fully compliant with the switchgear manufacturers instructions. The P521 relay records the fault current at the instant the trip output (RL1) is initiated. This current is then summed with the value previously recorded. If the summed current exceeds the Amps (n) threshold the relay will display the Sum A n alarm message. In cases where the circuit breaker is tripped by an external protection device it is also possible to update the n counter. This is achieved by allocating one of the logic inputs to close RL1 via an auxiliary timer (tAUX1 and tAUX2). 3.7.6 Setting the trip and close pulse times (t Open Pulse/t Close Pulse) The length of the trip or close pulse can be set via the t Open Pulse and t Close Pulse settings respectively. These should be set long enough to ensure the breaker has completed its open or close cycle before the pulse has elapsed. The duration of the opening time is measured from the trip pulse being issued to the opening of the 52a auxiliary contact. Conversely, the duration of the closing time is measured from the close pulse being issued to the 52a closing. 3.8 Trip circuit supervision The trip circuit extends beyond the relay enclosure and passes through more components, such as fuse, links, relay contacts, auxiliary contacts and so on. These complications, coupled with the importance of the circuit, have directed attention to its supervision. 3.8.1 MiCOM P521 trip circuit supervision mechanism The Trip Circuit Supervision function included in the MiCOM P521 relay is performed as follows: A logic input can be programmed in the AUTOMAT.CTRL/Inputs/ Input #/Trip Circ menu. This logic input must be inserted in the trip circuit according to one of the typical application diagrams, shown later. When the function TC Supervision is enabled by selecting Yes within the AUTOMAT.CTRL/CB Supervision sub-menu, the relay continuously checks the trip circuit continuity whatever the CB status opened CB or closed CB. This function is enabled when the trip output contact (relay RL1) is not energized and it is disabled as long as the trip output contact is operating. A TRIP CIRCUIT alarm signal (trip circuit failure) is generated if the opto-input detects no voltage signal for a time longer than the settable timer tSUP (AUTOMAT.CTRL/CB Supervision). The 52 Fail contact can be selectively closed in the event of a trip coil failure. As the TC supervision function is disabled when the trip output contact is operating, this function is suitable for use with the product latching logic on.
The following table shows the setting associated with the trip circuit supervision function: Menu TC Supervision ? tSUP
Logic input Tr i p C i r c .
Setting Range Min Yes 100ms

tSUP 0
Max No 10s
Step
50ms
&
Tr i p p i n g Relay RL1 Energized
52 FAIL Signal
P0037ENb
Figure 22: Trip circuit supervision logic diagram Three application examples are shown below. Example 1 In this example only the 52a auxiliary contact is available, the MiCOM P521 relay monitors the trip coil whatever the CB status (CB open or CB closed ). However, in this example the relay does not supervise the trip circuit prior to the trip contact.
+ Vdc 52a
Trip Order RL1 MiCOM P521
Opto-input
Trip Coil - Vdc

P0038ENb
Figure 23: Trip coil monitoring Example 2 In this example both the 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts are available, the MiCOM P521 relay monitors the whole of the trip circuit when the CB is closed and part of the trip circuit when the CB is open. When the circuit breaker is open the supervision current bypasses the trip coil via the 52b contact, thus trip coil supervision is not
provided whilst in this condition. If the circuit breaker is open, a fault in the trip path will only be detected on CB closing, after the tSUP delay time (typically set to 400ms). In this example resistor R1 needs to be placed in series with the 52b contact to prevent damage if the trip contact (RL1) is latched, stays involuntarily closed, or a long trip pulse time is programmed.
+ Vdc
Opto-input
52a Trip Coil
52b Resistor R1 - Vdc

P0039ENb
Figure 24: Trip coil and auxiliary contact monitoring Example 3 As with example 2, both the 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts are available. The MiCOM P521 relay monitors the whole of the trip circuit whatever the CB status (CB open or CB closed). In this example resistor R1 needs to be fitted to prevent permanent trip coil energization, if the trip contact (RL1) is latched, stays involuntarily closed, or a long trip pulse time is programmed.
+ Vdc
Opto-input
52a Resistor R1 Trip Coil
52b
- Vdc
P0040ENb
Figure 25: Trip coil and auxiliary contact monitoring regardless of CB position 3.8.2 Calculation of external resistor R1 The calculation of the R1 resistor value takes into account a minimum current value flowing through the opto-input. This minimum current value is a function of the relay auxiliary voltage range. 1 - Case of example No 2: The R1 resistor maximum value (in Ohms) is defined by the following formula: R1 (0.8 x Vdc Vmin)/min Where: Vdc Vmin min = auxiliary voltage value (dc voltage) = minimum voltage required for opto-input operation = minimum current required for opto-input operation Relay Auxiliary Voltage Range 24 60 Vdc
R1(0.8 x Vdc 15) /0.0035
48 150 Vdc
R1(0.8 x Vdc - 25)/0.0035
130 250 Vdc/ 110-250 Vac

R1(0.8 x Vdc - 38)/0.0022
In addition, the R1 resistor withstand value (in Watts) is defined below: PR1 > 2 x (1.2 x Vdc)2 / R1
Application Guide MiCOM P521 2 - Case of example No 3:
The R1 resistor maximum value (in Ohm) is defined by the following formula: R1 Where: Vdc Vmin min Rcoil = auxiliary voltage value (dc voltage). = minimum voltage required for opto-input operation = minimum current required for opto-input operation = Trip coil resistance value Relay Auxiliary Voltage Range 24 60 Vdc
R1
(0.8 x Vdc - Vmin) min
-R coil
48 150 Vdc
130 250 Vdc/ 110-250 Vac
(0.8 x Vdc - 15) 0.0035
- Rcoil
R1
(0.8 x Vdc - 25) 0.0035
- Rcoil
R1
(0.8 x Vdc - 38) 0.0022
- Rcoil
In addition, the R1 resistor withstand value (in Watts) is defined below: PR1 > 2 * (1,2 * Vdc)2 / (R1 + Rcoil) Note: 3.9 Any additional series impedances, such as anti-pumping relays, must be taken into account when calculating the value of resistor R1. It is assumed that the maximum auxiliary voltage variation is 20%.
Event records The relay records and time tags up to 75 events and stores them in non-volatile (battery backed) memory. This enables the system operator to establish the sequence of events that occurred within the relay following a particular power system condition, switching sequence etc. When the available space is exhausted, the oldest event is automatically overwritten by the new one. The real time clock within the relay provides the time tag to each event, to a resolution of 1ms. The event records are available for viewing either via the front panel EIA(RS)232 port or remotely, via the rear EIA(RS)485 port. For extraction from a remote source via communications, refer to the Communications Mapping Guide P521/EN GC, where the procedure is fully explained.
3.10
Fault records Each time any programmed threshold is exceeded a fault record is created and stored in memory. The fault record logs up to 5 faults and stores them in non-volatile (battery backed up) memory. This enables the system operator to read and analyze information regarding the network failures. When the available space is exhausted, the oldest fault is automatically overwritten by the new one.
Any of the 5 stored fault records can be viewed in the RECORDS/Fault Record menu. The desired fault record can be selected in the Record Number cell which is selectable from up to 5 records, 5 being the most recent record and 1 being the oldest. These records consist of fault flags, fault measurements etc. Also note that the time stamp given in the fault record itself will be more accurate than the corresponding stamp given in the event record as the event is logged some time after the actual fault record is generated. The fault records are available for viewing either on the display, or via the front panel EIA(RS)232 port or remotely, via the rear EIA(RS)485 port. For extraction from a remote source via communications, refer to the Communications Mapping Guide P521/EN GC, where the procedure is fully explained. 3.11 Instantaneous recorder Each time any programmed threshold is crossed an instantaneous record is created and displayed in the RECORDS/Instantaneous menu. The last five protection starts, with the duration of the information are available. The number of the faults, hour, date, origin (>, >>, >>> or e>, e>>, e>>>), length (duration of start signal), trip (a trip has appeared, yes or no) are displayed. 3.12 Disturbance recorder The integral disturbance recorder has an area of memory specifically set aside for record storage. A total of 5 records can be stored of up to 3 seconds in duration. Disturbance records continue to be recorded until the available memory is exhausted, at which time the oldest record(s) are overwritten to make space for the newest one. The recorder stores actual samples which are taken at a rate of 32 samples per cycle. Each disturbance record consists of analogue data channels and digital data channels. The relay also provides the relevant CT ratios for the analogue channels, to enable scaling to primary quantities. The RECORDS/Disturb Record settings are shown in table 21 below: Disturb Record Pre-Time Post-Time Disturb Rec Trig Table 21: Default Setting 0.1 s 0.1 s ON INST Min 0.1 s 0.1 s Max 3s 3s ON INST, ON TRIP Step 0.1 s 0.1 s
Disturbance record menu
The total recording time is set by a combination of the pre and post fault recording times. For example, the default settings show that the pre-time time is set to 100 ms. If the post -time is set to 2.5 s, than the total disturbance recording time will be 2.6s. It must be noted that the Pre-Time takes priority over the Post-Time in the event that the sum of Pre-Time and Post-Time exceeds 3 seconds. For example, if the pre-time is set to 2.5s and the Post time is set to 2 seconds (4.5 seconds total), the disturbance recorder will actually record 2.5 seconds pre-time and only 0.5 seconds post-time. Therefore we can say that: Maximum Post-Time = 3 seconds Pre-Time
The disturbance recorder can be triggered by a trip condition (operation of RL1) by selecting ON TRIP, in the disturbance recorder trigger cell. Alternatively, the disturbance recorder can be triggered by any start condition by selecting ON INST. It is also possible to trigger the disturbance recorder by energizing one of the programmable opto inputs (labeled Strt Dist), or via the remote control communications. 3.13 Rolling and peak demand values The MiCOM P521 relay is able to store the rolling average and peak values for the 3 phase currents. The calculation is performed over a selectable sub-period between 1 and 60 minutes. The calculation principle is described below. 3.13.1 Rolling demand There are two settings associated with the Rolling demand measurements, which are Sub Period and Num of Sub Per. These settings can be found under RECORDS/Rolling Demand. The Sub Period setting determines the time over which the average RMS current values are calculated. The Num of Sub Per (Number of Sub Periods) setting, sets the number of sub periods (maximum 24) used in the calculation. The calculation principle of the A, B and C rolling demand values is as follows: Relay calculates the average value over the duration set by the sub period. The relay then displays the results at the end of the sub-period. The Rolling Average measurements can be found under the MEASUREMENTS/Current/General menu i.e. Rolling Average A RMS Rolling Average B RMS Rolling Average C RMS If the number of sub periods is set to 1, the average will be calculated based upon the 1 sub period. If, however, the number of sub-periods is set to 2 or more (24 being the maximum), the calculation determines the rolling average value based upon the averages of the chosen number of sub-periods. The calculation can be reset by hand (press (C) key in the ROLLING AVERAGE cell) without use of the password, or a remote command. A modification of the settings (either "Sub Period" or "Num of Sub Periods" settings) will also reset the calculation. Note: Example: Sub Period = 5 mn Num of Sub Period = 2 In case of loss of power supply the rolling demand value is not stored.
Sub Period 1 5 mn
Sub Period 2 5 mn
Sub Period 3 5 mn
At the end of the Sub Period 2: Rolling average value = (average value 1 + average value 2)/2
At the end of the Sub Period 3: New Rolling average value = (average value 2 + average value 3)/2 3.13.2 Peak value demand The Peak demand value calculation principle, for A, B and C currents, is as follows: Every "Rolling Sub Period", a new average value is calculated and compared with the value calculated during the previous "Rolling Sub Period". If this new value is greater than the previous value already stored, then the previous value is overwritten with the new one. However, if this new value is lower than the previous value, already stored, then the previous value is kept. In this way, an average peak value will be refreshed each Sub Period; The Sub Period setting, used for the peak value calculation, is the same as that used for the rolling average calculation (RECORDS/Rolling Demand). The 3 phase Peak value demand are displayed in the MEASUREMENTS/Current/General menu: MAX SUBPERIOD A RMS MAX SUBPERIOD B RMS MAX SUBPERIOD C RMS The calculation can be reset by hand (press (C) key in the MAX. SUBPERIOD cell) without use of the password, or a remote command. A modification of the "Sub Period" setting will also reset the calculation. Note: 3.14 Measurements The MiCOM P521 relay has three different measurement columns, each one dedicated to specific relay functions. The three measurement columns are as follows: Current Diff Current/General Protection Comms In case of loss of power supply the Peak average values are stored in battery backed RAM.
The following section describes the contents of the three measurement columns. Note: 3.14.1 Current diff The measurements contained with the Current Diff column are associated with the current differential protection. These include remote phase currents and per phase differential and bias currents. All measurements within this column are based upon the fundamental frequency only. All measurements contained within this column are multiplied by the local CT ratio setting, with the exception of the remote phase currents, which are scaled as follows: Remote Current (primary) = Remote Secondary Current x Local CT Ratio CT Correct Ratio All measurements listed below are updated on a per second basis.
This calculation accounts for any CT mismatch between ends.
Application Guide MiCOM P521 3.14.2 Current/general
The relay produces a variety of directly measured and calculated power system quantities. The list of measurements include: Local Phase and Neutral RMS Currents Positive and negative sequence currents (1 and 2 respectively) Ratio of 2/1 Residual harmonic currents Thermal state (%) Peak and average currents Demand values
The following section describes some of these measurements in more detail. 3.14.2.1 Measured currents The RMS phase and earth currents are calculated by using the sum of the samples squared over a cycle of data. 3.14.2.2 Ratio of 2/1 The ratio of 2/1 is used to detect broken conductors. Refer to the broken conductor section for more information. 3.14.2.3 Residual harmonic currents (N fn) This measurement allows the user to determine the harmonic currents (typically 3rd harmonic) flowing in the earth path. On pressing the (C) key, in the N fn cell, the relay will update the measurement of the actual RMS earth current minus the fundamental component. This measurement will only be updated on subsequent presses of the (C) key. 3.14.2.4 Peak and average currents These measurements display the peak and average RMS currents over a settable time window of 5 to 60 minutes. The time window is set in the Time Window cell under the RECORDS/Time Peak Value menu. Once the time window has elapsed, the peak and average measurements will be stored until they are reset. To reset these measurements, and trigger another time window, the user must either press the (C) key, in the Max & Average cell, or modify the Time Window setting. Note: 3.14.2.5 Demand values See Rolling and peak demand values section. 3.14.3 Protection comms This column allows the user to view various statistics relating to the protection communications channel. A brief explanation of every measurement, contained in this column, can be found in section 3.5.3.3 of the User Guide (P521/EN FT). The peak and average measurements will be lost in the event of an auxiliary supply interruption.
The protection comms statistics can be reset (with the exception of the propagation delay) by either pressing the (C) key, in the Comms Stats RST cell or by energizing an opto input, which has been assigned to Comms RST.
4.
4.1
CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

Current differential protection For accuracy, class X or class 5P current transformers (CTs) are strongly recommended, with a knee point voltage that complies with the requirements of the formula shown below. Simplified versions of the formula are shown in section 4.2, but these should only be used within the specified limits. Vk Where: Vk Ks Kt In Rct RL = = = = = = Required IEC knee point voltage Dimensioning factor Operating time factor CT nominal secondary current CT dc resistance One-way lead impedance from CT to relay Ks . Kt . In (Rct + 2RL)
4.1.1
Ks calculation Ks is a constant depending upon: If X/R = = Maximum value of through fault current for stability (multiple of In) Primary system X/R ratio
Ks is determined as follows: For X/R < 40 Ks = 0.023 x If (X/R + 55) + 0.9 (X/R+26)
For X/R 40 Ks 4.1.2 = 0.024 x If (X/R + 44) + 0.06 (X/R+725)
Kt calculation Kt is a constant depending upon: X/R = Primary system X/R ratio Current differential operating time setting (seconds)
tIdiff =
For applications where the CT knee point is critical (e.g. a retrofit application where the CTs already exists), it may be possible to reduce the CT requirements by adding a small time delay to the relay. The tIdiff (PROTECTION G1 (G2)/[87] Current Diff/tIdiff) setting allows the user to increase the relay operating time thus making the relay more stable. For some applications a time setting of 50ms may reduce the required CT knee point voltage by as much as 30%. Further reductions in CT knee point are possible with longer time delays.
Application Guide MiCOM P521 Kt is determined as follows: For X/R < 40 Kt Kt = = 1 (6.2 x tIdiff) for tIdiff 0.15s 0.07 for tIdiff > 0.15s
For X/R 40 Kt = 1 (2.5 x tIdiff) for tIdiff not exceeding 0.25s
For applications where the relay is set to instantaneous (tIdiff=0), a Kt value of 1 should be used. 4.2 Typical equations for current differential protection The following equations can be applied for simplicity. Care must be taken to ensure that X/R and fault levels conform to the limits specified. If the calculated Vk appears to be too large, it may be necessary to fine tune the calculation by using the equations specified in section 4.1. For X/R 20 and a fault level 25In Vk 85 . Kt . In (Rct + 2RL)
For X/R < 40 and a fault level 25In Vk 99 . Kt . In (Rct + 2RL)
Where Kt is determined as follows: Kt Kt = = Note: 1 (6.2 x tIdiff) for tIdiff 0.15s 0.07 for tIdiff > 0.15s
The equations shown in this section are based upon the equations in section 4.1 with the associated X/R and fault level figures already substituted.
4.3
Selection of X/R ratio and fault level The value of X/R ratio and fault level will vary from one system to another, but selecting the correct value for the CT requirements is critical. In the case of single end fed (radial) systems the through fault level and X/R ratio should be calculated assuming the fault occurs at the location of the remote CT. For systems where the current can feed through the protected feeder in both directions, such as parallel feeders and ring main circuits, further consideration is required. In this case the fault level and X/R ratio should be calculated at both the local and remote CTs. In doing this the X/R ratio and fault level will be evaluated for both fault directions. The CT requirements, however, should be based upon the fault direction that gives the highest knee point voltage. Under no circumstances should the X/R ratio from one fault direction and the fault level from the other be used to calculate the knee point. Doing this may result in exaggerated and unrealistic CT requirements.
4.4
SEF protection as fed by core-balance CT Core balance current transformers of metering class accuracy are required and should have a limiting secondary voltage satisfying the formula given below: Vk fn x (Rct + 2RL + Rrn)
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 68/84 Where: Vk Ifn Rct RL Rrn = = = = = Required IEC knee point voltage
Maximum prospective secondary earth fault current CT dc resistance One-way lead impedance from CT to relay Impedance of neutral current input
5.
5.1
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RELAYS

Communications link options A number of communications options are available for the communication channel between P521 system ends. The various connection options are described below. Choosing between each of these options will depend on the type of communications equipment that is available. Where existing suitable multiplexer communication equipment is installed, for other communication between substations, interfaces conforming to the G.703, V.35, and X.21 recommendations are available, by using the 850nm fiber interface in the P521 plus a P591, P592 or P593 interface unit. For further information on the P591, P592 and P593 optical fiber to electrical interface units, refer to section 5.3. Where no multiplexer is installed, the direct optical fiber connection can be used. The type of fiber used (multi-mode or single-mode) will be determined by the distance between the ends of the P521 relay system, refer to section 5.2.5. For multiplexed or direct fiber communications the data rate may be selected as either 56kbit/sec or 64kbit/sec using the SDLC protocol. Slower data rates can be selected for these applications, but this is not recommended, as it would result in increased relay operating times. Where a 2 wire unconditioned pilot wire circuit is available (i.e. pilot wires without any signal equalization equipment), baseband or mDSL modems can be used in conjunction with the P521 relays to communicate at 64 kbit/sec, refer also to section 5.5. Where a 4 wire unconditioned pilot wire circuit is available a P595 can be used, refer also to section 5.4. For 2 wire conditioned pilots (provided by a telecommunications company), a suitable type of modem must be used, and there is no strict limit to the distance. Refer to section 5.6. For distances of 1.2km or less and two twisted pairs of wires are available, EIA(RS)485 can be utilized at data rates of 64 kbit/sec, 56 kbit/sec, 19.2 kbit/sec and 9.6kbit/sec, refer also to section 5.7. In certain circumstances the user may want to change the relay protection communications interface. For example, from electrical (EIA(RS)485/232) to fiber optic, when the P521 is fitted in a substation with existing pilot/telephone wires, which are to be replaced with fiber optic cables at a later date. With a minor hardware change the relay can be upgraded without the need for a software/firmware change. Refer to section 9.4.4 of the Commissioning and Maintenance section of this manual (P521/EN CM) for information regarding communications interface changes.
Application Guide MiCOM P521 5.2 5.2.1 Direct optical fiber Direct optical fiber link, 850nm multi-mode fiber
The relays are fitted with the 850nm multi-mode fiber interface, and connected directly using two 850nm multi-mode optical fibers for the signaling channel. Multi-mode fiber type 50/125m or 62.5/125m is suitable. BFOC/2.5 type fiber optic connectors are used. These are commonly known as ST connectors (ST is a registered trademark of AT&T).
P521 850nm
Optical fiber
P521 850nm
P2087ENb
This is typically suitable for connection up to 1km. 5.2.2 Direct optical fiber link, 1300nm multi-mode fiber The relays are fitted with the 1300nm multi-mode fiber interface, and connected directly using two 1300nm multi-mode fibers for the signaling channel. Multi-mode fiber type 50/125m is suitable. BFOC/2.5 type fiber optic connectors are used.
P521 1300nm
Optical fiber
P521 1300nm
P2088ENb
This is typically suitable for connection up to 30km. 5.2.3 Direct optical fiber link, 1300nm single-mode fiber The relays are fitted with the 1300nm single-mode fiber interface, and connected directly using two 1300nm single-mode fibers, type 9/125m for the signaling channel. BFOC/2.5 type fiber optic connectors are used.
P521 1300nm
Optical fiber
P521 1300nm
P2088ENb
This is typically suitable for connection up to 60km. 5.2.4 Switched communication networks The P521 relay makes use of digital communication signaling channels for the differential protection. For the P521 a requirement of this link is that go (tp1) and return (tp2) times are similar (a difference of up to 1ms can be tolerated). Times greater than this can result in relay instability. Where switched communications networks are used, it is possible that during switching, a transient time period may exist with different go and return times. The P521 relay includes a facility to ensure protection stability during this transient period.
One of the checks performed on the communications link is a check on the calculated propagation delay for each data message. During normal operation the difference in calculated time should be minimal (possible delays being introduced by multiplexers or other intermediary communication equipment). If successive calculated propagation delay times exceed a user settable value (200 - 10000s) then the data message is discarded. This check is used to overcome switching problems. Figure 26 shows a possible scenario for a switched network. Initially the P521 relays are communicating via path 1. The go and return times for this path are 2ms and hence the calculated propagation delay is (2 + 2)/2 = 2ms. When the channel is switched to path 2, a small time period exists where the P521s could be sending messages via path 1 and returning via path 2. The calculated propagation delay will now be (2 + 5)/2 = 3.5ms. The resultant 1.5ms error at each line end may cause the relay to maloperate due to incorrect time alignment of current vectors (see section 2.1.2). After a short delay, both go and return paths will follow route 2 and the calculated propagation delay will be (5 + 5)/2 = 5ms. The relay will now be stable, as correct current vector time alignment exists at each line end. The P521 relay uses the change in calculated propagation delay to initiate a change in relay characteristic for a short time period (COMMUNICATION/Protection/ Char Mod Time setting) to overcome any switching delay. The Char Mod timer is settable in the range 0 to 100 seconds, default 10 seconds. The change in characteristic is shown in Figure 26 whereby the relay s1 setting is increased to 200% of s2 and the k1 slope is changed to 0%. This characteristic provides stability for all load conditions and will still allow tripping for most internal fault conditions. The Char Mod timer is started when a change in propagation delay is detected. Any subsequent change during this period will not cause the timer to restart. In the above example the timer will start for the first change (2 to 3.5ms). The second change (3.5ms to 5ms) will not cause the timer to restart, which would prolong the setting change. Any transient jitter occurring on the communications path, which affected the propagation delay time, could therefore unnecessarily desensitize the relay. To overcome this possible problem, the P521 relay includes a feature whereby the Char Mod timer is reset if a change is detected during its timing period that returns the propagation delay to its original value. The dotted line of Figure 26 shows this, where the propagation delay changes from 2 to 3.5ms and back to 2ms.

'go' = 5ms Path 2 'return' = 5ms 'go' = 2ms Path 1 'return' = 2ms
Communication equipment Calculated propagation delay tp 5ms
Communication equipment
Possible relay maloperation 3.5ms 2ms Reset transient timer < Transient time period (Char Mod Time) > Time
P1031ENa
Figure 26: Switched communication network
I1 Idiff
=
I2
I1 + I2
Operate 2Is2 Percentage bias k2
Percentage bias k1
Restrain
Is1
Is2
Ibias
I1 + I2
2
P1001ENd
Figure 27: Modified bias characteristic
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 72/84 5.2.5 Optical budgets
When applying the P521 current differential relay, it is important to select the appropriate fiber interface. This will depend on the fiber used and distance between devices. The following table shows the optical budgets of the available communications interfaces. 850nm Multi Mode Min. transmit output level (average power) Receiver sensitivity (average power) Optical budget Less safety margin (3dB) Typical cable loss Max. transmission distance Table 22: Optical budgets -19.8dBm -25.4dBm 5.6dB 2.6dB 2.6dB/km 1km 1300nm Multi Mode -10dBm -37dBm 27.0dB 24.0dB 0.8dB/km 30.0km 1300nm Single Mode -10dBm -37dBm 27.0dB 24.0dB 0.4dB/km 60.0km
The total optical budget is given by the transmitter output level minus the receiver sensitivity and will indicate the total allowable losses that can be tolerated between devices. A safety margin of 3dB is also included in the above table. This allows for degradation of the fiber as a result of ageing and any losses in cable joints. The remainder of the losses will come from the fiber itself. The figures given are typical only and should only be used as a guide. In general, the 1300nm interfaces will be used for direct connections between relays. The 850nm would be used where multiplexing equipment is employed. 5.3 Multiplexer link via P59x optical fiber to electrical interface units In order to connect the P521 relay via a pulse code modulation (PCM) multiplexer network or digital communication channel the P59x interface units are required. The following interface units are available: P591 interface to multiplexing equipment supporting ITU-T (formerly CCITT) Recommendation G.703 co-directional electrical interface P592 interface to multiplexing equipment supporting ITU-T Recommendation V.35 electrical interface P593 interface to multiplexing or ISDN equipment supporting ITU-T Recommendation X.21 electrical interface
The data rate for each unit can be 56kbit/sec or 64kbit/sec as required for the data communications link, refer to section 5.11. One P59x unit is required per relay signaling channel (i.e. for each transmit and receive signal pair). It provides optical to electrical and electrical to optical signal conversion between the P521 relay and the multiplexer. The interface unit should be located as close to the PCM multiplexer as possible, to minimize any effects on the data of electromagnetic noise or interference. The units are housed in a 20TE MiCOM case.
Fiber optic connections to the unit are made through BFOC/2.5 type connectors, more commonly known as ST connectors. The optical characteristics are similar to the P521 850nm multi-mode fiber optic interface (refer to section 5.2.5 above). 5.3.1 Multiplexer link with G.703 electrical interface using auxiliary optical fibers and type P591 interface The relays are fitted with the 850nm optical interface, and connected to a P591 unit by 850nm multi-mode optical fiber. Multi-mode fiber type 50/125m or 62.5/125m is suitable. BFOC/2.5 type fiber optic connectors are used. The P591 unit converts the data between optical fiber and ITU-T compatible G.703 co-directional electrical interface. The G.703 output must be connected to an ITU-T compatible G.703 co-directional channel on the multiplexer.
P521 850nm
O/F
P591
G703 M U X
M G703 U X
P591
O/F
P521 850nm
P2090ENa
The P591 unit supports the ITU-T Recommendation G.703 co-directional interface. The P591 interface unit should be located as close to the PCM multiplexer as possible, to minimize any effects on the data of electromagnetic noise or interference. The G.703 signals are isolated by pulse transformers to 1kV. Since the G.703 signals are only of 1V magnitude, the cable connecting the P591 unit and the multiplexer must be properly screened against electromagnetic noise and interference. The interface cable should consist of twisted pairs of 24AWG, overall shielded, and have a characteristic impedance of about 120. It is generally recommended that the interface cable shield should be connected to the multiplexer frame ground only. The choice of grounding depends upon the local codes of practice. Electrical connections to the P591 unit are made via a standard 28-way Midos connector. Please refer to P521/EN CO for the external connection diagram. The P521 must be set with Clock Source as External, refer to section 5.10. 5.3.2 Multiplexer link with V.35 electrical interface using auxiliary optical fibers and type P592 interface The relays are fitted with the 850nm optical interface, and connected to a P592 unit by 850nm multi-mode optical fiber. Multi-mode fiber type 50/125m or 62.5/125m is suitable. BFOC/2.5 type fiber optic connectors are used. The P592 unit converts the data between optical fiber and ITU-T compatible V.35 electrical interface. The V.35 output must be connected to an ITU-T compatible V.35 channel on the multiplexer.
P521 850nm
O/F
P592
V35
M U X
M U X
V35
P592
O/F
P521 850nm
P2091ENa
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 74/84 The P592 unit supports the ITU-T Recommendation V.35 interface.
The P592 interface unit should be located as close to the PCM multiplexer as possible, to minimize any effects on the data of electromagnetic noise or interference. Connections of V.35 signals to the P592 unit are made via a standard female 34 pin M block connector. Since the V.35 signals are either of 0.55V or 12V magnitude, the cable connecting the unit to the multiplexer must be properly screened against electromagnetic noise and interference. The interface cable should consist of twisted pairs of wires which are shielded, and have a characteristic impedance of about 100. It is generally recommended that the interface cable shield is connected to the multiplexer frame ground. The choice of grounding depends upon the local codes of practice. The P592 front panel consists of five indicating LEDs and six DIL (dual in line) switches. The switch labeled Clockswitch is provided to invert the V.35 transmit timing clock signal if required. The switch labeled Fiber-optic Loopback is provided to allow a test loopback of the communication signal across the fiber optic terminals. When switched on, the red LED labeled 'Fiber-optic Loopback' is illuminated. The switch labeled V.35 Loopback is provided to allow a test loopback of the communication signal across the X.21 terminals. It loops the incoming V.35 Rx data lines internally back to the outgoing V.35 Tx data lines. When switched on, the red LED labeled V.35 Loopback is illuminated. The switch labeled DSR is provided to select/ignore the DSR (Data Set Ready) handshaking control signal. The red LED labeled DSR Off is extinguished either when DSR is asserted or when overridden by setting the DSR switch On. The switch labeled CTS is provided to select/ignore the CTS (Clear To Send) handshaking control signal. The red LED labeled CTS Off is extinguished either when CTS is asserted or when overridden by setting the CTS switch On. The switch labeled Data Rate is provided to allow the selection of 56 or 64 kbit/sec data rate, as required by the PCM multiplexing equipment. The green LED labeled Supply Healthy provides indication that the unit is correctly powered. Please refer to P521/EN CO for the external connection diagram. The P521 may be set either with Clock Source as External for a multiplexer network which is supplying a master clock signal, or with Clock Source as Internal for a multiplexer network deriving its signal timing from the equipment. Refer to section 5.10. 5.3.3 Multiplexer link with X.21 electrical interface using auxiliary optical fibers and type P593 interface The P593 unit supports the ITU-T Recommendation X.21 interface. It is approved as line interface equipment by the British Approvals Board for Telecommunications (BABT) for connection to the services described in this section; License Certificate Number NS/1423/1/T/605362. The relays are fitted with the 850nm optical interface, and connected to a P593 unit by 850nm multi-mode optical fiber. Multi-mode fiber type 50/125m or 62.5/125m is suitable. BFOC/2.5 type fiber optic connectors are used. The P593
unit converts the data between optical fiber and ITU-T compatible X.21 electrical interface. The X.21 output must be connected to an ITU-T compatible X.21 channel on the multiplexer or ISDN digital data transmission link.
O/F X.21 O/F P521 850nm
P2092ENa
P521 850nm
P593
P593
The P593 interface unit should be located as close to the PCM multiplexer as possible, to minimize any effects on the data of electromagnetic noise or interference. The P521 relays require a permanently open communications channel. Consequently, no communications handshaking is required, and it is not supported in the P593 unit. The signals supported are shown in table 23. ITU-T Recommendation X.21 is closely associated with specifications EIA(RS)422 and EIA(RS)449. The P593 can be used with EIA(RS)422 or EIA(RS)449 communications channels which require only the signals shown overleaf. ITU-T Designation G T T R R S S Table 23: Description Case earth Common return Transmit data A Transmit data B Receive data A Receive data B Signal element timing A Signal element timing B X.21 circuits supported by P593 unit Connector Pin 1 8 2 9 4 11 6 13 Direction From P593 From P593 To P593 To P593 To P593 To P593
Connections of X.21 signals to the P593 unit are made via a standard male 15 way D-type connector, wired as a DTE device. The interface cable should consist of twisted pairs of 24AWG, overall shielded, and have a characteristic impedance of about 100. It is generally recommended that the interface cable shield is connected to the multiplexer frame ground. The choice of grounding depends upon the local codes of practice. Refer to P521/EN CO for the external connection diagram. The P521 must be set with Clock Source as External, refer to section 5.10. The P593 front panel consists of four indicating LEDs and two switches. The green LED labeled Supply healthy provides indication that the unit is correctly powered. The green LED labeled Clock provides indication that an appropriate X.21 signal element timing signal is presented to the unit. One of the switches is labeled Fiber Optic Loopback. This is provided to allow a test loopback of the communication signal across the fiber optic terminals. When switched on, the red LED labeled Fiber Optic Loopback is illuminated.
The second switch is labeled X.21 Loopback. This is provided to allow a test loopback of the communication signal across the X.21 terminals. It loops the incoming X.21 Rx data lines internally back to the outgoing X.21 Tx data lines, and also loops the incoming fiber optic Rx data line (via the X.21 signal conversion circuitry) back to the outgoing fiber optic Tx data line. When switched on, the red LED labeled X.21 Loopback is illuminated. 5.4 Unconditioned 4 wire pilot communications for distances greater than 1.2km (P595) In order to increase the transmission distance of EIA(RS)485 up to 25 kilometres the P595 Interfacing Device can be used at each end of the line. To gain maximum performance of the P521, the data rate must be set to 19.2 kbit/sec and the protocol set to NRZ (Non Return to Zero). The relays are fitted with the EIA(RS)485 interface, and connected using two pairs of unconditioned pilot wires of 0.4mm (26AWG) or larger gauge, twisted and shielded to ensure secure and reliable communications. Pilot isolation must also be considered, when connecting the P595. If the longitudinal voltage exceeds 900V the PCM-FL 10kV or 20kV isolating transformers must be fitted in series with the P595. The PCM-FL isolating transformer has a, m and b taps on both primary and secondary windings. For all P521 applications, connection must be made between taps a and m, which has a maximum frequency of 2MHz. Connection between a and b may result in unreliable communications as the maximum frequency for this tap configuration is 6kHz. Connection to a and m taps must be adhered to on both primary and secondary so as to maintain a 1:1 ratio. Refer to section P521/EN CO for connection diagrams. Refer to the P595 manual (P595/EN M) for further information. Note: The P595 interface device is identical to the AREVA T&D PZ511 interface except that the P595 has accessible setting switches. The switch settings, to allow communications between P521 relays, can be found in the P595 manual.
5.5
Unconditioned 2 wire pilot communications for distances greater than 1.2km When communicating via a pair of unconditioned pilots for distances greater than 1.2km, a leased line or baseband modem can be used. For maximum security and performance it is strongly recommended that a screened twisted pair of 0.5mm (or greater) conductors are used. Typical connection diagrams are shown in section P521/EN CO. When choosing between leased line or baseband modems the following aspects should be considered: Leased line modems have a maximum transmission speed of 19.2 kbit/sec, whereas baseband modems can transmit at 64 kbit/sec. Baseband modems have longer re-training times, typically between 10 to 60s. If the connection between is temporarily lost, the protection communications will be interrupted until the re-training period has elapsed. Since baseband modems use synchronous communication protocols, there is typically a 20% performance gain over leased line modems that use asynchronous protocols.
Application Guide MiCOM P521 Modems tested: Westermo TD-32 leased line and dial-up modem. Patton Netlink 1095 mDSL Baseband modem. Patton Campus 1092A Baseband Modem.
Modem summary table. For full information see the modem configuration document P521/EN MC. Type TD32 Netlink1095 Campus 1092A Max Distance (km) 20 9.4 17.2 Recommended Data Rate (kbit/sec) 9.6 64 64 Typical Re-train Time (seconds) 14 25 10
The Campus 1092A modem may also be used for 4 wire pilot communications, giving extra security and a slightly improved maximum distance (18.2km). 5.5.1 Leased line modem set up (e.g. TD32 modem) The data rate can be set to either 9.6 or 19.2 kbit/sec and the protocol set to NRZ (Non Return to Zero). Since the transmission speed is limited to 19.2 kbit/sec, connections to the modem can be made via EIA(RS)232 or EIA(RS)485 depending upon the type of modem. Refer to P521/EN MC (modem configuration) for more information on setting up the modem. 5.5.2 Baseband modem set up (Patton Netlink 1095 mDSL modem, Patton Campus 1092A modem) The data rate must be set to 64 kbit/sec, the protocol set to NRZ. For more information, on setting up the modem, refer to P521/EN MC (modem configuration). 5.5.3 Modem isolation Pilot isolation must be considered when connecting modems to unconditioned circuits. Additional isolation can be provided by the PCM-FL 10kV or 20kV isolating transformers. The PCM-FL isolating transformer has a, m and b taps on both primary and secondary windings. For all P521 applications, connection must be made between taps a and m, which has a maximum frequency of 2MHz. Connection between a and b may result in unreliable communications as the maximum frequency for this tap configuration is 6kHz. Connection to a and m taps must be adhered to on both primary and secondary so as to maintain a 1:1 ratio. Refer to P521/EN AC for more information. 5.5.4 Clock source settings Set relay clock source setting (COMMUNICATION/Protection/Clock Source CH1). Modem Type Synchronous Asynchronous Clock Source Setting External Internal
P521/EN AP/C31 Page 78/84 5.6 Conditioned pilot communications
When communicating via conditioned pilot wires (i.e. leased telecom circuits that run through signal equalization equipment) the P521 should be connected to leased line modems at each end of the line. The data rate can be set to either 9.6 or 19.2 kbit/sec. The protocol must be set to NRZ (Non Return to Zero). Modem summary table: For full information see the modem configuration document P521/EN MC. Type TD32 Max Distance (km) n/a Recommended Data Rate (kbit/sec) 9.6 Typical Re-train Time (seconds) 14
Connection to the modem can be made via the EIA(RS)485 or EIA(RS)232 outputs (of SK1), depending upon the type of modem. Typical connection diagrams are shown in section P521/EN CO. For more information on setting up the modem refer to P521/EN MC (modem configuration). 5.6.1 Gas discharge tubes (GDTs) Gas discharge tubes are commonly used to provide overvoltage/surge protection for conditioned pilots circuits. These are dispersed at intervals along the pilot circuit to limit the voltage between pilots and ground during heavy earth faults. The GDTs limit the high potential by transiently shorting the pilots to both each other and ground. This, however, will temporarily interrupt the protection communications, thus preventing the protection from operating when required to do so. To prevent interruptions in the protection communications it is recommended that either: The earth fault level is checked to ensure that the resulting pilot voltage is less than the voltage threshold of the GDTs (use equations from section 5.8) or 5.7 The GDTs be removed and replaced with pilot isolation transformers
Direct 4 wire EIA(RS)485 up to 1.2km Direct connection between two P521 relays using 4 wire EIA(RS)485 can be used at data rates of 9.6, 19.2, 56 and 64 kbit/sec. The protocol for this communication method can be either SDLC or NRZ. Ideally the interconnecting wires should be 2 screened twisted pairs. For the direct EIA(RS)485 connections up to 1.2km it is strongly recommended that the MT-RS485 be fitted. The MT-RS485 protects the relay communications interface from excessive transverse voltages (voltage between pilot cores) and static spikes. However, for reliable communications it must be ensured that the longitudinal voltage never exceeds 600V as the MT-RS485 surge protection may corrupt the protection signaling. Figure 28 shows the connection diagram for the MT-RS485.

Lower terminal strip A9 A4 In A7 A2 A8 A3 650V Gas discharge surge protection PE1 PE2

Upper terminal strip B9 B4 B7 B2 B8 B3 Rx+ RxTx+ TxOut
P2093ENa
Figure 28: MT-RS485 connection diagram Refer to section P521/EN CO for application diagram. 5.8 Pilot isolation During primary earth faults the strong magnetic field generated can induce a significant voltage between the pilots and ground (longitudinal voltage). To prevent damage to any equipment connected to the pilot circuit it must be ensured that the modem can provide an adequate isolation barrier between the pilot itself and all other electrically isolated circuits. Although it may be difficult to accurately predict the induced pilot voltage during an earth fault, the following equations can be used to give an approximation: Induced voltage for un-screened pilots 0.3 x F x L Induced voltage for screened pilots 0.1 x F x L Where: F L = = Maximum prospective earth fault current in amperes Length of pilot circuit in miles
In cases where the calculated voltage exceeds, typically 60% of the relay/modem isolation level, additional isolation must be added. AREVA T&D offer the PCM-FL 10kV or 20kV isolating transformers (see P521/EN AC for more information). If necessary, these can be used in conjunction with leased line or mDSL modems. The choice of 10kV or 20kV will depend upon the magnitude of the induced voltage. Typical application diagrams of the PCM-FL isolating transformer are shown in section P521/EN CO (connection diagrams).
5.9
Protection communications address The protection communication messages include an address field to ensure correct scheme connection. There are 32 addresses arranged into 16 groups (COMMUNICATION/ Protection/Relay Address) to select from. Each protection system has a single
group applied to it.
All the address patterns are carefully chosen so as to provide optimum noise immunity against bit corruption. There is no preference as to which address group is better than another. The groups of addresses available for a 2 Terminal scheme are as follows: Relay A Address Group 1 Address Group 2 Address Group 3 Address Group 4 Address Group 5 Address Group 6 Address Group 7 Address Group 8 Address Group 9 Address Group 10 Address Group 11 Address Group 12 Address Group 13 Address Group 14 Address Group 15 Address Group 16 Table 24: Relay addresses 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A Relay B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B
For two relays to communicate with one another their addresses have to be in the same address group. One relay should be assigned with address A and the other with address B. For example, if the group 1 addresses are to be used, the one relay should be set to address 1A and the other relay should be set to address 1B. A relay with address 1A will only accept messages from a relay with address 1B, and vice versa. 5.10 Clock source A clock source is required to synchronize data transmissions between the system ends. This may be provided either by the P521 relay (internal) or may be a function of the telecommunications equipment (external). The P521 relay has a setting that allows the Clock Source to either Internal or External according to the communications system configuration (COMMUNICATION/Protection/Clock Source Ch1). 5.10.1 Internal clock source signaling The Clock Source should be set to Internal at all system ends, where they are connected by direct optical fiber as the P521 at each end has to supply the clock.
Application Guide MiCOM P521 5.10.2 External clock source
The Clock Source should be set to External at all system ends, where the ends are connected by multiplexer equipment which is receiving a master clock signal from the multiplexer network. It is important that there is a single master clock source on the multiplexer network and that the multiplexer equipment at each end is synchronized to this clock. 5.11 Data rate The data rate for signaling between the two ends is application specific (COMMUNICATION/Protection/Data Rate). If there is a direct fiber connection between the ends, the data rate would usually be set to 64kbit/sec, as this gives a slightly faster trip time. If there is a multiplexer network between the ends, then this will determine the data rate to be used by the P521 system. The electrical interface to the multiplexer (G.703 co-directional, V.35, or X.21) will be provided on either a 64kbit/sec or 56kbit/sec channel, and the P521 at each end must be set to match this data rate. Generally, North American multiplexer networks are based on 56kbit/sec (and multiples thereof) channels, whereas multiplexer networks in the rest of the world are normally based on 64kbit/sec (and multiples thereof) channels. Refer to sections 5.4 to 5.7 for typical data rates for metallic/modem communications. 5.12 Communication failure An internal communication failure flag is raised if a valid message is not received by the time three power system cycles have elapsed. The flag is used to trigger the communications fail timer. 5.12.1 Communications fail timer The communication fail timer (COMMUNICATION/Protection/Comms Failed Timer) is the time for which communication errors must be continuously detected before the channel is declared failed. This governs the implementation of the communication alarm (COMMS ALARM CH1). The setting is normally set to the maximum of 9.9 seconds so that the alarm will not be given for short bursts of noise or interruptions. 5.12.2 Communications failure logic Figure 29 details the operation of the communications fail logic.

ALARM COMMS ALARM CH1
No valid messages received for 3 protection cycles
t Comms fail (Comms Fail Timer)
RELAY COMMS Fail LED COMMS Fail
Back-up Mode Activated - All back-up protection enabled e.g. Phase O/C + E/Gnd
RELAY Back-up Protection LED Back-up Protection
Idiff Fail
- Current differential protection inhibited
ALARM IDIFF FAIL LED IDIFF FAIL

P1447ENa
Figure 29: Communications failure logic 5.13 Communication error statistics To aid the bit error evaluation of the communication link, communication error statistics are kept by the relay. These give the number of Errored messages detected and the number of Valid Messages received for the communications channel. The number of errored messages detected complies with ITU-T G.821. The stored error statistics are: Valid messages Errored messages Errored seconds Severely errored seconds Propagation delay Elapsed time since reset Number of messages received OK Number of messages received and rejected Number of seconds containing 1 or more errored messages. This is not updated for severely errored seconds Number of seconds containing 30% errored messages The delay introduced by the communications channel The number of seconds since the communications error statistics were last reset
The error statistics are automatically restored on power-up. They can also be cleared using the Clear Statistics setting in Measurements column of the menu. 5.14 Communications delay tolerance timer The communications delay tolerance timer (COMMUNICATION/Protection/ Comms Delay Tol) is the maximum difference in the measured channel propagation delay time between consecutive messages that the relay will tolerate before switching the settings, as described in section 5.2.4. It is settable in the range 200 s to 10 ms. The default value is 10ms, which is suitable for protection communications using metallic/modem communications at lower data rates. A setting of 200 s is more appropriate for a data rate of 56 or 64 kbit/sec. It can be increased to a suitable value if the propagation delay time is
expected to vary considerably such as in the case of a microwave link with multiple repeaters.
MODBUS Database IEC60870-5-103 MiCOM P521
P521/EN GC/C21
MODBUS DATABASE IEC60870-5-103 MiCOM P521
8th November 2005 2 10P52101
P521/EN GC/C21
P521/EN GC/C21 Page 1/66
CONTENTS
1.
1.1
INTRODUCTION
Purpose of this document
5
5
2.
2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2
MODBUS PROTOCOL
Technical characteristics of the MODBUS connection MODBUS setting parameters Message synchronization Message validity check MiCOM relay addressing MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays MODBUS function operation Introduction Request by the master
5
5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9
2.3.2.1 Slave address 2.3.2.2 Function codes 2.3.2.3 Structure of the information field by MODBUS function 2.3.2.4 CRC16 2.3.3 Format of the P521 response to a request from a master
2.3.3.1 Slave number 2.3.3.2 Function code 2.3.3.3 Structure of the data field by MODBUS function 2.3.3.4 Byte and word order 2.3.3.5 CRC16 2.3.4 Messages validity check
2.3.4.1 Exception response 2.3.4.2 Slave number 2.3.4.3 Function code 2.3.4.4 Exception code 2.3.4.5 CRC16 2.3.5 Slave access control
3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.3.7
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
Overview 3 Dimensional MODBUS registers Mapping Page 0H: product information Page 1: non protection settings Page 2h: group 1 protection settings Page 4h: remote control words Pages 5h and 6h: reserved Page 7h: quick read relay status (MODBUS 07 function) Page 8h: time synchronization
9
9 10 10 10 15 21 25 25 25 25 25 26 26 26 27 28 44 44 44 44 44 48 48 48 48 48 49 49 49 49 49
3.3.7.1 Private format 3.3.7.2 IEC time and date format 3.3.8 Diagnostics and communications event counters
3.3.8.1 Diagnostics counters (MODBUS Function 8) 3.3.8.2 Communications event counter (MODBUS Function 11) 3.4 3.5 3.5.1 Register format Event record Specific event record extraction
3.5.1.1 Page 35h: contains 75 event records from 3500h to 354Ah 3.5.1.2 Event record format 3.5.1.3 Event table 3.5.2 3.5.3 Page 36h: oldest event record Event acknowledgement
3.5.3.1 Event acknowledgement mode 3.5.3.2 Automatic event acknowledgement mode 3.5.3.3 Manual event acknowledgement 3.5.3.4 Event acknowledgement control 3.6 3.6.1 Fault record Specific fault record
3.6.1.1 Page 37h: fault record mapping 3.6.1.2 Fault record format
MODBUS Database IEC60870-5-103 MiCOM P521 3.6.1.3 Table 1: table of fault types 3.6.1.4 Table 2: table of fault element meanings 3.6.1.5 Fault record calculation formulae 3.6.1.6 Internal CT value for each sensitivity range 3.6.2 Oldest non acknowledged fault record
P521/EN GC/C21 Page 3/66 50 50 51 51 51 51 52 52 52 52 52 52 53 53 53 54 54 55 56 56 56 57 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 59 59
3.6.2.1 Page 3Eh: oldest non acknowledged fault record 3.6.3 3.6.4 Fault record acknowledgement Event acknowledgement
3.6.4.1 Event acknowledgement mode 3.6.4.2 Automatic event acknowledgement mode 3.6.4.3 Manual event acknowledgement 3.7 3.7.1 Disturbance records Summary disturbance records
3.7.1.1 Page 3Dh: summary disturbance records 3.7.1.2 Format of summary disturbance records 3.7.2 Channel selection and configuration
3.7.2.1 Pages 38h to 3Ch: data mapping 3.7.2.2 Disturbance record channel selection and configuration format 3.7.3 Channel data
3.7.3.1 Page 9h to 21h: channel data mapping 3.7.3.2 Format of the disturbance record channel data 3.7.3.3 Calculation formulae 3.7.4 Disturbance recorder index frame
3.7.4.1 Page 22h: index frame mapping 3.7.4.2 Index frame format 3.8 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.8.3 3.8.4 Commonly required functionality CB trip and close Bit address Bit value Change setting group
3.8.4.1 Change setting group request
4.
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 4.3.6 4.3.7
IEC60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
Technical characteristics of the IEC60870-5-103 connection IEC60870-5-103 compatible application functions Application functions Initialization (reset) Time synchronization Event record extraction General interrogation Cyclic measurements General commands Disturbance record extraction
59
59 59 60 60 60 60 61 61 61 61 61 62 62
4.3.7.1 Extracting disturbance records via the MODBUS front port 4.3.8 4.3.9 Blocking of monitor direction Test mode
5.
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4
IEC60870-5-103 DETAILED IMPLEMENTATION

Compatible range information numbers in monitor direction Compatible range information numbers in control direction Private range information numbers in monitor direction Private range information numbers in control direction
63
63 64 64 66
APPENDIX A
IEC60870-5-103 Interoperability Statement
1.
1.1
INTRODUCTION
Purpose of this document This document describes the data model of the different communication protocols of the P521 relay. The available communication protocols of the MiCOM P521 relay are as follows: MODBUS RTU IEC 60870-5-103
2.
MODBUS PROTOCOL
MiCOM P521 relays can communicate by an EIA(RS)485 link behind the unit following the MODBUS RTU protocol.
2.1 2.1.1
Technical characteristics of the MODBUS connection MODBUS setting parameters Isolated two-point EIA(RS)485 connection (2kV 50Hz) MODBUS line protocol using RTU mode Selectable baud rate Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Selectable parity and No of stop bits parameters No. of Start Bits (Fixed at 1) 1 1 1 1 No. of Data Bits (Fixed at 8) 8 8 8 8 Parity None Even Odd None No Stop Bits 1 1 1 2 Total Word Length 10 11 11 11
2.1.2
Message synchronization A firm start is defined as an absence of data transmission after the last transmission for a time equal or greater to that required to send 3 characters.
P521/EN GC/C21 Page 6/66 2.1.3 Message validity check
The frame validity checking used is a 16-bit cyclical redundancy code (CRC). The generator polynomial used is: 1 + x2 + x15 + x16 = 1010 0000 0000 0001 binary = A001h 2.1.4 MiCOM relay addressing MiCOM relay addresses on the same MODBUS network should be set between 1 and 255. The 0 address is reserved for broadcast messages. 2.2 MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays The MODBUS functions implemented on the MiCOM relays are: Function No. Function 1 Function 2 Function 3 Function 4 Function 5 Function 6 Function 7 Function 8 Function 11 Function 15 Function 16 2.3 2.3.1 Function Name Read Coils Read Discrete Inputs Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers Write Single Coil Write Single Register Read Exception Status Diagnostics Get Comm Event Counter Write Multiple Coils Write Multiple Registers Description Read n bits Read n bits Read n words Read n words Write 1 bit Write 1 word Fast 1 byte read Communications Diagnostics No. of Message Completions Write n bits Write n words
MODBUS function operation Introduction MODBUS is a master/slave protocol that requires a data model of each slave device it is to communicate with. The master initiates all communication therefore the slave can only respond with either the requested data or an exception.
2.3.2
Request by the master Slave Address 1 byte Function Code 1 byte Information n bytes 16 Bit CRC 2 bytes
2.3.2.1 Slave address The slave number can be between 1 and 255. A network broadcast frame is available in MODBUS and has an address of 0 but is unsupported in the P521. 2.3.2.2 Function codes See ref. [2.2].
MODBUS Database IEC60870-5-103 MiCOM P521 2.3.2.3 Structure of the information field by MODBUS function Functions 1 to 4 Starting Address 2 bytes Functions 5 and 6 Register Address 2 bytes Function 8 Sub-Function Code 2 bytes Functions 15 and 16 Starting Address 2 bytes No. of Registers to be Written to (N) 2 bytes No. of Bytes Requested 1 bytes
No. of Registers Requested (N) 2 bytes
Register Value 2 bytes
Loopback Data N * 2 bytes
Register Value N * 2 bytes
The information field is blank for MODBUS functions 7 and 11. 2.3.2.4 CRC16 See ref. [2.1.3]. 2.3.3 Format of the P521 response to a request from a master Frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response). Slave Number 1 byte 2.3.3.1 Slave number The slave number is situated between 1 and 255. 2.3.3.2 Function code See ref. [2.2]. 2.3.3.3 Structure of the data field by MODBUS function Functions 1 and 2 Byte Count (N) 1 byte Coil Value Function Code 1 byte Data n bytes CRC16 2 bytes
N 8
* 1 byte
P521/EN GC/C21 Page 8/66 Functions 3 and 4 Byte Count (N) 1 byte Functions 5 and 6 Register Address 2 bytes Function 7 Output Data 1 byte Function 8 Sub-Function Code 2 bytes Function 11 Status 2 bytes Functions 15 and 16 Starting Address 2 bytes 2.3.3.4 Byte and word order
Register Value N * 2 bytes
Register Value 2 bytes
Data N * 2 bytes
Event Count N * 2 bytes
No. of Register Written 2 bytes
Each MODBUS word consists of 2 bytes. The bytes are transmitted in the order, low byte then high byte. If a MODBUS register consists of 2 words then the high word is transmitted before the low word. 2.3.3.5 CRC16 See ref. [2.1.3]. 2.3.4 Messages validity check When MiCOM P521 relays receive a master query, it validates the frame: If the CRC is incorrect, the frame is invalid. MiCOM P521 relays do not reply to the query. The master must re-transmit its query. If the CRC is correct but the MiCOM relay can not process the query, it sends an exception response. 2.3.4.1 Exception response Slave Number 1 byte 2.3.4.2 Slave number Function Code 1 byte Exception Code 1 byte CRC16 2 bytes
MODBUS Database IEC60870-5-103 MiCOM P521 The slave number can be between 1 and 255. 2.3.4.3 Function code
The function code returned by the MiCOM relay in the exception response is the function code sent by the master but with the most significant bit (Bit 7) forced to 1. 2.3.4.4 Exception code The MiCOM P521 relay supports 4 exception codes. Code 01 Illegal Function: The function code received in the request is invalid Code 03 Illegal Data Value: A value contained in a request data field is invalid The No. of registers written to/read from is incorrect The address of registers written to/read from is incorrect Code 05 Acknowledge: If the MiCOM P521 is processing a request from the master and a further request is sent from the master this exception code is sent to prevent any timeouts occurring in the master device. Code 0F: No disturbance record available
2.3.4.5 CRC16 See ref. [2.1.3]. 2.3.5 Slave access control Front panel access takes priority over rear panel control communication. While the password is active due to a front panel setting change, access via the front and rear control communications is prevented by the P521 responding to all requests with an exception.
3.
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
The MODBUS implementation of the relay is based on a number of memory pages being available for access via one or more MODBUS functions.
3.1
Overview
Page Page 0 Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4 Pages 5 & 6 Address Range 0000-00FF h 0100-01FF h 0200-02FF h 0300-03FF h 0400-0403 h N/A Access Rights Read only Read/Write Read/Write Read/Write Read only Reserved MODBUS Function 1, 2, 3 or 4 3, 4, 6 or 16 3, 4, 6 or 16 3, 4, 6 or 16 5 or 6 or 15 N/A Usage Product information, event flags and measurements Non-protection settings Group 1 protection settings Group 2 protection settings Remote control words Relay calibration

Page Page 7 Page 8 Pages 9 to 21 Page 22 Page 35 Page 36 Page 37 Pages 38 to 3C Page 3D Page 3E Address Range 0700 h 0800-0803 h 0900-21FA h 2200 h 3500-354A h 3600 h 3700 3704 h 3800-3C06 h 3D00 h 3E00 h Access Rights Read only Write only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only MODBUS Function 7 16 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4

Usage Quick read status byte Time synchronization Disturbance record channel data Disturbance record index frame Event records Oldest event records Fault records Disturbance recorder channel selection and configuration Summary disturbance records Oldest fault record
Note: 3.2
The recommended MODBUS functions for each page are in bold type.
3 Dimensional MODBUS registers MODBUS registers from page 9 onwards i.e. event, fault and disturbance records are three-dimensional. In order to read all the data the register contains, the specified number of words must be read. If an incorrect number of words are requested then a MODBUS exception code 03 will be returned. The number of words contained and the format of the data to be read has been documented in the format section included with each register type.
3.3
Mapping The detailed mapping of the relay pages 0 to 8 are shown in sections 3.3.1 to 3.3.7. The codes shown in the cell types columns are detailed in the table of register formats in section 3.4.
3.3.1
Page 0H: product information

MODBUS Address (Hex) Start Product Information Description Reference Software Version Rear Communications Type 0000 0002 0003 0004 0005 0005 0006 0006 F10 F10 F21 F41 32 32 10 0 127 127 65536 2 1 1 1 1 P521 ALST 2.A End Cell Type Default Value
MODBUS Text
Min
Max
Step
Units

MODBUS Address (Hex) Start Internal Phase Ratio Internal Earth Ratio Reserved Active Setting Group Password Active Hardware Alarm Status Remote Signaling Logical Inputs Status Logical Setting Status Logical Setting Status Ext. Internal Latching Output Contact Hardware State Current Differential Inst. Trip Flags I> Inst. Trip Flags I>> Inst. Trip Flags I>>> Inst. Trip Flags I>>>> Inst. Trip Flags Ie> Inst. Trip Flags Ie>> Inst. Trip Flags Ie>>> Inst. Trip Flags Cdiff Fault Flags Intertrip Fault Flags Reserved I> Fault Flags I>> Fault Flags I>>> Fault Flags I>>>> Fault Flags tI> Fault Flags tI>> Fault Flags 0010 0010 0011 0011 0012 0012 0013 0013 0014 0014 0015 0015 0016 0016 0017 0017 0018 0018 0019 0019 001A 001A 001B 001B 001C 001C 001E 001E 001F 001F 0020 0020 0021 0021 0022 0022 0023 0023 0024 0024 0025 0025 0026 0026 F17 F17 F17 F17 F17 F17 0 0 0 0 0 0 FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF 2N 2N 2 2
N
MODBUS Text
Cell Type F1 F1 F1 F24 F45 F12 F20 F20' F22 F13 F52 F17 F17 F17 F17 F16 F16 F16 F16 F53 F54
Min
Max
Step
Default Value 800

1
Units
End N/A N/A 1 N/A N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N/A N/A 2 N/A N/A 31 FFFF FFFF FFFF 511 FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF N/A N/A 1 N/A N/A 2N 2N 2N 2N 2N 2N 2N 2N 2
N
0007 0007 0008 0008 0009 000C 000D 000D 000E 000E 000F 000F
1 0
2N 2N 2
N
2N 2
N
Ie>>>> Inst. Trip Flags 001D 001D
2N 2N
2N
N
2N
Sensitivity Range Internal CT Value
0.1 to 40 len 800
0.01 to 8 len 3277
0.002 to 1 len 32700

MODBUS Address (Hex) Start tI>>> Fault Flags tI>>>> Fault Flags I< Fault Flags I2> Fault Flags I2>> Fault Flags Broken Conductor / CB Failure /CB Alarm Flags tI< Fault Flags End F17 F17 F37 F17 F16 F16 F38 F17 F36 F44 F31 F1 F43 F1 F1 F56 F64 F65 F13 F63 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FFFF FFFF 3 FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF 5 1 FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF 511 2 0027 0027 0028 0028 002A 002A 002B 002B 002C 002C 002D 002D 002E 002E
MODBUS Text
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Default Value
Units
2N 2N 2 2
N
Thermal state Fault Flags 0029 0029
2N
N
2N 2N 2N 2N 2N 1 1 2N 2N 2N 2N 2N 2N 2N 1
Non Acknowledge Alarm 002F 002F Flags Non Acknowledge Alarm 0030 0030 Flags 2 Number of Disturbance Records Available 0031 0031
Disturbance Recorder 0032 0032 Triggering Status via RL1 CB supervision flag Maintained Relay Memorization Variable TC Internal Reset of Maintained Relays Commissioning Flags Latest Fault Record Register Latest Fault Record Register2 0033 0033 0034 0034 0035 0035 0036 0036 0037 0038 0038 0038
Output Contact Function 0039 0039 State Manual CB Trip State Reserved 0039 0039 003A 003F
General Measurements Phase A Current RMS Value Phase B Current RMS Value Phase C Current RMS Value 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 0045 F18 F18 F18 F18 0 0 0 0 41000000 41000000 41000000 41000000 1 1 1 1 1/100 A 1/100 A 1/100 A 1/100
Earth Current RMS Value 0046 0047

MODBUS Address (Hex) Start Thermal State Reserved Phase A Current Peak RMS Value Phase B Current Peak RMS Value Phase C Current Peak RMS Value Phase A Current Rolling RMS Value Phase B Current Rolling RMS Value Phase C Current Rolling RMS Value Ie Harmonic Negative Phase Sequence Current Value (Fundamental) Positive Phase Sequence Current Value (Fundamental) Ratio of Positive to Negative Sequence Current Reserved End F1 0048 0048 0049 0049 004A 004B 004C 004D 004E 004F 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 F18 F18 F18 F18 F18 F18 F18 F18 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 41000000 41000000 41000000 41000000 41000000 41000000 41000000 41000000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
MODBUS Text
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Default Value
Units
% 1/100 A 1/100 A 1/100 A 1/100 A 1/100 A 1/100 A 1/100 A 1/100 A
005A 005B
F18
41000000
1/100 A
005C 005C 005D 005F
F1
41000000
% -
Current Differential Measurements Reserved Remote Ia Reserved Remote Ib Reserved Remote Ic Reserved Ia Differential Current Ib Differential Current Ic Differential Current IA Bias Current IB Bias Current IC Bias Current 0060 006B 006C 006D 006E 006F 0070 0071 0072 0073 0074 0075 0076 0083 0084 0085 0086 0087 0088 0089 008A 008B 008C 008D 008E 008F F18 F18 F18 F18 F18 F18 0 0 0 0 0 0 41000000 41000000 41000000 41000000 41000000 41000000 1 1 1 1 1 1 F18 0 41000000 1 F18 0 41000000 1 F18 0 41000000 1 1/100 A 1/100 A 1/100 A 1/100 A 1/100 A 1/100 A 1/100 A 1/100 A 1/100 A

MODBUS Address (Hex) Start Channel 1 Valid Messages Channel 1 Error Messages Channel 1 Errored Seconds Channel 1 Severely Errored Seconds Reserved Channel 1 Propagation Delay Reserved Comms. Time Elapsed Reserved Fourier Module Modulus IA Modulus IB Modulus IC Modulus IE Fourier Argument Argument IA Argument IB Argument IC Argument IE Module I2 Module I1 Reserved Rolling Demand RMS IA Average Rolling Demand RMS IB Average Rolling Demand RMS IC Average Rolling Demand RMS IA Peak Rolling Demand RMS IB Peak Rolling Demand 00C1 00C2 00C3 00C4 00C5 00C6 00C7 00C8 00C9 00CA F57 F57 F57 F57 F57 0 0 0 0 0 41000000 41000000 41000000 41000000 41000000 1 1 1 1 1 00B4 00B4 00B5 00B5 00B6 00B6 00B7 00B7 00B8 00B8 00B9 00B9 00BA 00C0 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 00B0 00B0 00B1 00B1 00B2 00B2 00B3 00B3 F1 F1 F1 F1 End F57 F57 F57 F57 0 0 0 0
4294967295
MODBUS Text
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Default Value
Units
0090 0091 0092 0093 0094 0095 0096 0097 0098 0099 009A 009B 009C 00A7 00A8 00A9 00AA 00AF
1 1 1 1 1
s s s s -
4294967295
4294967295
4294967295
F57
200000
1 1
F57
4294967295
1/100 A 1/100 A 1/100 A 1/100 A 1/100 A

MODBUS Address (Hex) Start RMS IC Peak Rolling Demand Reserved End F57 0 41000000 1
MODBUS Text
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Default Value
Units
00CB 00CC 00CD 00FF
1/100 A -
3.3.2
Page 1: non protection settings

MODBUS Address (Hex) Start Remote Parameters Address Reserved Password Frequency Phase A Label Phase B Label Phase C Label Earth Label Default Display 0100 0100 0101 0101 0102 0103 0104 0104 0105 0105 0106 0106 0107 0107 0108 0108 0109 0109 F10 F1 F25 F25 F25 F25 F26 F10 F31 F12 F31 F50 65 50 L1 L2 L3 N 1 48 1 0 1 0 90 60 A-R B-S C-T G-E 4 90 5 31 5 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 AAAA 50 L1 L2 L3 N 1 ALST 5 0 5 0 F1 1 255 1 1 Hz End Cell Type Default Value
MODBUS Text
Min
Max
Step
Units
User Reference (characters 1, 2, 3 and 010A 010B 4) Fault Number Selected 010C 010C Digital Inputs Setting 010D 010D Number of Instantaneous Faults to 010E 010E Display Voltage Input Setting on the Digital Inputs 010F 010F
CB Monitoring Measurements Operation Number CB Operating Time Sum of Phase A Broken CB Current Squared Sum of Phase B Broken CB Current Squared Sum of Phase C Broken CB Current Squared 0110 0110 0111 0111 0112 0113 F1 F1 F18 0 600000 1 1 1/100 s An
0114 0115
F18
An
0116 0117
F18
An

MODBUS Address (Hex) Start CB Closing Time Manual CB Trip CB Trip Manual Delay CB Close Manual Delay Reserved Status of Output Latched Relays Ratio Primary Phase CT Value Secondary Phase CT Value Secondary Earth CT Value CT Ratio Correction Vector Compensation Reserved Phase Rotation Communications Speed Parity Stop Bit COM Available Data Format Reserved Protection Comms. Protocol Data Rate Relay Address Clock Source Ch1 Reserved 0140 0140 0141 0141 0142 0142 0143 0143 0144 0147 F58 F59 F60 F61 0 0 0 0 1 3 31 1 1 1 1 1 0130 0130 0131 0131 0132 0132 0133 0133 0134 0134 0135 013F F4 F5 F29 F30 F48 0 0 0 0 0 7 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0120 0120 0121 0121 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F66 F51 1 1 1 1 50 0 0 9999 5 9999 5 2000 14 1 1 4 1 4 1 1 1 End F1 F63 F1 F1 N/A F14 0 0 0 0 N/A 0 600000 2 6000 6000 N/A 3FF 1 1 100 100 N/A 2N 0118 0118 0119 0119 011A 011A 011B 011B 011C 011E 011F 011F
MODBUS Text
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Default Value
Units
1/100 s 0 0 1/100 s 1/100 s -
1000 1 1000 1 1000 0 0
1/0.001 -
Primary Earth CT Value 0122 0122 0123 0123 0124 0124 0125 0125 0126 012E 012F 012F
6= 19200 0= without 0= 1 stop bit 1 = com available 0= Private
0 = SDLC 0= 64kbps 0 = 1A 0= Internal

MODBUS Address (Hex) Start Comm Fail Timer Comm Delay Tol. Char Mod Time Reserved Configuration Active Setting Group 2 Inst. Self Reset Change Group Input Alarm Battery LEDs Allocation Led 5 Led 6 Led 7 Led 8 Led PF 5 Led PF 6 Led PF 7 Led PF 8 Led PFA 5 Led PFA 6 Led PFA 7 Led PFA 8 0154 0154 0155 0155 0156 0156 0157 0157 0158 0158 0159 0159 015A 015A 015B 015B F19 F19 F19 F19 F19' F19' F19' F19' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0150 0150 0151 0151 0152 0152 0153 0153 F1 F1 F47 F1 1 0 0 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 End F1 F57 F57 0 20 0 999 1000 10000 1 2 10 0148 0148 0149 014A 014B 014C 014D 014F
MODBUS Text
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Default Value 999 1000 10000
Units
1/100 s 1/100 ms 1/100 s -
1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
015C 015C F19'' 015D 015D F19'' 015E 015E 015F 015F F19'' F19''
Commissioning Options Commissioning Options? Led Testing Output Contacts Test Relays Circuit breaker Measurements Communications Loopback 0160 0160 0161 0161 0162 0162 0164 0164 0165 0165 0166 0166 F24 F24 F24 F62 F24 F24 F24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 FFFF 1 1 1 1 1 1 2N 1 1 1 0 = No 0 = No 0 = No 0 0 = No 0 = No 0 = No -
Relays selected for Test 0163 0163
* Note: Edge must be set in change group input.

MODBUS Address (Hex) Start Logic Input Allocation Logic Input 1 Logic Input 2 Logic Input 3 Logic Input 4 Logic Input 5 Reserved Logic Input 1F Logic Input 2F Logic Input 3F Logic Input 4F Logic Input 5F Reserved Auxiliary Timer 1 Auxiliary Timer 2 Output Contact Inversion Reserved 0167 0167 0168 0168 0169 0169 016A 016A 016B 016B 016C 016F 0170 0170 0171 0171 0172 0172 0173 0173 0174 0174 0175 0178 0179 0179 017A 017A 01A4 01A4 01A5 017F F1 F1 F14 0 0 0 20000 20000 FFFF 1 1 2N F20' F20' F20' F20' F20' 0 0 0 0 0 FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF 2
N
MODBUS Text
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Default Value
Units
End F20 F20 F20 F20 F20 0 0 0 0 0 FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF 2N 2
N
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1/100 s 1/100 s -
2N 2
N
2N
2N 2N 2
N
2N
Output Relay Allocation Broken Conductor Detection CB Failure I< I2> I2>> Thermal Overload Alarm tAUX1 tAUX2 CB Close CB Alarm 0180 0180 0181 0181 0182 0182 0183 0183 0184 0184 0185 0185 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
Thermal Overload Trip 0186 0186 0187 0187 0188 0188 0189 0189 018A 018A
Trip Circuit Supervision 018B 018B Failure Active Setting Group Trip tI> 018C 018C 018D 018D 018E 018E

MODBUS Address (Hex) Start tI>> tI>>> tI>>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> tIe>>>> I> I>> I>>> I>>>> Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> Ie>>>> Idiff Backup C fail Direct Intertrip C-Diff Intertrip PIT Reserved Relay Logic Trip Trip 2 Relay Latching Relay Latching 2 Blocking Logic 1 Blocking Logic 2 01A6 01A6 01A7 01A7 01A8 01A8 01A9 01A9 01AA 01AA 01AB 01AB F6 F6' F8 F8' F8''' F8''' 0 0 0 0 0 0 FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF 1 1 1 1 1 1 End F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 018F 018F 0190 0190 0191 0191 0192 0192 0193 0193 0194 0194 0195 0195 0196 0196 0197 0197 0198 0198 0199 0199 019A 019A 019B 019B 019C 019C 019D 019D 019E 019E 019F 019F 01A0 01A0 01A1 01A1 01A2 01A2 01A3 01A3 01A4 01A5
MODBUS Text
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Default Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Units
FFFF 7 0 0 0 0
Broken Conductor Detection Broken Conductor Detection TBC I2/I1 Threshold Cold Load Start Cold Load Start 01AF 01AF F24 0 1 1 0 01AC 01AC 01AD 01AD 01AE 01AE F24 F1 F1 0 5 20 1 14400 100 0.44 1 1 0 5 20 s %

MODBUS Address (Hex) Start Cold Load Start Thresholds Cold Load Start % Cold Load Start Delay End F33 F1 F1 0 20 1 FFFF 500 36000 1 1 1
MODBUS Text
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Default Value
Units
01B0 01B0 01B1 01B1 01B2 01B2
0 200 400
% 1/10s
Selective Scheme Logic Selective Scheme Logic 01B3 01B3 1 tSEL1 01B4 01B4 Selective Scheme Logic 01B5 01B5 2 tSEL2 Reserved 01B6 01B6 01B7 01BF F40 F1 F40 F1 0 0 0 0 FFFF 15000 FFFF 15000 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1/100 s 1/100 s -
Selective Intertripping Direct Intertrip Reserved Disturbance Pre-Time Post-Time Disturbance Starting Condition 01C0 01C0 01C1 01C1 01C2 01C2 F1 F1 F32 0 0 0 30 30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1= on trip 1/10 s 1/10 s 01B7 01B7 01B8 01BF F67 0 FFFF 1 0 -
Circuit Breaker Supervision TC Supervision? t Trip Circuit CB Open Supervision? CB Open Time CB Close Supervision? CB Close Time CB Open Alarm? CB Open NB Sum Amps (n)? Sum Amps (n) N t Open Pulse t Close Pulse Time Peak Value Peak Value 01D0 01D0 F42 5 60 TI 5 Min 01C3 01C3 01C4 01C4 01C5 01C5 01C6 01C6 01C7 01C7 01C8 01C8 01C9 01C9 01CA 01CA 01CB 01CB 01CC 01CC 01CD 01CD 01CE 01CE 01CF 01CF F24 F1 F24 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 0 10 0 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 1 10 10 1 10000 1 100 1 100 1 50000 1 4000 2 500 500 1 5 1 5 1 5 2 1 1 1 1 5 5 0 40 0 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 1 10 10 1/100s 1/100s 1/100s MA^n 1/100 s 1/100 s

MODBUS Address (Hex) Start CB Fail CB Failure I< TBF Block Instantaneous Phase Block Instantaneous Earth Rolling Demand Rolling Sub Periods Reserved 01D6 01D6 01D8 01FF F1 F1 N/A 1 1 N/A 60 24 N/A 1 1 N/A 01D1 01D1 01D2 01D2 01D3 01D3 01D4 01D4 01D5 01D5 F24 F1 F1 F24 F24 0 2 0 0 0 1 100 10000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 End
MODBUS Text
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Default Value
Units
0 10 10 0 = No 0 = No
1/100In 1/100s -
5 1
MN -
Number of Sub Periods 01D7 01D7
3.3.3
Page 2h: group 1 protection settings

MODBUS Address (Hex) Start Setting Group 1 Current Differential Current Diff.? Is1 Is2 K1 K2 Time Delay Type tIdiff Value IDMT Curve Type TMS Time Dial PIT Time PIT I Disabled Inrush Restraint Reserved Rx DIT Dwell Time IDiff High Set 0200 0200 0201 0201 0202 0202 0203 0203 0204 0204 0205 0205 0206 0206 0207 0207 0208 0208 0209 020A 020B 020B 020C 020C 020D 020D 020E 020F 020E 020E 020F 020F F1 F1 10 400 500 3200 0 1 10 400 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F27 F1 F3 F1 F57 F1 F24 F24 0 10 100 0 30 0 0 0 25 100 5 0 0 1 200 3000 150 150 1 15000 9 1500 200 1 1 1 2 5 5 5 1 1 1 25 1 1 1 1 = Yes 20 200 30 150 0 = DMT 0 1 = SI 1000 100 20 0 0 1/100s 1/1000 1/1000 1/100s 1/100s 1/100 In 1/100 1/100 % % End Cell Type Default Value
MODBUS Text
Min
Max
Step
Units
100000 100

MODBUS Address (Hex) Start Overcurrent I> I> Threshold I> Delay Type I> Curve Type I> TMS Value t> TD Value I> K Value (RI Curve) tI> Value I> Reset Type I> RTMS Value I> tRESET Value I>> I>> Threshold I>> Delay Type I>> Curve Type I>> TMS Value I>> TD Value tI>> Value I>> Reset Type I>> RTMS Value I>> tRESET Value I>>> I>>> Value tI>>> Value I>>>> I>>>> Value tI>>>> Value Ie> Ie> Value (Normal) Ie> Value (Sensitive) 0210 0210 0211 0211 0212 0212 0213 0213 0214 0214 0215 0216 0217 0217 0218 0218 0219 0219 021A 021A 021B 021B 021C 021C 021D 021D 021E 021E 021F 021F 0220 0220 0221 0222 0224 0224 0225 0225 0226 0226 0227 0227 0228 0228 0229 0229 022A 022A 022B 022B 022C 022C 022D 022D 022E 022E 022F 022F 022F 022F F24 F1 F27 F3 F1 F57 F1 F1 F27 F1 F1 F24 F1 F27 F3 F1 F57 F1 F1 F27 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F27 0 10 0 0 25 100 100 0 0 25 4 0 50 0 0 25 100 100 0 0 25 4 0 50 0 0 50 0 0 10 10 2 0 2 2500 2 9 1500 10000 15000 1 3200 10000 2 4000 2 9 1500 10000 15000 1 3200 10000 2 4000 15000 2 4000 15000 2 2500 1000 1000 3 1 1 1 1 25 5 1 1 25 1 1 5 1 1 25 5 1 1 25 1 1 5 1 1 5 1 1 1 5 1 1 End
MODBUS Text
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Default Value
Units
0 = No 100 0 = DMT 1 = SI 1000 1000 100 4 0 25 4 0 = No 100 0 = DMT 1 = SI 1000 100 100 4 0 25 4 0 = No 2000 1 0 = No 2000 1 0 = No 10 10 2 0 = DMT
1/100 In 1/1000 1/1000 1/1000s 1/100s 1/1000 1/100 s 1/100 In 1/1000 1/1000 1/1000 1/100 s 1/1000 1/100s 1/100 In 1/100 s 1/100 1/100 s 1/100 Ion 1/1000 Ion 1/1000 Ion -
100000 100
100000 100
I>> K Value (RI Curve) 0223 0223
Ie> Value (V. Sensitive) 022F 022F Ie> Time Delay Type 0230 0230

MODBUS Address (Hex) Start Ie> IDMT Curve Type Ie> TMS Value Ie> TD Value Ie> K Value (RI Curve) tIe> Value Ie> Reset Type Ie> RTMS Value Ie> tRESET Value Ie> Laborlec Ie>> Ie>> Value (Normal) Ie>> Value (Sensitive) Ie>> Value (V. Sensitive) Ie>> IDMT Curve Type Ie>> TMS Value Ie>> TD Value Ie>> K Value (RI Curve) tIe>> Value Ie>> Reset Type Ie>> RTMS Value Ie>> tRESET Value Ie>>Laborlec Ie>>> Ie>>> Value (Normal) Ie>>> Value (Sensitive) Ie>>> Value (V. Sensitive) tIe>>> Value Ie>>>> End F3 F1 F57 F1 F1 F27 F1 F1 F3' F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F3 F1 F57 F1 F1 F27 F1 F1 F3' F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 0 25 100 100 0 0 25 4 0 0 50 10 2 0 0 25 100 100 0 0 25 4 0 0 50 10 2 0 0 9 1500 10000 15000 1 3200 10000 2 2 4000 8000 1000 3 9 1500 1 25 5 1 1 25 1 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 25 0231 0231 0232 0232 0233 0234 0235 0235 0236 0236 0237 0237 0238 0238 0239 0239 023A 023A 023B 023B 023C 023C 023C 023C 023C 023C
MODBUS Text
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Default Value 1 = SI 1000 100 100 4 0 = DMT 25 4 0= Curve 1 0 = No 100 100 100 0 =DMT 1 = SI 1000 100 100 1 0 = DMT 25 4 0= Curve 1 0 = No 100 100 100 1 0 = No
Units
1/1000 1/1000 1/1000 1/100 1/1000 1/100s 1/100 Ion 1/1000 Ion 1/1000 Ion 1/1000 1/1000 1/1000 1/100 1/1000 1/100s 1/100 Ion 1/1000 Ion 1/1000 Ion 1/100 -
100000 100
Ie>> Time Delay Type 023D 023D 023E 023E 023F 023F 0240 0241 0242 0242 0243 0243 0244 0244 0245 0245 0246 0246 0247 0247 0248 0248 0249 0249 0249 0249 0249 0249 024A 024A 024B 024B
100000 100 10000 15000 1 3200 10000 2 2 4000 8000 1000 15000 2 5 1 1 25 1 1 1 1 5 1 1 1

MODBUS Address (Hex) Start Ie>>>> Value (Normal) Ie>>>> Value (Sensitive) Ie>>>> Value (V. Sensitive) tIe>>>> Value Thermal Ith> Ith> Value Reserved Ith> K Value Ith> Trip Threshold Ith> Alarm Ith> Alarm Threshold Te1 Reserved Negative sequence I2> I2> Threshold I2> Delay Type I2> Curve I2> TMS Value I2> TD Value I2> K Value (RI) tI2> Value I2> Reset Type I2> RTMS Value I2> tRESET Value I2>> I2>> Threshold tI2>> Undercurrent I< I< Threshold tI2< Value Reserved 0266 0266 0267 0267 0268 0268 0269 02FF F24 F1 F1 0 2 0 1 100 15000 1 1 1 0257 0257 0258 0258 0259 0259 025A 025A 025B 025B 25C 025D 025E 025E 025F 025F 0260 0260 0261 0261 0262 0262 0263 0263 0264 0264 0265 0265 F24 F1 F27 F3 F1 F57 F1 F1 F27 F1 F1 F27 F1 F1 0 10 0 0 25 100 100 0 0 25 4 0 10 0 1 4000 2 9 1500 10000 15000 1 3200 10000 1 4000 15000 1 1 1 1 25 5 1 1 25 1 1 1 1 024E 024E 024F 024F 0250 0250 0251 0251 0252 0252 0253 0253 0254 0254 0255 0255 0256 0256 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 100 50 0 50 1 150 200 1 200 200 1 1 1 1 1 F24 F1 0 10 1 320 1 1 End F1 F1 F1 F1 50 10 2 0 4000 8000 1000 15000 1 5 1 1
MODBUS Text
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Default Value
Units
024C 024C 024C 024C 024C 024C 024D 024D
100 100 100 1
1/100 Ion 1/1000 Ion 1/1000 Ion 1/100
0 = No 100 105 100 0 = No 90 1
1/100 1/100 % % Mn
0 = No 100 0 = DMT 1 = SI 1000 100 100 0 0 = DMT 25 4 0 = No 100 0
In/100 1/1000 1/1000 1/1000 1/100s 1/1000 1/100 s 1/100 1/100s
100000 100
0 = No 20 0
1/100 1/100 -
MODBUS Database IEC60870-5-103 MiCOM P521 3.3.4 Page 4h: remote control words
MODBUS Address (Hex) Start Remote Control Remote Control Word 1 Reserved Reserved Remote Control Word 3 0400 0400 0401 0401 0402 0402 0403 0403 F9 N/A N/A F46 0 N/A N/A 0 31 N/A N/A 511 1 N/A N/A 1 End Cell Type
MODBUS Text
Min
Max
Step
Default Value
Units
3.3.5 3.3.6
Pages 5h and 6h: reserved Page 7h: quick read relay status (MODBUS 07 function)
MODBUS Text Relay Status 0700 0700 0701 F23 0 7 1 MODBUS Address Start End Cell Type Min Max Step Default Value Units
3.3.7
Page 8h: time synchronization The time synchronization format is set by the date format setting at MODBUS address 134h. Following a successful time synchronization via the rear port communications, an acknowledgement bit is set at address 0700h for a period of 60s.
3.3.7.1 Private format

MODBUS Text Year (MSB + LSB) Month (MSB) Day (LSB) Hour (MSB) Minute (LSB) millisecond (MSB + LSB) MODBUS Address Start 0800 0801 0801 0802 0802 0803 End 0800 0801 0801 0802 0802 0803 1994 1 1 0 0 0 2092 12 31 23 59 59999 1 1 1 1 1 1 Min Max Step Default Value 1994 01 01 01 01 0 Units Years Months Days Hours Minutes Milliseconds
P521/EN GC/C21 Page 26/66 3.3.7.2 IEC time and date format Inverted IEC 870-5-4 CP56Time2a:
MODBUS Address 0800 0801 0802 0803 S R R 7 6 5 4 R Month Hours Millisecond (MSB)
IV
7 R
3 R
Day of Week R
Day of Month Minutes Millisecond (LSB)
Notes:
Summer time (SU): Standard = 0, Summer Time = 1 Iv = Invalid value: Valid = 0, Non valid or non synchronized in system case = 1 The first day of the week is Monday R = Reserved bit
3.3.8
Diagnostics and communications event counters The MODBUS Diagnostics and Communications Event Counters can be accessed by the use of MODBUS Functions 8 and 11 respectively. These counters allow users to monitor the performance of the communications system, alongside the aiding in the detection of the communication systems internal error conditions.
3.3.8.1 Diagnostics counters (MODBUS Function 8) The MODBUS sub-functions supported by the MODBUS Diagnostics function are: Sub-Function No. (Decimal) 0 1 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 Return Query Data: Data sent in the Information Field is echoed back in the response allowing a loopback test to be performed. Sub-Function Name Return Query Data Restart Communications Option Force Listen Only Mode Clear Counter and Diagnostic Register Return Bus Message Count Return Bus Communication Error Count Return Bus Exception Error Count Return Slave Message Count Return Slave No Response Count
MODBUS Database IEC60870-5-103 MiCOM P521 Restart Communications Option:
Forces the communications in the slave device to be re-initialized and all event counters to be cleared. This command is the only command that will bring the slave device out of the Listen Only Mode. Force Listen Mode Only: Forces the slave device to enter the Listen Only Mode isolating the device from other devices on the network. While in this mode, no actions will be taken to any messages sent to the slave device via the slave or broadcast address. To remove the slave device from this mode, the Restart Communications Option command must be used. Clear Counters and Diagnostic Register: Forces all counters to be cleared. Note that all counters are cleared on slave power-up. Return Bus Message Count: A response to this request returns the number of valid messages seen on the communications system by the slave device since the counters were previously cleared3. Return Bus Communication Error Count: A response to this request returns the number of CRC errors that the slave device has detected on the communications system since the counters were previously cleared3. Return Bus Exception Error Count: A response to this request returns the number of exception responses that have been sent by the slave device since the counters were previously cleared. Return Slave Message Count: A response to this request returns the number of processed messages that have been addressed to the slave device via the slave or broadcast address since the counters were previously cleared. Return Slave No Response Count: A response to this request returns the number of processed messages that have been addressed to the slave device but no response has been sent to the master. 3.3.8.2 Communications event counter (MODBUS Function 11) This counter allows the user to determine the number of successful message completions that have been performed by the slave device. The counter does not include the following message completions: Exception responses Poll commands Fetch event counter commands
For rear port communications only, a hardware address filter is used to increase the efficiency of the communications processing, therefore the counter value is only valid for messages addressed to the slave device via the slave or broadcast address.
Using the following diagnostics sub-functions the event counter can be reset: Restart communications option Clear counters and diagnostics register The status word in the response shows the busy state of the relay communications. This value is always zero due to the nature of the communications implemented in the slave device. 3.4 Register format
Code F1 F2 F3 Description Unsigned Integer Numerical Data: 65535 Signed Integer Numerical Data: -32768 32767 Unsigned Integer Curves Type F3' Unsigned Integer Type Ground Curves F4 Unsigned Integer: MODBUS Speed F5 Unsigned Integer: Parity 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 0 1 2 STI (IEC) SI (IEC) VI (IEC) EI (IEC) LTI (IEC) TI (C02) MI (ANSI) LTI (CO8) VI (ANSI) EI (ANSI) Network 1 Network 2 Source 3 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Reserved None Even Odd Flag Information Bit Value Data

Code Description

Flag Information Bit Value 3-15 Reserved tI> tI>> tI>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> I< tIth> Broken Conductor Detection tAux 1 tAux 2 tI2> tI2>> tI>>>> tIe>>>> tidiff Trip Direct Intertrip Trip Current Differential Intertrip Trip Permissive Intertrip Reserved Data
F6
Unsigned Integer: Tripping Configuration
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 3 -
F6
Unsigned Integer: Extended Tripping Configuration
0 1 2 3 - 15
F7 F8
Reserved Unsigned Integer: Latching Configuration 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 I> Latching I>> I>>> Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> I< tIth> Broken Conductor Detection tAux 1 tAux 2 I2> I2>> I>>>>

Code Description

Flag Information Bit 14 15 Value 16384 32768 1 2 4 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 Ie>>>> Idiff Latch Direct Intertrip Latch Current Differential Intertrip Latch Permissive Intertrip Reserved I> Blocking I>> I>>> Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> Reserved tIth> Broken Conductor Detection tAux 1 tAux 2 tI2> I2>> I>>>> Ie>>>> Idiff Tripping Contact De-latched 1st Alarm Acknowledge All Alarms Acknowledge Remote Tripping Remote Closing Setting Group Change4 Thermal State Reset Reset Max and Average Current Measurements Disturbance Record Remote Start Reserved Reserved Data
F8'
Unsigned Integer: Extended Latching Configuration
0 1 2 3 - 15
F8''
Unsigned Integer: Blocking Logic Configuration
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
F9
Unsigned Integer: Remote Control 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Note: The Change Group Input setting must be set to EDGE.

Code Description

Flag Information Bit 11 12 13 14 15 Value 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 32-127 32-127 Reserved Acknowledgement Oldest Event Acknowledge Oldest Fault Acknowledge Hardware SRAM Alarm Acknowledge ASCII Character1 ASCII Character 2 Data
F10
2 Characters ASCII
F11 F12
Reserved Unsigned Integer: Logic Input Status 0 1 2 3 4 5 - 15 1 2 4 8 16 Logic Input Number 1 Logic Input Number 2 Logic Input Number 3 Logic Input Number 4 Logic Input Number 5 Reserved 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 Logic Output Number RL1 (Tripping) Logic Output Number RL2 Logic Output Number RL3 Logic Output Number RL4 Logic Output Number RL0 (Watchdog) Logic Output Number RL5 Logic Output Number RL6 Logic Output Number RL7 Logic Output Number RL8 Reserved Selection Logic Output Number RL2 Selection Logic Output Number RL3 Selection Logic Output Number RL4 Selection Logic Output Number RL5 Selection Logic Output Number RL6 Selection Logic Output Number RL7 Selection Logic Output Number RL8
F13
Unsigned Integer: Logic Outputs Status
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - 15
F14
Unsigned Integer: Logic Outputs Configuration
0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Code Description

Flag Information Bit 7 - 15 Value 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 1 2 32 64 Reserved De-latch Allocation Allocation 52 a Allocation 52 b Allocation External CB Failure Allocation External Input 1 Allocation External Input 2 Allocation Logic Blocking 1 Allocation Logic Blocking 2 Allocation Disturbance Start Allocation Cold Load Start Allocation Selective Scheme Logic 1 Allocation Selective Scheme Logic 2 Allocation Change of Setting Group Allocation Re-closer Locked Allocation Thermal State Reset Allocation Trip Circuit Supervision Start tBF Permissive Intertrip Direct Intertrip Communication Reset Remote Trip via Logic Input Remote Close via Logic Input Reserved Overcurrent start (Ie>, Ie>>, Ie>>>, Ie>>>>) Reserved Reserved Start Information Ie> or Ie>> or Ie>>> or Ie>>>> Tripping Information tIe> or tIe>> or tIe>>> or tIe>>>> Reserved Overcurrent Start (I>, I>>, I>>>, I>>>>) Data
F15
Unsigned Integer: Logical Input Allocation
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
F15'
Unsigned Integer: Logical Input Allocation
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 - 15
F16
Unsigned Integer: Threshold Earth Information Status
0 1 1-4 5 6
7 - 15 F17 Unsigned Integer: Threshold Phase Information Status 0

Code Description

Flag Information Bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 15 Value 2 4 8 16 32 64 -2147483648 to 2147483647 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 Data Instantaneous IA Instantaneous IB Instantaneous IC Reserved Instantaneous Information I> or I>> or I>>> or I>>>> Tripping Information tI> or tI>> or tI>>> tI>>>> Reserved Numerical Data
F18
Long Integer:
F19
Unsigned Integer: LEDs Allocation
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
I> tI> I>> tI>> I>>> tI>>> Ie> tIe> Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>> tIe>>> Thermal Overload Trip tI2> Broken Conductor Trip CB Failure Logic Input 1 Logic Input 2 Logic Input 3 Logic Input 4 Logic Input 5 Reserved Reserved Aux 1 Aux2 t12>> I>>>>
F19'
Unsigned Integer: Extended LEDs Allocation
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Code Description

Flag Information Bit 11 12 13 14 - 15 Value 2048 4096 8192 tI>>>> Ie>>>> tIe>>>> Reserved Reserved 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 Idiff Idiff Fail Back-up Protection Enabled Protection Comms Fail Direct Intertrip Current Differential Intertrip Permissive Intertrip CB Alarm Reserved Selective Scheme Logic 1 Selective Scheme Logic 2 Relay De-latch CB Position (52 a) CB Position (52 b) CB Failure Aux. 1 Aux. 2 Blocking Logic 1 Blocking Logic 2 Disturbance Record Start Cold Load Start Setting Group Change Reserved 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 Thermal State Reset Trip Circuit Supervision Start tBF Input Energized Idiff Permissive Input Energized Idiff Direct Input Energized Idiff Comms Input Energized Manual CB Trip Manual CB Close Data
F19''
Unsigned Integer: 2nd Extension LEDs Allocation
0-1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 - 15
F20
Unsigned Integer: Logic Input Data Status
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
F20'
Unsigned Integer: Extended Logic Data Status
0 1 2 3 4 5

Code Description

Flag Information Bit 6 - 15 Value 10 0 1 - 15 1 1 2 4 8 16 Reserved e.g.10 = Version 1.A Latching Reserved Major Hardware Alarm Minor Hardware Alarm Presence of Non Acknowledged Event Time Synchronization Acknowledgement Presence of Non Acknowledged Disturbance Record Presence of Non Acknowledged Fault Record Reserved Function disabled Function enabled Reserved 0 1 2 L1, L2, L3 and N A, B, C and E R, S, T and O IA Measurement Display (True RMS) IB Measurement Display (True RMS) IC Measurement Display (True RMS) IN Measurement Display (True RMS) DMT Time Delay IDMT Time Delay RI Time Delay DMT Time Delay IDMT Time Delay RI Time Delay Belgium Curves Data
F21 F22
Unsigned Integer: Software Version Unsigned Integer: Internal Logic Data
F23
Unsigned Integer: Relay Status
0 1 2 3 4
5 6-7 F24 Unsigned Integer: Relay Function Status 0 1 2 - 15 F25 Phase Indication Text Selection -
32 -
F26
IA, IB, IC, IN Measurement Display (True RMS)
1 2 3 4 0 1 2 0 1 2 3
F27
Time Delay Type
F27'
Time Delay Type
F28 F29
Reserved Communications Stop Bits 0 1 1 Stop Bit 2 Stop Bits

Code F30 Description Communication Availability

Flag Information Bit Value 0 1 Data Communications Non Available Communications Available None 1 Disturbance Record Available 2 Disturbance Record Available 3 Disturbance Record Available 4 Disturbance Record Available 5 Disturbance Record Available Disturbance Record Start on any Instantaneous Event. Disturbance Record Start on any Trip Event tI> tI>> tI>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> Thermal Overload Trip tI2> tI2>> tI2>>>> tIe>>>> Reserved
F31
Unsigned Integer: Number of Available Disturbance Records
0 1 2 3 4 5
F32
Unsigned Integer: Disturbance Record Start Status
0 1
F33
Cold Load Start Thresholds
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 - 15
1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 -
F34 F35
Reserved Disturbance Record Uploading Status 0 1 1 2 4 8 16 32 No Disturbance Record Uploaded Disturbance Record Upload Running Ie> tIe> Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>> tIe>>>
F36
Memorized Flags of Non Acknowledged Alarms:
0 1 2 3 4 5

Code Description

Flag Information Bit 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Value 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 1 2 1 Data Thermal Overload Alarm Thermal Overload Trip Broken Conductor CB Failure I2> I2>> tI2> tAux1 tAux2 tI2>> CB Open Timer Expired CB Number of Operations Summation Amps Exceeded Threshold CB Supervision CB Supervision CB Close Timer Expired Ie>>>> Start Alarm Ie>>>> Trip Alarm Reserved Thermal Overload Alarm Thermal Overload Trip Reserved Reserved
F36'
Memorized Flags of Non Acknowledged Alarms 2:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 15
F37
Unsigned Integer: Thermal Overload Information
0 1 2 - 15
F38
Unsigned Integer: CB Alarm/CB Failure/Broken Conductor Flags
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096
CB Failure Pole A Opening Pole B Opening Pole C Opening Broken Conductor tAux1 tAux2 Broken Conductor Time Delay CB Failure Time Delay Cold Load Pickup Time Delay CB Alarms or Bits 0, 1, 2, 4 of F43 CB In Unknown State (DBI)

Code Description

Flag Information Bit 13 14 15 Value 8192 16384 Data Remote Trip Delay Remote Close Delay Reserved
F39 F40
Reserved Unsigned Integer: Selective Scheme Logic Configuration 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 - 15 1 2 4 8 16 32 1 2 4 0 1 2 3 4 1 2 4 8 16 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 tI>> tI>>> tIe>> tIe>>> tI>>>> tIe>>>> Reserved MODBUS Reserved IEC 60870-5-103 Reserved 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 15 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes CB Operating Time Expired CB Operation Number Expired Square Amps Sum Exceeded Trip Circuit Supervision CB Closing Time Expired Reserved CB Operating Time Overreach, Memorized Alarm CB Operation Number Overreach, Memorized Alarm Square Amps Sum Overreach, Memorized Alarm Trip Circuit Self-Test, Memorized Alarm CB Closing Time Overreach, Memorized Alarm Ie>>>> Alarm tIe>>>> Alarm
F41
Rear Port Allocation for Communications
F42
Time Window Format
F43
Unsigned Integer: CB Supervision Flag
0 1 2 3 4 5 - 15
F44
Unsigned Integer: Alarm Information 2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Code Description

Flag Information Bit 7 - 15 Value 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 0 1 Reserved Watchdog Communication Failure EEPROM Data Failure CT Failure Real Time Clock Failure EEPROM Calibration Failure SRAM Failure Battery Failure Comms FPGA Total Failure Reprogramming Comms FPGA in Progress Factory Default Settings Restored Reserved Initiate Ie Harmonic Calculation De-latch Trip Relay Only (RL1) Acknowledge Oldest Disturbance Record Reserved Reset Rolling Demand Measurements Reset Peak Average Measurements Clear the Protection Communication Statistics Cancel Remote Trip Sequence Cancel Remote Close Sequence Reserved Edge triggered changes of logic inputs Level triggered changes of logic inputs Private Date Format IEC Date Format DC AC Direct Phase Rotation ABC Inverse Phase Rotation ACB Data
F45
Unsigned Integer: Relay Status
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 - 15
F46
Unsigned Integer: Remote Control Word 3
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - 15
F47
Change Group Input
F48
MODBUS Date Format
0 1
F49 F50
Reserved Opto Power Supply
0 1
F51
Phase Rotation
0 1

Code F52 Description In Progress Flag for Current Differential

Flag Information Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Value 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 4 8 16 Data Disable Current Differential Protection Protection Communication Fail (Alarm Not Activated) Current differential fail Current differential protection ok Idiff Trip Any Phase Idiff A Phase Fault Idiff B Phase Fault Idiff C Phase Fault Back-Up Enabled Protection Communications alarm (Fail Timer Expired) Protection Communications Ok Idiff Start on any phase Direct Intertrip Rx Permissive Intertrip Rx Idiff Intertrip Rx Permissive Intertrip Start Rx Current Differential protection disabled Reserved Current differential fail Reserved Idiff Trip any phase Reserved 512 1 2 3 4 Protection Communications Alarm (Fail timer Expired) Reserved Direct Intertrip R1 Trip Current Differential Intertrip R1 Trip Permissive Intertrip Start R1 Permissive Intertrip Trip R1 Reserved
F53
Current Differential Memory Protection Flags
0 1 2 3 4 5- 8 9 10 - 15
F54
Intertrip Flags
0 1 2 3 -
F55 F56
Reserved Commissioning Flags 0 1 2 Output Contacts Disabled Protection Communications Loopback Mode Enabled Reserved

Code F57 F58 Description Unsigned Long Integer Protection Communication Protocol

Flag Information Bit Value 4294967295 0 Data Numerical Data SDLC
1 2 F59 Protection Communication Data Rate 0 1 2 3 F60 Protection Communication Relay Address 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
NRZ Inverted NRZ 64 kbits/Sec 56 kbits/Sec 19.2 kbits/Sec 9.6 kbits/Sec 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B 7A 7B 8A 8B 9A 9B 10A 10B 11A 11B 12A 12B 13A

Code Description

Flag Information Bit Value 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Data 13B 14A 14B 15A 15B 16A 16B Internal External Selection Logic Output Number RL1 Selection Logic Output Number RL2 Selection Logic Output Number RL3 Selection Logic Output Number RL4 Selection Logic Output Number RL5 Selection Logic Output Number RL6 Selection Logic Output Number RL7 Selection Logic Output Number RL8 No Operation Trip Close I2> Fault I2>> Fault Thermal Fault Aux. 1 Aux. 2 I< Broken Conductor Ie>>>> Ie>>> Ie>> Ie> I>>>>
F61
Protection Communication Clock Source
0 1
F62
Unsigned Integer : Logic Outputs Configuration
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F63
Unsigned Integer: Manual CB Trip and Close
0 1 2
F64
Latest Fault Record Register
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048

Code Description

Flag Information Bit 12 13 14 15 Value 4096 8192 16384 32768 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 I>>> I>> I> Current differential Intertrip Current Differential CB Fail Off Yy0 (0) Yd1 (-30) Yy2 (-60) Yd3 (-90) Yy4 (-120) Yd5 (-150) Yy6 (-180) Yd7 (+150) Yy8 (+120) Yd9 (+90) Yy10 (+60) Yd11 (+30) Ydy0 (0) Ydy6 (-180) DIT on tI> Trip DIT on tI>> Trip DIT on tI>>> Trip DIT on tI>>>> Trip DIT on tIe> Trip DIT on tIe>> Trip DIT on tIe>>> Trip DIT on tIe>>>> Trip DIT on tI< Trip DIT on tI2> Trip DIT on tI2>> Trip DIT on Thermal Trip DIT on Broken Conductor Trip Data
F65
Latest Fault Record Register 2
0 1
F66
Vector Compensation Type
F67
Selective Intertripping
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096

Code Description

Flag Information Bit 13 14 15 Value 8192 16384 32768 Data DIT on tAux1 Trip DIT on tAux2 Trip DIT on CB Fail
3.5
Event record There are two methods of event record extraction. 1. 2. Request a specific event record (Ref. section 3.5.1) Request the oldest non-acknowledged event record (Ref. section 3.5.2)
3.5.1
Specific event record extraction
3.5.1.1 Page 35h: contains 75 event records from 3500h to 354Ah One event record can be accessed from each address. Each event is one 3 dimensional MODBUS register (see ref. [3.2]) that consists of 9 data words. The format is detailed in 3.5.1.2 below. 3.5.1.2 Event record format Word N 1: Word N 2: Word N 3: Word N 4: Word N 5 & 6: Word N 7 & 8: Word N 9: Event meaning see ref. 3.5.1.3 MODBUS associated value MODBUS address Reserved Event date (second) number of second since 01/01/94 Event date (millisecond) Acknowledge 0 = Event Non acknowledged 1 = Event Acknowledged 3.5.1.3 Event table Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 No Event Remote Closing Remote Tripping Disturbance Recording Start Trip Output De-latch Setting Change Remote Thermal Reset NULL Event Meaning Type F9 F9 F9 F46 F46 014H ADDRESS 014H 014H MODBUS Address
MODBUS Database IEC60870-5-103 MiCOM P521 Code 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 NULL I> I>> I>>> I>>>> Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> Ie>>>> Thermal Overload Alarm Thermal Overload Threshold tI> tI>> tI>>> tI>>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> tIe>>>> tI< Broken Conductor t Aux 1 t Aux 2 CB Failure Selective Scheme Logic 1 Selective Scheme Logic 2 Blocking Logic 1 Blocking Logic 2 Setting Group Change 52a 52b Acknowledgement of the Output Relay Latched by Logic Input NULL Event Meaning
P521/EN GC/C21 Page 45/66 Type F17 F17 F17 F17 F16 F16 F16 F16 F37 F37 F17 F17 F17 F17 F16 F16 F16 F16 F16 F38 F38 F38 F38 F20 F20 F20 F20 F20 F20 F20 F20 016H 017H 018H 019H 01AH 01BH 01CH 01DH 02AH 02AH 016H 017H 018H 019H 01AH 01BH 01CH 01DH 02AH 02DH 02DH 02DH 033H 011H 011H 011H 011H 011H 011H 011H 011H MODBUS Address
P521/EN GC/C21 Page 46/66 Code 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 Cold Load Start NULL NULL NULL Input Logic State Change NULL NULL NULL NULL NULL NULL NULL NULL NULL NULL NULL NULL NULL Output Relays Command Front Panel Single Alarm Acknowledgement Front Panel All Alarms Acknowledgement Remote Single Alarm Acknowledgement Remote All Alarms Acknowledgement Major Hardware Alarms Minor Hardware Alarms I2> tI2> CB Supervision CB Open Timer Expired Event CB Supervision Number of Operations Expired Event Summation Amps Exceeded Threshold Event Trip Circuit Supervision CB Supervision CB Closed Timer Expired Flag CB Status is Indeterminate NULL Event Meaning
MODBUS Database IEC60870-5-103 MiCOM P521 Type F20 F12 F39 F45 F45 F16 F16 F43 F43 F43 F43 F43 F38 00FH 00FH 02BH 02BH 033H 033H 033H 033H 033H 033H 014H 010H MODBUS Address 011H
MODBUS Database IEC60870-5-103 MiCOM P521 Code 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 NULL NULL NULL NULL NULL NULL Relay Update Event Start tBF Input Energized Event I< I2>> tI2>> NULL NULL Protection Comms Alarms Channel 1 NULL Differential Protection Trip Direct Intertrip Channel 1 Current Differential Intertrip Channel 1 Permissive Intertrip Channel 1 NULL NULL NULL Differential Protection Fail Cdiff Protection Disabled Protection Communications Loopback Output Contacts Disabled Differential Protection Start NULL NULL NULL NULL NULL NULL Protection Comms Fail Event Meaning
P521/EN GC/C21 Page 47/66 Type F13 F20' F16 F16 F16 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F56 F24 F52 F52 015H 015H 015H 036H 036H 015H 015H 015H 015H 015H 015H 033H 012H 02BH 02BH 02BH MODBUS Address
P521/EN GC/C21 Page 48/66 Code 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 Event Meaning Differential Communications Channel 1 OK NULL Backup Protection Active Differential Protection OK Permissive Intertrip Start Channel 1 NULL NULL NULL NULL NULL Manual Trip Delay Timer Start Manual Close Delay Timer Start Note:
MODBUS Database IEC60870-5-103 MiCOM P521 Type F52 F52 F52 F52 F38 F38 02DH 02DH 015H 015H 015H MODBUS Address 015H
The double arrow means that the event is generated on event occurrence and on event disappearance . On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated value is set to 1. On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the associated value is set to 0.
3.5.2
Page 36h: oldest event record Reading address 3600h using MODBUS function 3 can retrieve the oldest event record.
3.5.3
Event acknowledgement There are two ways to acknowledge an event, automatically or manually.
3.5.3.1 Event acknowledgement mode In order to set the acknowledgement mode for events and faults, bit 12 in remote control word 1 (0400h) has to be written to with the required mode see ref. [3.5.3.4 Event acknowledgement control] 3.5.3.2 Automatic event acknowledgement mode Acknowledgement of the oldest non-acknowledged event record takes place on retrieval. 3.5.3.3 Manual event acknowledgement With the acknowledgement mode set to manual, the oldest non-acknowledged event record must be retrieved. Bit 13 of remote control word 1 (0400h) can then be set to 1 to acknowledge the oldest non-acknowledged event ref. [3.5.3.4 Event acknowledgement control].
MODBUS Database IEC60870-5-103 MiCOM P521 3.5.3.4 Event acknowledgement control Remote Control Word 1 : 0400h Bit 12 Bit 13 3.6 Fault record There are two methods of fault record extraction. 1. 2. 3.6.1 Request a specific fault record (ref. section 3.6.1) Function
0 = Automatic event/fault acknowledgement mode 1 = Manual event/fault acknowledgement mode 0 = Event not acknowledged manually 1 = Event acknowledged manually
Request the oldest non-acknowledged fault record (ref. section 3.6.2).
Specific fault record
3.6.1.1 Page 37h: fault record mapping Each fault record is one 3 dimensional MODBUS register (see ref. [3.2]) that consists of 25 data words. The format is detailed in 3.6.1.2 below. Address 3700h 3701h 3702h 3703h 3704h 3.6.1.2 Fault record format Word Number 1 2&3 4&5 6 7 8 9 10 & 11 12 13 14 Fault number Fault time in seconds since 01/01/94 Fault time (milliseconds) Fault date (season) 0 = winter 1= Summer 2 = Undefined Active setting group Fault type (see table 1) Fault element (see table 2) Fault value current (see note 1) Phase A current (see note 2) Phase B current (see note 2) Phase C current (see note 2) Contents Contents Fault Record N 1 Fault Record N 2 Fault Record N 3 Fault Record N 4 Fault Record N 5
P521/EN GC/C21 Page 50/66 Word Number 15 16 & 17 18 & 19 20 & 21 22 & 23 24 25 Contents Earth current value (see note 2) IA differential current (see note 3) IB differential current (see note 3) IC differential current (see note 3) Ibias highest current (see note 3) Cdiff control flags (see F52)
Acknowledge fault : Fault non acknowledged = 0 Fault acknowledged = 1
3.6.1.3 Table 1: table of fault types 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 None Phase A Phase B Phase C Phases A - B Phases A - C Phases B - C Phases A B - C Earth
3.6.1.4 Table 2: table of fault element meanings Code 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 Null event Remote trip Thermal overload trip tI> trip tI>> trip tI>>> trip tI>>>> trip tIe> trip tIe>> trip tIe>>> trip tIe>>>> trip tI < trip Broken conductor trip t Aux 1 trip Fault Origin
MODBUS Database IEC60870-5-103 MiCOM P521 Code 14 15 16 17 18 Note 1: t Aux 2 trip tI2> trip tI2>> trip Idiff trip Intertrip Fault Origin
For trip codes 17 & 18 (in table 2) refer to note 3 to calculate the value. For all other trip codes refer to note 2 to calculate the value. The nominal current value not including any CT ratio settings.
Note 2:
3.6.1.5 Fault record calculation formulae Line Current Differential/Bias Value = Differential or Bias Current (word 16 & 17 or 18 & 19 or 20 & 21 or 22 & 23) 100 Line Phase Current Value = Phase Sampled Value (word 11, 12, 13 or 14) *Phase Primary CT Ratio (0120h) Phase Internal CT Ratio (0007h) Line Earth Current Value = Earth Sampled Value (word 10 or 15) *Earth Primary CT Ratio (0122h) Earth Internal CT Ratio (0008h) The earth internal CT ratio is dependent on the earth current range as shown in the table below: 3.6.1.6 Internal CT value for each sensitivity range Sensitivity Range Internal CT Value Note 3: 0.1 to 40 len 800 0.01 to 8 len 3277 0.002 to 1 len 32700
Current differential value calculation.
Line Current Differential/Bias Value = Differential or Bias Current (word 16 & 17 or 18 & 19 or 20 & 21 or 22 & 23) 100 3.6.2 Oldest non acknowledged fault record
3.6.2.1 Page 3Eh: oldest non acknowledged fault record Reading address 3E00h using MODBUS function 3 can retrieve the oldest nonacknowledged fault record.
P521/EN GC/C21 Page 52/66 3.6.3 3.6.4 Fault record acknowledgement Event acknowledgement
There are two ways to acknowledge an event, automatically or manually. 3.6.4.1 Event acknowledgement mode In order to set the acknowledgement mode for events and faults, bit 12 in remote control word 1 (0400h) has to be written to with the required mode see ref. [3.5.3.4 Event acknowledgement control] 3.6.4.2 Automatic event acknowledgement mode Acknowledgement of the oldest non acknowledged event record takes place on retrieval. 3.6.4.3 Manual event acknowledgement With the acknowledgement mode set to manual, the oldest non-acknowledged event record must be retrieved. Bit 14 of remote control word 1 (0400h) can then be set to 1 to acknowledge the oldest non-acknowledged event ref. [3.5.3.4 Event acknowledgement control]. Remote Control Word 1 : 0400h Bit 12 Bit 14 3.7 Disturbance records In order to extract a disturbance record the following requests need to be sent to the relay. 1. An optional request can be sent to extract a summary of all the disturbance records in SRAM, the mapping and format of the data returned is shown in section 3.6.1. Read the configuration information for the first set of channel data. The first set is IA. The MODBUS mapping and format are detailed in section 3.7.2. Reading the channel configuration data is required to selects which channel data is available for reading. Read the first 250 words of the selected channel data. The MODBUS mapping and format is detailed in section 3.7.3 Channel data. Continue to request configuration information and then channel data in 250 word blocks until all the disturbance record has been extracted. Data words 10 and 11 of the configuration information specify the end of the channel extraction. Read the upload index frame to complete the disturbance record extraction and to acknowledge the disturbance record extraction. Refer to section 3.7.3 for the format and MODBUS mapping details. Function 0 = Automatic event/fault acknowledgement mode 1 = Manual event/fault acknowledgement mode 0 = Fault record not acknowledged manually 1 = Fault record acknowledged manually
2.
3. 4.
5.
MODBUS Database IEC60870-5-103 MiCOM P521 3.7.1 Summary disturbance records
3.7.1.1 Page 3Dh: summary disturbance records The summary disturbance record is one 3 dimensional MODBUS register (see ref. [3.2]) that consists of 36 data words. The format is detailed in 3.7.1.2 below. MODBUS function 3 can be used to read the 5 summary disturbance records. 3.7.1.2 Format of summary disturbance records Word Number 1 2 3&4 5&6 7 Contents Number of disturbance records available Oldest disturbance record number Oldest disturbance record time (seconds) Oldest disturbance record time (milliseconds) Disturbance record starting origin 1 = Trip relay (RL1), 2 = Instantaneous threshold, 3 = Remote command, 4 = Logic input 8 9 10 & 11 12 & 13 14 Acknowledge Oldest disturbance record number +1 Disturbance record time (seconds) Disturbance record time (milliseconds) Disturbance record starting origin 1 = Trip relay (RL1), 2 = Instantaneous threshold, 3 = Remote command, 4 = Logic input 15 16 17 & 18 19 & 20 21 Acknowledge Oldest disturbance record number +2 Disturbance record time (seconds) Disturbance record time (milliseconds) Disturbance record starting origin 1 = Trip relay (RL1), 2 = Instantaneous threshold, 3 = Remote command, 4 = Logic input 22 23 24 & 25 26 & 27 28 Acknowledge Oldest disturbance record number +3 Disturbance record time (seconds) Disturbance record time (milliseconds) Disturbance record starting origin 1 = Trip relay (RL1) , 2 = Instantaneous threshold, 3 = Remote command, 4 = Logic input 29 Acknowledge
P521/EN GC/C21 Page 54/66 Word Number 30 31 & 32 33 & 34 35 Latest disturbance record Latest disturbance record time (seconds) Latest disturbance record time (milliseconds) Disturbance record starting origin Contents
1 = Trip relay (RL1), 2 = Instantaneous threshold, 3 = Remote command, 4 = Logic input 36 3.7.2 Acknowledge
Channel selection and configuration
3.7.2.1 Pages 38h to 3Ch: data mapping All channel selection and configuration registers are 3 dimensional MODBUS registers (see ref. [3.2]) which consist of 11 data words. The format is detailed in 3.7.2.2 below. MODBUS function 3 can be used to read the summary disturbance records. Address 3800h 3801h 3802h 3803h 3804h 3805h 3806h 3900h 3901h 3902h 3903h 3904h 3905h 3906h 3A00h 3A01h 3A02h 3A03h 3A04h 3A05h Disturbance Record No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 IA IB IC IE Timing Logic input and output 1 Logic input and output 2 IA IB IC IE Timing Logic input and output 1 Logic input and output 2 IA IB IC IE Timing Logic input and output 1 Format
MODBUS Database IEC60870-5-103 MiCOM P521 Address 3A06h 3B00h 3B01h 3B02h 3B03h 3B04h 3B05h 3B06h 3C00h 3C01h 3C02h 3C03h 3C04h 3C05h 3C06h Disturbance Record No. 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 IA IB IC IE Timing
P521/EN GC/C21 Page 55/66 Format Logic input and output 2
Logic input and output 1 Logic input and output 2 IA IB IC IE Timing Logic input and output 1 Logic input and output 2
3.7.2.2 Disturbance record channel selection and configuration format Word Number Word No 1 Word No 2 Word No 3 Word No 4 Word No 5 Word No 6 Word No 7 Word No 8 Word No 9 Word No 10 Word No 11 Format Number of samples to be extracted Number of samples in pre-time Number of samples in post-time Primary phase CT ratio Secondary phase CT ratio Primary earth CT ratio Secondary earth CT ratio Internal phase CT ratio Internal earth CT ratio Address of the last page of disturbance record data Number of data words on the last page of the disturbance record for this channel
P521/EN GC/C21 Page 56/66 3.7.3 Channel data
3.7.3.1 Page 9h to 21h: channel data mapping Addresses 0900H to 09FAH 0A00H to 0AFAH 0B00H to 0BFAH 0C00H to 0CFAH 0D00H to 0DFAH 0E00H to 0EFAH 0F00H to 0FFAH 1000H to 10FAH 1100H to 11FAH 1200H to 12FAH 1300H to 13FAH 1400H to 14FAH 1500H to 15FAH 1600H to 16FAFH 1700H to 17AFH 1800H to 18AFH 1900H to 19AFH 1A00H to 1AAFH 1B00H to 1BAFH 1C00H to 1CAFH 1D00H to 1DAFH 1E00H to 1EAFH 1F00H to 1FAFH 2000H to 20FAH 2100H to 21FAH 3.7.3.2 Format of the disturbance record channel data Channel Name IA IB IC Format 16 bit word equivalent to the ADC count (Ref. Note 1) 16 bit word equivalent to the ADC count (Ref. Note 1) 16 bit word equivalent to the ADC count (Ref. Note 1) Contents 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words 250 Disturbance data words
MODBUS Database IEC60870-5-103 MiCOM P521 Channel Name IE Timing Logic channel 1 Logic channel 2 3.7.3.3 Calculation formulae Line Phase Current Value = Format
16 bit word equivalent to the ADC count (Ref. Note 2) Time between two samples in microseconds 16 bit word (see table 1 for format) 16 bit word (see table 2 for format)
Phase Sampled Value (word 11, 12, 13 or 14) *Phase Primary CT Ratio (0120h) Phase Internal CT Ratio (0007h) Line Earth Current Value = Earth Sampled Value (word 10 or 15) *Earth Primary CT Ratio (0122h) Earth Internal CT Ratio (0008h) The earth internal CT ratio is dependent on the earth current range as shown in the table below: Sensitivity Range Internal CT Value 0.1 to 40 len 800 0.01 to 8 len 3277 0.002 to 1 len 32700
Table 1: Format of Logic Channel 1 Logic Channel Bit 0

Bit 1
Table 2: Format of Logic Channel 2 Logic Channel Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Cdiff IA Cdiff IB Cdiff IC Cdiff Comms Fail Cdiff Protection Fail Direct I-Trip Permissive I-Trip Cdiff I-Trip CDiff HighSet Element CDiff Start Reserved Reserved Reserved Content Cdiff Trip
Content Trip Relay (RL1)

Output Relay 2 (RL2)
Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13
Output Relay 3 (RL3) Output Relay 4 (RL4) Watch Dog Relay 0 (RL0) Output Relay 5 (RL5) Output Relay 6 (RL6) Output Relay 7 (RL7) Output Relay 8 (RL8) Reserved Logic Input 1 (EL1) Logic Input 2 (EL2) Logic Input 3 (EL3) Logic Input 4 (EL4)
P521/EN GC/C21 Page 58/66 Table 1: Format of Logic Channel 1 Logic Channel Bit 14 Bit 15 3.7.4 Content Logic Input 5 (EL5) Reserved
MODBUS Database IEC60870-5-103 MiCOM P521 Table 2: Format of Logic Channel 2 Logic Channel Bit 14 Bit 15 Content Reserved Reserved
Disturbance recorder index frame
3.7.4.1 Page 22h: index frame mapping Reading 7 words from address 2200h using MODBUS function 3 obtains the final information of the disturbance record and acknowledges the record. 3.7.4.2 Index frame format Word Number 1 2&3 4&5 6 Contents Disturbance record number Disturbance record finish time (seconds) Disturbance record finish time (milliseconds) Disturbance record triggering condition 1: Tripping 2: Instantaneous condition 3 : Remote condition 4: Logic input condition 7 3.8 3.8.1 Start of post time record time stamp
Commonly required functionality CB trip and close Remote Control Word 1 : 0400h Write Only Bit 3 Bit 4 Function Initiate remote trip Initiate remote close
As shown in the overview table in section 3.1, page 4 is write only and can be written to using MODBUS function 5, 6 or 15. 3.8.2 Bit address Using MODBUS function 5 to initiate a remote trip, the address of the bit to be written to is made up of the register address then the bit number. i.e. in order to access bit 3 at register address 400h the address is 4003h. 3.8.3 Bit value The bit value in the message must be FFFF or 0000, which corresponds to setting bit 1 or 0 in the MODBUS register. Any other value results in an exception error 3.
MODBUS Database IEC60870-5-103 MiCOM P521 Relay Address 1-255 3.8.4 Change setting group Remote Control Word 1 : 0400h Write Only Bit 5 Function Change setting group MODBUS Function 5 Bit Address 4003
P521/EN GC/C21 Page 59/66 Bit Value FFFF CRC
As for the previous example, function 5 can be used to write to bit 5 of the control word and change the setting group. Note: The setting group can only be remotely changed if the change group input setting is set to edge.
3.8.4.1 Change setting group request Relay Address 1-255 MODBUS Function 5 Register Address 4005 Command Data FFFF CRC
4.
IEC60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
The IEC60870-5-103 protocol operates a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave. This protocol is based on the VDEW communications protocol and conforms to the IEC60870-5-103 standard. A detailed implementation of the protocol is provided in Section 4.3, but an Interoperability statement can be found in Appendix 1.
4.1
Technical characteristics of the IEC60870-5-103 connection The connection parameters are: Isolated two-point EIA(RS)485 connection (2kV, 50Hz) Communications baud rates of 9600 or 19200, configurable via the local interfaces Communication Parameters of Even Parity, 8 Data Bits and 1 Stop Bit Address Range of 1 to 255 (255 as the Broadcast Address), configurable via the local interfaces.
4.2
IEC60870-5-103 compatible application functions The following application functions are supported by this interface: Initialization (reset) Time Synchronization Event Record Extraction General Interrogation Cyclic Measurements
P521/EN GC/C21 Page 60/66 4.3 4.3.1 General Commands Disturbance Record Extraction
Application functions Initialization (reset) Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communications parameters have been changed, a Reset Command is required to initialize the communications. The following two reset commands are supported: Reset CU Reset FCB
The difference between the two commands is that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the relays transmit buffer and Reset FCB will reset the frame control bit in the connection layer protocol. The relay will respond to the reset command with the ASDU 5 identification message. The Cause of Transmission value in the message shall be dependent upon the nature of the reset command. The following information will be contained in the data section of this ASDU: Manufacturers Name and Product Type: ALSTOM P The software identification section of the ASDU 5 message will contain the first four characters of the relay model number to identify the type of relay, and the current software version. The breakdown of the information contained in the data and identification sections can be shown as: ALSTOM P + 16bit Model + 8bit Major Version + 1 character Minor Version e.g. ALSTOM P + 521 + 2 + A In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up, a power up event will be generated. 4.3.2 Time synchronization Using the time synchronization feature of the IEC60870-5-103 protocol allows the relay time and date to be modified. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as specified in the IEC60870-5-103 standard. If the time synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm message then the relay will respond with a confirm. If a time synchronization message is sent as either a send/confirm or a send/no reply (broadcast message), a time synchronization message will be returned as Class 1 data. 4.3.3 Event record extraction The events generated by the relay can be transmitted to the IEC60870-5-103 master station using either standard information numbers or private information numbers. All standard information numbers are transmitted using the standard function types; all private information numbers are transmitted using private function types. Therefore the events are categorized using the following information: Function Type Information Number
Section 5 contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay.
MODBUS Database IEC60870-5-103 MiCOM P521 4.3.4 General interrogation
The General Interrogation request can be used to read the current status of the relay. The status information that will be returned during a General Interrogation cycle is shown in Section 5. 4.3.5 Cyclic measurements The relay will produce measured values using ASDU 9 only on a cyclical basis. This can be read from the relay using a Class 2 poll. It should be noted that the measurements are transmitted as a proportion of 2.4 times the rated value of the analogue inputs. 4.3.6 General commands A list of the supported commands is shown in Section 5. The relay will respond to unsupported commands with an ASDU 1 message with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative acknowledgement. Note that a negative acknowledgement will also be returned if the password is entered on the front panel interface, to prevent multiple access to the relay controls. The timeout for this condition is 5 minutes. 4.3.7 Disturbance record extraction The disturbance records stored by the relay can be extracted using the mechanism defined in the IEC60870-5-103 standard. The relay also maintains compatibility with the VDEW control system by transmitting an ASDU 23 with the oldest disturbance record list at the start of every General Interrogation cycle. 4.3.7.1 Extracting disturbance records via the MODBUS front port To provide IEC 60870-5-103 rear port compatibility for disturbance records extracted via the MODBUS front port, the following tables should be referred to, for determining the correct descriptions of the values contained in the binary channels of a disturbance record extracted via the MODBUS front port of a P521 model with IEC 60870-5-103 rear port. This does not apply for a P521 model with MODBUS rear port. Binary Channel 1 Mapping: Bit Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 IEC 60870-5-103 Reference INF No: 84 INF No: 67 INF No: 68 INF No: 85 INF No: 122 INF No: 69 INF No: 70 INF No: 71 INF No: 191 INF No: 192 General Start Any IN Start General Trip Breaker Failure Differential Trip Differential Trip L1 Differential Trip L2 Differential Trip L3 Idiff Comms Failure Idiff Protection Failure Description
P521/EN GC/C21 Page 62/66 Bit Number 10 11 12 13 14 15 IEC 60870-5-103 Reference INF No: 120 INF No: 121 INF No: 123 INF No: 90 INF No: 91 INF No: 94 Direct Intertrip
MODBUS Database IEC60870-5-103 MiCOM P521 Description
Permissive Intertrip Trip Idiff Intertrip I> Trip I>> Trip I>>> Trip
Binary Channel 2 Mapping: Bit Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 4.3.8 IEC 60870-5-103 Reference INF No: 95 INF No: 92 INF No: 93 INF No: 96 INF No: 97 INF No: 161 INF No: 162 INF No: 163 INF No: 164 INF No: 165 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved I>>>> Trip IN> Trip IN>> Trip IN>>> Trip IN>>>> Trip Logic Input 1 Logic Input 2 Logic Input 3 Logic Input 4 Logic Input 5 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Description
Blocking of monitor direction The relay does not support the facility to Block Messages in the Monitor direction.
4.3.9
Test mode The relay does not support the Test Mode function.
5.
5.1
ASDU TYPE
IEC60870-5-103 DETAILED IMPLEMENTATION

Compatible range information numbers in monitor direction
COT FUN INF NO. Description GI Model Number P521 P523 Interpretation
System Functions 8 5 5 5 10 3 4 6 255 192 192 192 0 2 3 5 End of General Interrogation Reset FCB Reset CU Power On * * * *
Status Indications 1 1 1 1 1 1 12,20,21 9,12 9,12,20,21 9,12,20,21 1,9 1,9 192 192 192 192 192 192 19 22 23 24 27 28 LED Reset Local Parameter Setting Characteristic 1 Characteristic 2 Auxiliary Input 1 Auxiliary Input 2 * * * * * * * * * * * Indications and Latches Reset Password Entered Locally Setting Group 1 Changed Setting Group 2 Changed Auxiliary 1 Timer Expiry Auxiliary 2 Timer Expiry
Supervision Indications 1 1,9 192 36 Trip Circuit Supervision * * Trip Circuit Supervision Trip
Fault Indications 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 Measurands 9 2 192 148 Measurands IL1,2,3,VL1,2,3,P,Q,f Measurement = 2.4 x Rated Value 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9 1 1 1 1 1,9 1 1 1 1 1 192 192 192 192 192 192 192 192 192 192 192 192 192 192 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 84 85 90 91 92 93 Start /Pickup L1 Start /Pickup L2 Start /Pickup L3 Start /Pickup N General Trip Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 General Start Breaker Failure Trip I> Trip I>> Trip IN> Trip IN>> * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Differential Start L1 Differential Start L2 Differential Start L3 Any IN Start Any Trip Differential Trip L1 Differential Trip L2 Differential Trip L3 Any Start Breaker Failure (tBF) I> Overcurrent Trip I>> Overcurrent Trip IN> Overcurrent Trip IN>> Overcurrent Trip
P521/EN GC/C21 Page 64/66 5.2

ASDU TYPE
Compatible range information numbers in control direction

System Functions 7 6 9 8 255 255 0 0 Init. General Interrogation Time Synchronization * *
General Commands 20 20 20 20 20 20 192 192 192 19 23 24 LED Reset Characteristic 1 Characteristic 2

5 6
* * *
Reset Indications and Latches Activate Setting Group 1 Activate Setting Group 2
5.3
ASDU TYPE
Private range information numbers in monitor direction

Fault Indications 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9 1 1,9 1 1,9 1 1,9 1 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 Trip I>>> Trip I>>>> Trip IN>>> Trip IN>>>> Start I> Start I>> Start I>>> Start I>>>> Start IN> Start IN>> Start IN>>> Start IN>>>> Start I< Trip I< Start I2> Trip I2> Start I2>> Trip I2>> Alarm Thermal Trip Thermal * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * I>>> Overcurrent Trip I>>>> Overcurrent Trip IN>>> Overcurrent Trip IN>>>> Overcurrent Trip I> Overcurrent Start I>> Overcurrent Start I>>> Overcurrent Start I>>>> Overcurrent Start IN> Overcurrent Start IN>> Overcurrent Start IN>>> Overcurrent Start IN>>>> Overcurrent Start I< Undercurrent Start I< Undercurrent Trip I2> Negative Sequence Start I2> Negative Sequence Trip I2>> Negative Sequence Start I2>> Negative Sequence Trip Thermal Overload Alarm Thermal Overload Trip
5 6
Must be in Edge Mode. Must be in Edge Mode.

ASDU TYPE 2 1 2 2 1 2 INF NO. 114 120 121 122 123 124 Model Number P521 Broken Conductor CH1 Direct Intertrip CH1 Permissive Intertrip Trip Current Differential Trip CH1 IDiff Intertrip CH1 Permissive Intertrip Start * * * * * * * P523
COT
FUN
Description
GI
Interpretation
1 1 1 1 1 1,9
194 194 194 194 194 194
Broken Conductor Trip Direct Intertrip Received on CH1 Permissive Intertrip Trip from CH1 Current Diff Trip Current Diff Intertrip RX on CH1 Permissive Intertrip Start from CH1
Relay Indications 1 1 1 1 1,9 1,9 12,20,21 12,20,21 194 194 194 194 140 141 142 143 CB Closed CB Open Remote CB Trip Remote CB Close * * CB Change of State Closed State CB Change of State Open State Remote CB Trip Acknowledged Remote CB Close Acknowledged
* * *
Logical Statuses 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 161 162 163 164 165 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 Logic Input 1 Logic Input 2 Logic Input 3 Logic Input 4 Logic Input 5 Relay Contact 0 Relay Contact 1 Relay Contact 2 Relay Contact 3 Relay Contact 4 Relay Contact 5 Relay Contact 6 Relay Contact 7 Relay Contact 8 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Change of Logic Input 1 State Change of Logic Input 2 State Change of Logic Input 3 State Change of Logic Input 4 State Change of Logic Input 5 State Change of Trip Relay State Change of Relay Output 1 State Change of Relay Output 2 State Change of Relay Output 3 State Change of Watchdog Relay State Change of Relay Output 5 State Change of Relay Output 6 State Change of Relay Output 7 State Change of Relay Output 8 State
Alarm Indications 1 1,9 194 190 IDiff CH1 Comms Alarm * * CH1 Protection Comms Alarm

ASDU TYPE INF NO. Model Number P521 IDiff Comms Failure IDiff Protection Failure Backup Protection Active Output Contacts Disabled Loopback Mode Selected IDiff Protection Disabled CB Status DBI * * * * * * * * * * * * * * P523
COT
FUN
Description
GI
Interpretation
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9 1,9
194 194 194 194 194 194 194
191 192 193 195 196 197 198
Total Protection Comms Failure Current Diff Protection Failure Overcurrent Backup Protection Active Commissioning Mode Commissioning Mode Current Diff Protection Disabled CB Fail
5.4
ASDU TYPE
Private range information numbers in control direction

COT FUN Description GI Model Number P521 P523 Interpretation
General Commands 20 20 20 20 194 194 142 143 Remote CB Trip Remote CB Close * * Perform a Remote CB Trip Perform a Remote CB Close
Appendix A MiCOM P521
P521/EN GC/C21
APPENDIX A IEC60870-5-103 INTEROPERABILITY STATEMENT
8th November 2005 2 10P52101
P521/EN GC/C21
Appendix A MiCOM P521
EN 60870-5-103:1998
P521 Interoperability Statement
8.1 8.1.1
Physical layer Electrical interface ............1........... for one protection equipment
X EIA RS-485 X Number of loads
Note: EIA RS-485 standard defines unit loads so that 32 of them can be operated on one line. For detailed information refer to clause 3 of EIA RS-485 standard.
8.1.2
Optical interface Glass fiber Plastic fiber F-SMA type connector BFOC/2,5 type connector
8.1.3
Transmission speed
X 9600 bit/s X 19200 bit/s 8.2 8.3 8.3.1 Link layer Application layer Transmission mode for application data
There are no choices for the link layer.
Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion standard. 8.3.2 Common address of ASDU More than one common address of ASDU 8.3.3 8.3.3.1 INF X <0> <0> X <2> X <3> <4> X <5> Selection of standard information numbers in monitor direction System functions in monitor direction Semantics End of general interrogation Time synchronization Reset FCB Reset CU Start/restart Power on X One common address of ASDU (identical with station address)
EN 60870-5-103:1998
8.3.3.2 INF <16> <17> <18> X <19> <20> <21> X X X <22> <23> <24> <25> <26> X X <27> <28> <29> <30> 8.3.3.3 INF <32> <33> <35> X <36> <37> <38> <39> <46> <47> 8.3.3.4 INF <48> <49> <50> <51> <52>
Status indications in monitor direction Semantics Auto-recloser active Teleprotection active Protection active LED reset Monitor direction blocked Test mode Local parameter setting Characteristic 1 Characteristic 2 Characteristic 3 Characteristic 4 Auxiliary input 1 Auxiliary input 2 Auxiliary input 3 Auxiliary input 4 Supervision indications in monitor direction Semantics Measurand supervision I Measurand supervision V Phase sequence supervision Trip circuit supervision I>> back-up operation VT fuse failure Teleprotection disturbed Group warning Group alarm Earth fault indications in monitor direction Semantics Earth fault L1 Earth fault L2 Earth fault L3 Earth fault forward, i.e. Line Earth fault reverse, i.e. Busbar
EN 60870-5-103:1998
8.3.3.5 X X X X X X X X INF <64> <65> <66> <67> <68> <69> <70> <71> <72> <73> <74> <75> <76> <77> <78> <79> <80> <81> <82> <83> X X <84> <85> <86> <87> <88> <89> X X X X 8.3.3.6 <90> <91> <92> <93>
Fault indications in monitor direction Semantics Start /pick-up L1 Start /pick-up L2 Start /pick-up L3 Start /pick-up N General trip Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 Trip I>> (back-up operation) Fault location X in ohms Fault forward/line Fault reverse/busbar Teleprotection signal transmitted Teleprotection signal received Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 General start/pick-up Breaker failure Trip measuring system L1 Trip measuring system L2 Trip measuring system L3 Trip measuring system E Trip I> Trip I>> Trip IN> Trip IN>> Auto-reclosure indications in monitor direction Semantics CB "on" by AR CB "on" by long-time AR AR blocked
INF <128> <129> <130>
EN 60870-5-103:1998
8.3.3.7
Measurands in monitor direction
INF Semantics <144> Measurand I <145> Measurands I, V <146> Measurands I, V, P, Q <147> Measurands IN, VEN X <148> Measurands IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3, P, Q, f 8.3.3.8 Generic functions in monitor direction
INF Semantics <240> Read headings of all defined groups <241> Read values or attributes of all entries of one group <243> Read directory of a single entry <244> Read value or attribute of a single entry <245> End of general interrogation of generic data <249> Write entry with confirmation <250> Write entry with execution <251> Write entry aborted 8.3.4 8.3.4.1 X X 8.3.4.2 INF <16> <17> <18> X X X <19> <23> <24> <25> <26> INF <0> <0> Selection of standard information numbers in control direction System functions in control direction Semantics Initiation of general interrogation Time synchronization General commands in control direction Semantics Auto-recloser on/off Teleprotection on/off Protection on/off LED reset Activate characteristic 1 Activate characteristic 2 Activate characteristic 3 Activate characteristic 4
EN 60870-5-103:1998
8.3.4.3
Generic functions in control direction
INF Semantics <240> Read headings of all defined groups <241> Read values or attributes of all entries of one group <243> Read directory of a single entry <244> Read value or attribute of a single entry <245> General interrogation of generic data <248> Write entry <249> Write entry with confirmation <250> Write entry with execution <251> Write entry abort 8.3.5 Basic application functions Test mode Blocking of monitor direction X Disturbance data Generic services X Private data 8.3.6 Miscellaneous
Measurands are transmitted with ASDU 3 as well as with ASDU 9. As defined in 7.2.6.8, the maximum MVAL can either be 1,2 or 2,4 times the rated value. No different rating shall be used in ASDU 3 and ASDU 9, i.e. for each measurand there is only one choice. Measurand Max. MVAL = rated value times 1,2 Current L1 Current L2 Current L3 Voltage L1-E Voltage L2-E Voltage L3-E Active power P Reactive power Q Frequency f Voltage L1 - L2 or 2,4 X X X
EN 60870-5-103:1998
Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P521
P521/EN CM/C31
COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE
8th November 2005 2 10P52101
P521/EN CM/C31
P521/EN CM/C31 Page 1/36
CONTENT
1. 2. 3.
3.1 3.2
REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING SETTING FAMILIARISATION EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING

Minimum equipment required Optional equipment
5 5 6
6 6
4.
4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.5.1 4.2.5.2 4.2.6 4.2.6.1 4.2.6.2 4.2.6.3 4.2.6.4 4.2.6.5 4.2.6.6
PRODUCT CHECKS
With the relay de-energized Visual inspection Insulation External wiring Watchdog contact Auxiliary supply With the relay energized Date and time Light emitting diodes (LEDs) Input opto-isolators Output relays Rear communications port MODBUS communications IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) communications Current differential communications Direct fiber optic communications Direct EIA(RS)485 communications EIA(RS)232 communications Communications using modems Communications using P595 interfacing device Communications using P591 interface units
6
7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 10 10 11 11 11 11 11 12 12 12 13 13
4.2.6.6.1 P591 visual inspection
P521/EN CM/C31 Page 2/36 4.2.6.6.2 P591 insulation 4.2.6.6.3 P591 external wiring 4.2.6.6.4 P591 auxiliary supply 4.2.6.6.5 P591 light emitting diodes (LEDs) 4.2.6.6.6 Loopback test with P591 4.2.6.6.7 Final checks 4.2.6.7 Communications using P592 interface units
Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P521 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 18 18
4.2.6.7.1 P592 visual inspection 4.2.6.7.2 P592 insulation 4.2.6.7.3 P592 external wiring 4.2.6.7.4 P592 auxiliary supply 4.2.6.7.5 P592 light emitting diodes (LEDs) 4.2.6.7.6 Loopback test 4.2.6.7.7 Final checks 4.2.6.8 Communications using P593 interface units
4.2.6.8.1 P593 visual inspection 4.2.6.8.2 P593 insulation 4.2.6.8.3 P593 external wiring 4.2.6.8.4 P593 auxiliary supply 4.2.6.8.5 P593 light emitting diodes (LEDs) 4.2.6.8.6 Loopback test 4.2.6.8.7 Final checks 4.2.7 Current inputs
5.
5.1 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.1.1 5.2.1.2 5.2.1.3 5.2.2 5.2.3
SETTING CHECKS
Apply application-specific settings Demonstrate correct relay operation Current differential bias characteristic Connect the test circuit Lower slope Upper slope Current differential operating time Backup phase overcurrent protection
19
19 19 19 20 20 21 21 22
Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P521 5.2.3.1 5.2.3.2 5.2.3.3 5.3 Connect the test circuit Perform the test Check the operating time Check application settings
P521/EN CM/C31 Page 3/36 22 22 22 23
6.
6.1 6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.1.3.1 6.1.3.2 6.1.4 6.1.5 6.1.6 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2
END TO END TESTS

Remove the loopback test Direct fiber optic communications Direct EIA(RS)485 communications EIA(RS)232 communications Communications using modems Communications using P595 interfacing device Communications using P591 interface units Communications using P592 interface units Communications using P593 interface units Verify communications between relays Communication checks for direct fiber or P59x connected relays Communication checks for metallic communications (direct EIA(RS)485, P595, EIA(RS)232 and modem connected relays)
24
24 24 24 24 24 24 25 25 25 25 25 26
7.
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4
ON-LOAD CHECKS
Confirm current transformer wiring Measure capacitive charging current Check differential current Check consistency of current transformer polarity
26
27 27 27 27
8. 9.
9.1 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3 9.2.4
FINAL CHECKS MAINTENANCE

Maintenance period Maintenance checks Alarms Opto-isolators Output relays Measurement accuracy
28 28
28 29 29 29 29 29
P521/EN CM/C31 Page 4/36 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.3.1 9.4 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3 9.4.4 9.5 9.5.1 9.5.2 9.5.2.1 9.5.2.2 9.5.2.3 Equipment failure Minor fault Protection comms fault Major fault Hardware and software faults Method of repair Replacing the active part Replacing the complete relay Changing the battery Extracting the rear communications board from the relay Problem solving Password lost or not accepted Communication Values measured locally and remotely MiCOM relay no longer responds A remote command is not taken into account
Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P521 29 30 30 32 32 32 32 32 33 34 35 35 35 35 36 36
FIGURES
Figure 1: Connection for bias characteristic testing Figure 2: Application of P520L loopback test box Figure 3: Screw locations (front view) Figure 4: Screw locations (back view) 20 31 34 35
1.
REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING

The MiCOM P521 relay is fully numerical in its design, implementing all protection and non-protection functions in software. The MiCOM relay employs a high degree of selfchecking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning tests do not need to be as extensive as with non-numerical relays (static or electromechanical). To commission MiCOM relays it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the MiCOM relay. It is considered unnecessary to test every function of the relay if the settings have been verified by one of the following methods: Extracting the settings applied to the relay using the appropriate setting software (preferred method) Via the front panel user interface. Reminder: It is not possible to download a new setting file as long as the programming mode is active (i.e. password entered via key pad). To confirm that the product is operating correctly once the application-specific settings have been applied a test should be performed on at least one protection element. Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for determining the application-specific settings to be applied to the MiCOM relays and for testing of any scheme logic applied by external wiring. Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided in section P521/EN RS of the Technical Guide for completion as required. When P59x interface units are used to convert the optical signal from the P521 relay to an electrical signal for the multiplexer, the P59x units should be commissioned in conjunction with the relay. Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the Safety and Technical Data sections and the ratings on the equipments rating label.
2.
SETTING FAMILIARISATION
When commissioning a MiCOM P521 relay for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. The User Guide contains a detailed description of the menu structure of the P521 relay. To change any of the settings via the relay key pad the appropriate password must first be entered. When attempting to change a setting the user will be prompted to enter the password if has not already been entered. Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as MiCOM S1), the menu can be viewed a page at a time to display a full column of data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time allow sufficient time to become familiar with its operation.
3.
3.1
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING

Minimum equipment required Overcurrent test set with interval timer. Multimeter with suitable ac current ranges. Continuity tester (if not included in multimeter) 2 Lengths of 50/125m fiber optic cable (approximately 1 meter long) terminated at each end with a ST connector Optical power meter with sensitivity 0 to 50dBm (to measure the optical signal level) Note: Modern test equipment may contain many of the above features in one unit.
3.2
Optional equipment Multi-finger test plug type P992 (if test block type P991 installed) or MMLB (if using MMLG blocks) An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a dc output not exceeding 500V (for insulation resistance testing when required). A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the front or rear communication ports to be tested and will also save considerable time during commissioning). KITZ K-Bus to EIA(RS)232 protocol converter. EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 converter (if EIA(RS)485 MODBUS rear port is being tested). A printer (for printing a setting record from the portable PC).
4.
PRODUCT CHECKS
These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked to ensure that it has not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity measurements are within the stated tolerances. If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow their restoration later. This could be done by: Obtaining a setting file on a diskette from the customer (this requires a portable PC with appropriate setting software for transferring the settings from the PC to the relay) Extracting the settings from the relay itself (this again requires a portable PC with appropriate setting software) Manually creating a setting record. This could be done using a copy of the setting record, located in section P521/EN RS, to record the settings as the relays menu is sequentially stepped through via the front panel user interface.
Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P521 4.1 With the relay de-energized
The following group of tests should be carried out without the auxiliary supply being applied to the relay and with the trip circuit isolated. The current transformer connections must be isolated from the relay for these checks. If a P991 test block is provided the required isolation can easily be achieved by inserting test plug type P992, which effectively open-circuits all wiring routed through the test block. Before inserting the test plug reference should be made to the scheme (wiring) diagram to ensure that this will not potentially cause damage or a safety hazard. For example, the test block may be associated with protection current transformer circuits. It is essential that the sockets in the test plug which correspond to the current transformer secondary windings are linked before the test plug is inserted into the test block. DANGER: Never open circuit the secondary circuit of a current transformer since the high voltage produced may be lethal and could damage insulation.
If a test block is not provided the line current transformers should be short-circuited and disconnected from the relay terminals. Where means of isolating the auxiliary supply and trip circuit (e.g. isolation links, fuses, MCB, etc.) are provided, these should be used. If this is not possible, the wiring to these circuits will have to be disconnected and the exposed ends suitably terminated to prevent them from being a safety hazard. 4.1.1 Visual inspection Carefully examine the relay to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation. The rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the relay should be checked to ensure it is correct for the particular installation. Visually check that the current transformer shorting switches, fitted on the terminal block inside the rear of the case, are wired into the correct circuit. The shorting switches are between terminals 41 and 42, 43 and 44, 45 and 46, 47 and 48, 49 and 50, 51 and 52, 53 and 54, 55 and 56. Ensure that while the relay module is withdrawn the shorting switches are closed by checking with a continuity tester. Ensure that the case earthing connections are used to connect the relay to a local earth bar using an adequate conductor. Where there is more than one relay in a tier, it is recommended that a copper bar should be fitted connecting the earth terminals of each case in the same tier together. However, as long as an adequate earth connection is made between relays, the use of a copper earth bar is not essential. 4.1.2 Insulation Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be done and they have not been performed during installation. Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 500V. Terminals of the same circuits should be temporarily connected together.
P521/EN CM/C31 Page 8/36 The main groups of relay terminals are: a) Current transformer circuits b) Auxiliary voltage supply c) Opto-isolated control inputs d) Relay contacts e) EIA(RS)485 communication port f) Case earth The insulation resistance should be greater than 100M at 500V
On completion of the insulation resistance tests ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected to the relay. 4.1.3 External wiring Check that the external wiring is correct to the relay connection diagram (supplied in section P521/EN CO) or scheme diagram. If a P991 test block is provided the connections should be checked against the scheme (wiring) diagram. It is recommended that the supply connections are to the live side of the test block [colored orange with the odd numbered terminals (1, 3, 5, 7 etc.). The auxiliary supply is normally routed via terminals 13 (supply positive) and 15 (supply negative), with terminals 14 and 16 connected to the relays positive and negative auxiliary supply terminals respectively. However, check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the customers normal practice. 4.1.4 Watchdog contact If not already done to perform the insulation tests, isolate the trip contacts and re-insert the relay module. Using a continuity tester, check that the watchdog contact (terminals 35 and 36) is closed when the relay is de-energized and open when the relay is energized. 4.1.5 Auxiliary supply The P521 relay can be operated from either a dc only or an ac/dc auxiliary supply depending on the relays nominal supply rating. The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Table 1. Without energizing the relay measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the operating range. Nominal Supply Rating DC [AC rms] 24 60V 48 150V 130 250V Table 1: [] [] [110-250 Vac 50/60Hz] DC Operating Range 20 to 72V 38 to 180V 104 to 300V AC Operating Range 88 to 275V
Operational range of auxiliary supply Vx.
It should be noted that the P521 relay can withstand an ac ripple of up to 12% of the upper rated voltage on the dc auxiliary supply.
Do not energize the relay or interface unit using the battery charger with the battery disconnected as this can irreparably damage the relays power supply circuitry. Energize the relay only if the auxiliary supply is within the specified operating ranges. If a test block is provided, it may be necessary to link across the front of the test plug to connect the auxiliary supply to the relay. 4.2 With the relay energized The following group of tests verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning correctly and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay and, if installed, the P590 interface units. The current transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for these checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker. 4.2.1 Date and time Before setting the date and time ensure that the factory-fitted battery isolation strip, that prevents battery drain during transportation and storage, has been removed. With the lower access cover open presence of the battery isolation strip can be checked by a red tab protruding from the positive side of the battery compartment. Whilst lightly pressing the battery, to prevent it from falling out of the battery compartment, pull the red tab to remove the isolation strip. Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using cells Date and Time in the PARAMETERS menu. In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted in the compartment behind the bottom access cover, the time and date will be maintained. Therefore when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct and not need to be set again. To test this remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30 seconds. On re-energization the date and time should be correct. 4.2.2 Light emitting diodes (LEDs) On power up the green LED should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that the relay is healthy. The relay has non-volatile memory which remembers the state (on or off) of the alarm and trip LEDs when the relay was last energized from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate when the auxiliary supply is applied. The 8 LEDs, on the front of the relay, can be tested selecting Yes in the LED Test cell (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning). The LEDs should remain illuminated for approximately 5 seconds after the LED test is initiated. 4.2.3 Input opto-isolators This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs on the relay are functioning correctly. The P521 relay has a total of 5 opto-isolated inputs. The opto-isolated inputs should be energized one at a time, see external connection diagrams (section P51/EN CO/A11) for terminal numbers. Ensuring correct polarity, connect the auxiliary supply voltage to the appropriate terminals for the input being tested.
The status of each opto-isolated input can be viewed using the Input Status cell, in the OP PARAMETERS menu, a 1 indicating an energized input and a 0 indicating a de-energized input. When each opto-isolated input is energized one of the characters on the bottom line of the display will change to indicate the new state of the inputs. 4.2.4 Output relays This test checks that all the output relays are functioning correctly. The P521 relay has a total of 8 output relays (not including the watchdog). commissioning menu is enabled (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning). The output relays to be tested can be selected in the Trip Test cell, 0 = do not close relay and 1 = close relay. Once the output relays have been selected, they can be operated by selecting yes in the Contact Test cell. The contacts will remain closed until No is selected once again. Ensure that the Note: The contact test will be disabled if Yes is selected in the Disable Relays cell (also in COMMISSIONING menu).
The output relays should be energized one at a time and the appropriate terminals should be checked with a continuity tester. Operation will be confirmed by the continuity tester operating for a normally open contact and ceasing to operate for a normally closed contact. Reset the output relays by selecting No in the Contact Test cell. Note: It should be ensured that thermal ratings of anything connected to the output relays during the contact test procedure is not exceeded by the associated output relay being operated for too long. It is therefore advised that the time between application and removal of contact test is kept to the minimum.
4.2.5
Rear communications port This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote location and will vary depending on the communications standard being adopted. It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay to the remote location, just the relays rear communications port and any protocol converter necessary. Note: The rear communications port must be enabled before access can commence. The port is enabled by selecting Yes in the CTRL Comms cell (COMMUNICATIONS menu). Connection MODBUS or IEC60870-5-103 EIA(RS)485 Screen +ve ve Table 2: Rear communications port terminals Terminal P521 29 31 32
Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P521 4.2.5.1 MODBUS communications
Connect a portable PC running the appropriate MODBUS Master Station software to the relays EIA(RS)485 port via an EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 interface converter. The terminal numbers for the relays EIA(RS)485 port are given in Table 2. Ensure that the relay address, baud rate and parity settings in the application software are set the same as those in cells Relay Address, Baud rate and Parity (COMMUNICATIONS menu) of the relay. Check that communications with this relay can be established. 4.2.5.2 IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) communications IEC60870-5-103/VDEW communication systems are designed to have a local Master Station and this should be used to verify that the relays EIA(RS)485 port is working. The terminal numbers for the relays EIA(RS)485 port are given in Table 2. Ensure that the relay address and baud rate settings in the application software are set the same as those in cells Relay Address and Baud rate (COMMUNICATIONS menu) of the relay. Check that, using the Master Station, communications with the relay can be established. 4.2.6 Current differential communications This test verifies that the relays current differential EIA(RS)232/EIA(RS)485/fiber optic communications ports and any other peripheral devices (P59x, P595 etc.) used for communications between the P521 current differential relays, at each end of the feeder being protected, are operating correctly. 4.2.6.1 Direct fiber optic communications Set the Loopback Test cell (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning menu) to CHANNEL_1 (=ON). Using a length of fiber optic cable, terminated with an ST connector at each end, connect the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) ports on the rear of the relay together. The relay will now respond as if it is connected to a remote relay with the current at the remote end equal to and in phase with the current injected at the local end. Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms are raised. As the loopback alarm is still active it will not reset. Check communication statistics (errored messages etc.) in the Protection Comms column (MEASUREMENTS menu). When connecting or disconnecting optical fibers care should be taken not to look directly into the transmit port or end of the optical fiber. 4.2.6.2 Direct EIA(RS)485 communications Set the Loopback Test cell (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning menu) to CHANNEL_1 (=ON). Using 2 short link wires connect the following: SK1 terminal 4 to SK1 terminal 6 And SK1 terminal 5 to SK1 terminal 7
The relay will now respond as if it is connected to a remote relay with the current at the remote end equal to and in phase with the current injected at the local end. Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms are raised. As the loopback alarm is still active it will not reset. Check the communication statistics (e.g. Errored messages etc.) in the Protection Comms column (MEASUREMENTS menu). 4.2.6.3 EIA(RS)232 communications The EIA(RS)232 connections would normally be used to connect the P521 to a modem, or similar device, as a direct link between relays would be practically impossible with EIA(RS)232s limited transmission distance. Set the Loopback Test cell (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning menu) to ON. Using a short link wire connect the transmit (SK1 terminal 1) and receive (SK1 terminal 2) ports on the rear of the relay together. The relay will now respond as if it is connected to a remote relay with the current at the remote end equal to and in phase with the current injected at the local end. Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms are raised. As the loopback alarm is still active it will not reset. Check the communication statistics (e.g. Errored messages etc.) in the Protection Comms column (MEASUREMENTS menu). 4.2.6.4 Communications using modems Carefully examine the unit to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation. Check that the external wiring to the modem is correct to the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram, supplied by the modem manufacturer. Ensure that the modem is being supplied with the correct auxiliary voltage. Initiate a Local Analog Loopback test following the modem user manual. Return to the P521 relay and select CHANNEL_1 (=ON) in the Loopback cell (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning). The relay will then respond as if it is connected to a remote relay with the current at the remote end equal to and in phase with the current injected at the local end. Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms are raised. As the loopback alarm is still active it will not reset. Check channel status, propagation delays and communication statistics in Protection Comms column (MEASUREMENTS menu). 4.2.6.5 Communications using P595 interfacing device Carefully examine the unit to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation. Check that the external wiring to the P595 is correct to the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram. Ensure that the applied auxiliary supply voltage corresponds to that stated on the rating label. The rating label is located on the underside of the unit and on the lower side face in front of the terminal strip. Set the Loopback Test cell (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning menu) to ON. Using 2 short link wires connect the following: -X9 terminal 4 to X9 terminal 1 And -X9 terminal 5 to X9 terminal 2
The relay will now respond as if it is connected to a remote relay with the current at the remote end equal to and in phase with the current injected at the local end. Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms are raised. As the loopback alarm is still active it will not reset. Check the communication statistics (e.g. Errored messages etc.) in the Protection Comms column (MEASUREMENTS menu). 4.2.6.6 Communications using P591 interface units The P591 converts the optical output of the P521 relay to an electrical signal for a PCM multiplexer with G.703 interfaces. The unit is housed in a size 20TE case and should be located near to the multiplexer. Before loopback testing can begin some other checks must be completed. 4.2.6.6.1 P591 visual inspection Carefully examine the unit to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation. The rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the unit should be checked to ensure it is correct for the particular installation. Ensure that the case earthing connection, top left-hand corner at the rear of the case, is used to connect the unit to a local earth bar using an adequate conductor. 4.2.6.6.2 P591 insulation Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be done and they havent been performed during installation. Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 500V. The auxiliary dc supply terminals should be temporarily connected together. The insulation resistance should be greater than 100M at 500V. On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected to the P591. 4.2.6.6.3 P591 external wiring Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram. The connection diagram number appears on the rating label under the top access cover on the front of the P591. The corresponding connection diagram will have been supplied with the AREVA T&D order acknowledgement for the P591. Note: It is especially important that the dc supplies are wired with the correct polarity.
4.2.6.6.4 P591 auxiliary supply P591 units operate from a dc only auxiliary supply within the operative range of 19V to 65V for a 24 48V version and 87.5V to 300V for a 110 250V version. Without energizing the P591 units measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the operating range. It should be noted that the P591 interface unit is designed to withstand an ac ripple component of up to 12% of the normal dc auxiliary supply. However, in all cases the peak value of the dc supply must not exceed the maximum specified operating limit.
Do not energize the P591 using the battery charger with the battery disconnected as this can irreparably damage the units power supply circuitry. Energize the P591 only if the auxiliary supply is within the specified operating ranges. If a P991 test block is provided, it may be necessary to link across the front of the test plug to connect the auxiliary supply to the P591. 4.2.6.6.5 P591 light emitting diodes (LEDs) On power up the green SUPPLY HEALTHY LED should illuminate and stay on, thus indicating that the P591 is healthy. 4.2.6.6.6 Loopback test with P591 Remove any external wiring from terminals 3, 4, 7 and 8 at the rear of each P591 unit. Loopback the G.703 signals on each unit by connecting a wire link between terminals 3 and 7, and a second wire between terminals 4 and 8. Measure and record the optical signal strength received by the P591 by disconnecting the optical fiber from the receive port on the rear of the unit and connecting it to an optical power meter. The mean level should be in the range 16.8dBm to 25.4dBm. If the mean level is outside of this range check the size and type of fiber being used. Measure and record the optical output power of the transmit port of the P591 using the optical power meter and length of 50/125mm optical fiber. The mean value should be 19.8dBm 3dBm. Ensure that the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) optical fibers between the P521 relay and P591 units are connected. Return to the P521 relay and select CHANNEL_1 (=ON) in the Loopback cell (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning). The relay will then respond as if it is connected to a remote relay with the current at the remote end equal to and in phase with the current injected at the local end. Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms are raised. As the loopback alarm is still active it will not reset. Check channel status, propagation delays and communication statistics in Protection Comms column (MEASUREMENTS menu). 4.2.6.6.7 Final checks If removed, the secondary front cover should now be re-fitted to the P591. 4.2.6.7 Communications using P592 interface units The P592 converts the optical output of the P521 relay to an electrical signal for a PCM multiplexer with V.35 interfaces. The unit is housed in a size 20TE case and should be located near to the multiplexer. Before loopback testing can begin some other checks must be completed. 4.2.6.7.1 P592 visual inspection Carefully examine the unit to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation. The rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the unit should be checked to ensure it is correct for the particular installation. Ensure that the case earthing connection, top left-hand corner at the rear of the case, is used to connect the unit to a local earth bar using an adequate conductor.
Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P521 4.2.6.7.2 P592 insulation
Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be done and they havent been performed during installation. Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 500V. The auxiliary dc supply terminals should be temporarily connected together. Note: The V.35 circuits of the P592 are isolated from all other circuits but are electrically connected to the outer case. The circuits must not therefore be insulation or impulse tested to the case.
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100M at 500V. On completion of the insulation resistance tests ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected to the P592. 4.2.6.7.3 P592 external wiring Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram. The connection diagram number appears on the rating label under the top access cover on the front of the P592. The corresponding connection diagram will have been supplied with the AREVA T&D order acknowledgement for the P592. Note: It is especially important that the dc supplies are wired with the correct polarity.
4.2.6.7.4 P592 auxiliary supply P592 units operate from a dc only auxiliary supply within the operative range of 19V to 300V. Without energizing the P592 units measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the operating range. It should be noted that the P592 interface unit is designed to withstand an ac ripple component of up to 12% of the normal dc auxiliary supply. However, in all cases the peak value of the dc supply must not exceed the maximum specified operating limit. Do not energize the P592 using the battery charger with the battery disconnected as this can irreparably damage the units power supply circuitry. Energize the P592 only if the auxiliary supply is within the specified operating ranges. If a P991 test block is provided, it may be necessary to link across the front of the test plug to connect the auxiliary supply to the P592. 4.2.6.7.5 P592 light emitting diodes (LEDs) On power up the green SUPPLY HEALTHY LED should illuminate and stay on indicating that the P592 is healthy. The four red LEDs can be tested by appropriate setting of the DIL switches on the units front plate. Set the data rate switch according to the communication channel bandwidth available. Set all other switches to 0. To illuminate the DSR OFF and CTS OFF LEDs, disconnect the V.35 connector from the rear of the P592 and set the DSR and CTS switches to 0. The OPTO LOOPBACK and V.35 LOOPBACK LEDs can be illuminated by setting their corresponding switches to 1. Once operation of the LEDs has been established set all DIL switches, except for the OPTO LOOPBACK switch, to 0 and reconnect the V.35 connector.
P521/EN CM/C31 Page 16/36 4.2.6.7.6 Loopback test
With the OPTO LOOPBACK switch in the 1 position the receive and transmit optical ports are electrically connected together. This allows the optical fiber communications between the P521 relay and the P592 to be tested, but not the internal circuitry of the P592 itself. Measure and record the optical signal strength received by the P592 by disconnecting the optical fiber from the receive port on the rear of the unit and connecting it to an optical power meter. The mean level should be in the range -16.8dBm to -25.4dBm. If the mean level is outside of this range check the size and type of fiber being used. Measure and record the optical output power of the transmit port of the P592 using the optical power meter and length of 50/125mm optical fiber. The mean value should be 19.8dBm 3dBm. Ensure that the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) optical fibers between the P521 relay and P592 units are connected. Return to the P521 relay and select CHANNEL_1 (=ON) in the Loopback cell (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning). The relay will then respond as if it is connected to a remote relay with the current at the remote end equal to and in phase with the current injected at the local end. Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms are raised. As the loopback alarm is still active it will not reset. Check channel status, propagation delays and communication statistics in Protection Comms column (MEASUREMENTS menu). 4.2.6.7.7 Final checks If removed, the secondary front cover should now be re-fitted to the P592. 4.2.6.8 Communications using P593 interface units The P593 converts the optical output of the P521 relay to an electrical signal for a PCM multiplexer with X.21 interfaces. The unit is housed in a size 20TE case and should be located near to the multiplexer. Before loopback testing can begin some other checks must be completed. 4.2.6.8.1 P593 visual inspection Carefully examine the unit to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation. The rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the unit should be checked to ensure it is correct for the particular installation. Ensure that the case earthing connection, top left-hand corner at the rear of the case, is used to connect the unit to a local earth bar using an adequate conductor. 4.2.6.8.2 P593 insulation Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be done and they have not been performed during installation. Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 500V. The auxiliary dc supply terminals should be temporarily connected together.
Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P521 Note:
P521/EN CM/C31 Page 17/36 The X.21 circuits of the P593 are isolated from all other circuits but are electrically connected to the outer case. The circuits must not therefore be insulation or impulse tested to the case.
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100M at 500V. On completion of the insulation resistance tests ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected to the P593. 4.2.6.8.3 P593 external wiring Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram. The connection diagram number appears on the rating label under the top access cover on the front of the P593. The corresponding connection diagram will have been supplied with the AREVA T&D order acknowledgement for the P593. Note: It is especially important that the dc supplies are wired with the correct polarity.
4.2.6.8.4 P593 auxiliary supply P593 units operate from a dc only auxiliary supply within the operative range of 19.5V to 300V. Without energizing the P593 units measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the operating range. It should be noted that the P593 interface unit is designed to withstand an ac ripple component of up to 12% of the normal dc auxiliary supply. However, in all cases the peak value of the dc supply must not exceed the maximum specified operating limit. Do not energize the P593 using the battery charger with the battery disconnected as this can irreparably damage the units power supply circuitry. Energize the P593 only if the auxiliary supply is within the specified operating ranges. If a P991 test block is provided, it may be necessary to link across the front of the test plug to connect the auxiliary supply to the P593. 4.2.6.8.5 P593 light emitting diodes (LEDs) On power up the green SUPPLY LED should illuminate and stay on indicating that the P593 is healthy. Set the X.21 LOOPBACK switch to ON. The green CLOCK and red X.21 LOOPBACK LEDs should illuminate. Reset the X.21 LOOPBACK switch to the OFF position. Set the OPTO LOOPBACK switch to ON. The red OPTO LOOPBACK LED should illuminate. Do not reset the OPTO LOOPBACK switch as it is required in this position for the next test. 4.2.6.8.6 Loopback test With the OPTO LOOPBACK switch in the ON position the receive and transmit optical ports are electrically connected together. This allows the optical fiber communications between the P521 relay and the P593 to be tested, but not the internal circuitry of the P593 itself. Measure and record the optical signal strength received by the P593 by disconnecting the optical fiber from the receive port on the rear of the unit and connecting it to an optical power meter. The mean level should in the range 16.8dBm to 25.4dBm. If the mean level is outside of this range check the size and type of fiber being used.
Measure and record the optical output power of the transmit port of the P593 using the optical power meter and length of 50/125mm optical fiber. The mean value should be 19.8dBm 3dBm. Ensure that the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) optical fibers between the P521 relay and P593 units are connected. Set the OPTO LOOPBACK and X.21 LOOPBACK switch to OFF and ON respectively. With the X.21 LOOPBACK switch in this position the Receive Data and Transmit Data lines of the X.21 communication interface are connected together. This allows the optical fiber communications between the P521 relay and the P593, and the internal circuitry of the P593 itself to be tested. Return to the P521 relay and select CHANNEL_1 (=ON) in the Loopback cell (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning). The relay will then respond as if it is connected to a remote relay with the current at the remote end equal to and in phase with the current injected at the local end. Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms are raised. As the loopback alarm is still active it will not reset. Check channel status, propagation delays and communication statistics in Protection Comms column (MEASUREMENTS menu). 4.2.6.8.7 Final checks If removed, the secondary front cover should now be re-fitted to the P593. 4.2.7 Current inputs This test verifies that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances. All relays will leave the factory set for operation at a system frequency of 50Hz. If operation at 60Hz is required then this must be set in the Frequency cell in the OP PARAMETERS menu. Apply current equal to the line current transformer secondary winding rating to each current transformer input of the corresponding rating in turn, see table 1 or external connection diagram (section P521/EN CO) for appropriate terminal numbers, checking its magnitude using a multimeter. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the MEASUREMENTS/Current/General column and value displayed recorded. Note: Some of the relay protection elements may operate during this test, depending upon the relay setting. Terminals A B C N A B C N 49 and 50 51 and 52 53 and 54 55 and 56 41 and 42 43 and 44 45 and 46 47 and 48 1 1 1 1 5 5 5 5 Table 3: Current input connections
CT Rating (Amps)
The measured current values displayed on the relay LCD, or a portable PC connected to the front communication port, will be in primary amperes, providing the CT ratio has been set. The values displayed should be equal to the applied current multiplied by the corresponding current transformer ratio set in the CT Ratio column (CONFIGURATION menu). The measurement accuracy of the relay is typically 0.2% at rated current. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
5.
SETTING CHECKS
The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific relay settings (i.e. both the relays function and programmable scheme logic settings), for the particular installation, have been correctly applied to the relay. If the application-specific settings are not available, ignore sections 5.1 and 5.2. Note: The trip circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker. For additional security the P521 output contacts can be disabled using the commissioning menu. For more information on this feature refer to section 3.5.4.1 of the User Guide (section P521/EN FT).
5.1
Apply application-specific settings There are two methods of applying the settings to the relay: Transferring them from a pre-prepared setting file to the relay using a portable PC running the appropriate software via the relays front EIA(RS)232 port, located under the bottom access cover, or rear EIA(RS)485/K Bus communications port. This method is preferred for transferring function settings as it is much faster and there is less margin for error. If a setting file has been created for the particular application and provided on a diskette this will further reduce the commissioning time. Enter them manually via the relays user interface.
5.2
Demonstrate correct relay operation Test 4.2.7 has already demonstrated that the relay is within calibration, thus the purpose of these tests is as follows: To determine that the primary protection function of the relay, current differential, can trip according to the correct application settings. To verify correct setting of any backup phase overcurrent protection. To verify correct assignment of the trip contacts, by monitoring the response to a selection of fault injections.
5.2.1
Current differential bias characteristic To avoid spurious operation of any overcurrent, earth fault, negative sequence overcurrent, thermal overload, broken conductor, under current or breaker fail elements these should be disabled for the duration of the differential element tests.
Refer to the User Guide for information on how this can be done. Make a note of which elements need to be re-enabled after testing. The relay should also be set to loopback mode isolating it from the remote end. Refer to section 4.2.6.1. 5.2.1.1 Connect the test circuit The following tests require a variable auto transformer (variac) and two resistors connected as shown in Figure 1. Alternatively an injection test set can be used to supply a and b.
Ra L Rb Ph b N Ph a
Ia
A
Ib
P1043ENa
Figure 1:
Connection for bias characteristic testing
A current is injected into the A phase which is used as the bias current and another current is injected into the B phase which is used as differential current. a is always greater than b. 5.2.1.2 Lower slope Make sure that the relay is in loopback mode as described in 4.2.6.1. Adjust the variac and the resistor to give a bias current of 1pu in the A-phase. (Note: 1pu = 1A into terminals 49-50 for 1A applications; or 1pu = 5A into terminals 41-42 for 5A applications). The relay will trip and any contacts associated with the current differential protection will operate, this will be accompanied by the I DIFF and I DIFF I-TRIP alarms. Some LEDs may illuminate and the yellow alarm LED will start to flash. Acknowledge the alarm by pressing the key followed by key. The yellow LED will stop flashing and become continuously illuminated. Operation of the A Phase element will be indicated by an A appearing in the IDiff Trip Flags cell, (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning) as shown below. IDiff Trip Flags TRIP: A This indication will remain until the A-Phase differential current exits the tripping region of the biased differential characteristic. When the current in the A Phase is established, close the switch and slowly increase the current in the B phase from zero until Phase B trips. This will be indicated by a B appearing in the IDiff Trip Flags menu, in addition to A that is already indicated, as shown below. IDiff Trip Flags TRIP: A B
Record the phase B current magnitude and check that it corresponds to the formula below. Switch OFF the ac supply, read and clear all alarms. The formula below can be used to calculate the B phase operate current (enter slope k1 in pu form, i.e. percentage/100). B phase operate current = 0.5 x (s1 + k1) pu +/- 10% 5.2.1.3 Upper slope Repeat the test in 5.2.1.2 with the bias current set in the A-phase to be 3pu. When the current in A Phase is established, close the switch and slowly increase the current in the B phase from zero until phase B trips. Record the phase B current magnitude and check that it corresponds to the information below. Switch OFF the ac supply and reset the alarms. The formula below can be used to calculate the B phase operate current (enter slope k1 in pu form, i.e. percentage/100). B Phase operate current = 0.5 x [(3 x k2) {(k2 k1) x s2 } + s1] pu +/- 20% Note that especially for 5A applications the duration of current injections should be short to avoid overheating of the variac, resistors or injection test set. 5.2.2 Current differential operating time Retaining the same test circuit as before, prepare for an instantaneous injection of 3pu current in the A phase with no current in the B phase (B phase switch open). Connect a timer to start when the fault injection is applied and to stop when the trip occurs. The operating time of the relay should be recorded. Repeat the test for phases B and C, reconfiguring the test equipment accordingly. The average of the recorded operating times for the three phases should be less than the values shown in table 4. Switch OFF the ac supply and reset the alarms. Baud Rate (Protection Comms) 9.6 kb/s 19.2 kb/s 56 kb/s 64 kb/s Table 4: P521 Instantaneous operating times Note: Where an IDMT or DMT delay is set, in the PROTECTION G1 /[87] Current Diff menu column, the expected operating time is typically within +/- 5% of that for the curve equation plus the instantaneous delay quoted above. Maximum Operating Times 100 ms 80 ms 45 ms 45 ms
Upon completion of the tests any overcurrent, earth fault, negative sequence overcurrent, thermal overload, broken conductor, under current or breaker fail elements which were disabled for testing purposes must have their original settings restored in the appropriate menu columns.
P521/EN CM/C31 Page 22/36 5.2.3 Backup phase overcurrent protection
If the overcurrent protection function is being used, the > element should be tested. If not, skip to section 5.3 To avoid spurious operation of any other protection functions, such as current differential, breaker fail etc. these should be disabled for the duration of the overcurrent tests. Make a note of which elements need to be re-enabled after testing. Note: If the > element is set to be enabled on Backup only (i.e. when the protection communications fail), it will be necessary to deliberately force a communications channel failure in order to test it. This can be achieved by removing the loopback test, and ensuring that the relay cannot communicate with the remote end relay.
Set Loopback cell (AUTOMAT. CTRL /Commissioning) to OFF Observe that the relay raises a COMMS FAIL alarm. This may take up to 10 seconds depending upon the setting of the Comms Fail Timer (COMMUNICATIONS menu).
5.2.3.1 Connect the test circuit Determine which output relay has been selected to operate when an > trip occurs by viewing the tI> cell in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Output Relays menu. The associated terminal numbers can be found in the external connection diagram (section P521/EN CO). Connect the output relay so that its operation will trip the test set and stop the timer. Connect the current output of the test set to the A phase current input of the relay (terminals 49 and 50 where 1A current transformers are being used and terminals 41 and 42 for 5A current transformers). Ensure that the timer will start when the current is applied to the relay. 5.2.3.2 Perform the test Ensure that the timer is reset. Apply a current of twice the setting in I> cell (PROTECTION G1/[50/51] Phase OC) to the relay and note the time displayed when the timer stops. Check that the red trip LED has illuminated. 5.2.3.3 Check the operating time Check that the operating time recorded by the timer is within the range shown in Table 5. Note: Except for the definite time characteristic, the operating times given in Table 5 are for a time multiplier or time dial setting of 1. Therefore, to obtain the operating time at other time multiplier or time dial settings, the time given in Table 5 must be multiplied by the appropriate TMS or TD setting.
In addition, for definite time and inverse characteristics there is an additional delay of up to 0.02 second and 0.08 second respectively that may need to be added to the relays acceptable range of operating times.
For all characteristics allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. Characteristic Operating Time at Twice Current Setting and Time Multiplier/Time Dial Setting of 1.0 Nominal (seconds) DMT IEC STI (Short Time Inverse) IEC SI (Standard Inverse) IEC VI (Very Inverse) IEC EI (Extremely Inverse) UK LTI (Long Time Inverse) CO2 (Short Time Inverse) IEEE MI (Moderately Inverse) CO8 (Inverse) IEEE VI (Very Inverse) IEEE EI (Extremely Inverse) RI Table 5: t>1 setting 1.78 10.03 13.50 26.67 120.00 1.73 3.80 2.16 7.03 9.52 4.52 Characteristic operating times for > Range (seconds) Setting 2% 1.60 1.96 9.00 11.0 12.2 14.5 24 .0 29.3 108 132 1.56 1.90 3.42 4.18 1.94 2.38 6.33 7.73 8.57 10.5 4.07 4.97
Upon completion of the tests any current differential, negative sequence overcurrent, thermal overload, broken conductor, under current or breaker fail elements which were disabled for testing purposes must have their original settings restored in the appropriate menu columns. 5.3 Check application settings The settings applied should be carefully checked against the required applicationspecific settings to ensure that they are correct, and have not been mistakenly altered during the injection test. There are two methods of checking the settings: Extract the settings from the relay using a portable PC running the appropriate software via the front EIA(RS)232 port, located under the bottom access cover, or rear communications port (with an appropriate protocol converter connected). Compare the settings transferred from the relay with the original written application-specific setting record. (For cases where the customer has only provided a printed copy of the required settings but a portable PC is available). Step through the settings using the relays user interface and compare them with the original application-specific setting record.
6.
END TO END TESTS

In section 4.2.6 a loopback test was initiated on the relay fiber optic communications channels, together with the P59x/modem interface units, if installed, to verify correct operation of the communications channel local to the P521 relay whilst completing the remaining tests. In this test the loopback is removed and, if possible, satisfactory communications between P521 relays in the same group will be confirmed. Note: The trip circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.
6.1
Remove the loopback test As well as removing the loopback, this section checks that all wiring and optical fibers/pilots are reconnected. If modems, P592 or P593 interface units are installed the application-specific settings will also be applied. Check the relay alarms to ensure that no communications failure alarms have occurred whilst the loopback test has been in progress. Set cell the Loopback cell to OFF. Restore the communications channels as per the appropriate sub-section below.
6.1.1
Direct fiber optic communications Remove the loopback test fiber and reconnect the fiber optic cables for communications between relays, ensuring correct placement. When connecting or disconnecting optical fibers care should be taken not to look directly into the transmit port or end of the optical fiber.
6.1.2
Direct EIA(RS)485 communications Remove the 2 short link wires between SK1 terminals 4 and 6 and SK1 terminals 5 and 7. Ensure that all external wiring that has been removed to facilitate testing is replaced in accordance with the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram.
6.1.3
EIA(RS)232 communications Remove the short link wire between SK1 terminals 1 and 2. Ensure that all external wiring that has been removed to facilitate testing is replaced in accordance with the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram.
6.1.3.1 Communications using modems Remove Local Analog Loopback test following the modem user manual. 6.1.3.2 Communications using P595 interfacing device Remove the short link wires between X9 terminals 1 and 4 and X9 terminals 2 and 5. Ensure that all external wiring that has been removed to facilitate testing is replaced in accordance with the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram.
If isolation transformers are not used between long communications wires, these should be handled as pilot wire circuits to avoid the risk of electric shock.
Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P521 6.1.4 Communications using P591 interface units Return to the P591 units.
Ensure that all external wiring that has been removed to facilitate testing is replaced in accordance with the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram. If applicable, replace the secondary front cover on the P591 units. 6.1.5 Communications using P592 interface units Return to the P592 units. Ensure that all external wiring that has been removed to facilitate testing is replaced in accordance with the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram. Set the V.35 LOOPBACK switch to the 0 position. Set the CLOCK SWITCH, DSR, CTS and DATA RATE DIL switches on each unit to the positions required for the specific application and ensure the OPTO LOOPBACK switch is in the 0 position. If applicable, replace the secondary front cover on the P592 units. Note: V.35 Loopback on the remote P592 can be selected to check the communications between the local relay, the local P592 and the communication link itself.
6.1.6
Communications using P593 interface units Return to the P593 units. Ensure that all external wiring that has been removed to facilitate testing is replaced in accordance with the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram. Set the X.21 LOOPBACK switch to the OFF position and ensure the OPTO LOOPBACK switch is also in the OFF position. If applicable, replace the secondary front cover on the P593 units. Note: X.21 Loopback on the remote P593 can be selected to check the communications between the local relay, the local P593 and the X.21 communication link itself. This setting on the local P593 can also be used to check the communications between the local relay and the local P593 if required.
6.2
Verify communications between relays Check for correct communications between relays as per the appropriate sub-section below.
6.2.1
Communication checks for direct fiber or P59x connected relays The following communication checks confirm that the optical power at the transmit and receive ports of the local relay are within the recommended operating limits. However, these checks can only be performed with the relays (and P59x interface units if installed) at the other end of the feeder known to be functional and energized. Measure and record the optical signal strength received by the local P521 relay by disconnecting the optical fiber from the Channel 1 receive port and connecting it to an optical power meter. The mean level should be in the range 16.8dBm to -25.4dBm for an 850nm port and in the range 7dBm to -37dBm for a 1300nm port. If the mean level is outside of this range check the size and type of fiber being used.
When connecting or disconnecting optical fibers care should be taken not to look directly into the transmit port or end of the optical fiber. Measure and record the optical power of the Channel 1 transmit port using the optical power meter and length of optical fiber. The mean value should be in the range 16.8dBm to 22.8dBm for an 850nm port and in the range -7dBm to -13dBm for a 1300nm port. Ensure that all transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) optical fibers are reconnected to the P521, ensuring correct placement. Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms are raised. Check that the number of valid messages is increasing and that the number of errored messages stops increasing. These cells can be found in the MEASUREMENTS/Protection Comms column. The protection comms statistics can be reset, if necessary, by pressing Comms Stats RST cell. 6.2.2 in the
Communication checks for metallic communications (direct EIA(RS)485, P595, EIA(RS)232 and modem connected relays) If isolation transformers are not used between long communications wires, these should be handled as pilot wire circuits to avoid the risk of electric shock. Ensure that all transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) leads are reconnected to the P521. Note: For EIA(RS)232 communications it must be ensured that the SK1 terminal 3 is also connected. Failure to do this may result in unreliable communications.
Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms are raised. Check that the number of valid messages is increasing and that the number of errored messages stops increasing. These cells can be found in the MEASUREMENTS/Protection Comms column. The protection comms statistics can be reset, if necessary, by pressing Comms Stats RST cell. in the
7.
ON-LOAD CHECKS
The objectives of the on-load checks are to: confirm the external wiring to the current inputs is correct. measure the magnitude of capacitive current. ensure the on-load differential current is well below the relay setting. check the polarity of the line current transformers at each end is consistent.
However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the energization of the plant being protected and the other P521 relays in the group have been commissioned. Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has been removed to allow testing.
If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. 7.1 Confirm current transformer wiring Measure the current transformer secondary values for each input using a multimeter connected in series with the corresponding relay current input. Ensure the current flowing in the neutral circuit of the current transformers is negligible. Compare the values of the secondary phase currents with the relays measured values, which can be found in the MEASUREMENTS/Current/General menu column. Note: Under normal load conditions the earth fault function will measure little, if any, current. It is therefore necessary to simulate a phase to neutral fault. This can be achieved by temporarily disconnecting one or two of the line current transformer connections to the relay and shorting the terminals of these current transformer secondary windings. However, if a single dedicated current transformer is used for the earth fault function, it is not possible to check the relays measured values.
If no CT ratio has been entered (CONFIGURATION/CT Ratios) the currents displayed on the LCD or a portable PC connected to the front EIA(RS)232 communication port of the relay should be equal to the applied secondary current. The values should be within 1% of the applied secondary currents. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. If a CT ratio has been entered the currents displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied secondary current multiplied by the corresponding current transformer ratio. Again the values should be within 1% of the expected value, plus an additional allowance for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. 7.2 Measure capacitive charging current With the feeder energized from one end only, compare the local and remote measured currents in the MEASUREMENTS/Current Diff menu column to confirm that the feeder capacitive charging current is similar to that expected on all three phases. Check that the s1 setting is higher than 2.5 times the capacitive charging current. If this is not the case notify the Engineer who determined the original settings of the setting required to ensure stability under normal operating conditions. 7.3 Check differential current With the feeder supplying load current check that the relay measurements in the Current/General menu column are as expected and that the differential current is similar to the value of the capacitive charging current previously measured for all three phases. 7.4 Check consistency of current transformer polarity The load current should be high enough to be certain beyond doubt that the main current transformers are connected with the same polarity to each relay in the group. There is a possibility on cable circuits with high line capacitance that the load current could be masked by the capacitive charging current. If necessary reverse the connections to the main current transformers and check that the A phase differential current in cell Differential IA (MEASUREMENTS/Current Diff) is significantly higher
than for the normal connection. If the differential current falls with the connection reversed the main current transformers may not be correct and should be thoroughly checked. Repeat the test for phases B and C using the Differential IB and Differential IC cells respectively.
8.
FINAL CHECKS
The tests are now complete. Remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform the wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. If the relay is in a new installation, or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. These counters can be reset using the CB Operation RST and Amps (n) RST cells in the (RECORD/CB Monitoring). If a P991/MMLG test block is installed, remove the P992/MMLB test plug and replace the cover so that the protection is put into service. Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records, alarms and LEDs have been reset before leaving the relay.
9.
9.1
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance period It is recommended that products supplied by AREVA T&D receive periodic monitoring after installation. As with all products some deterioration with time is inevitable. In view of the critical nature of protective relays, and their infrequent operation, it is desirable to confirm that they are operating correctly at regular intervals. AREVA T&D protective relays are designed for a life in excess of 20 years. MiCOM P521 current differential relay is self-supervising and so requires less maintenance than earlier designs of relay. Most problems will result in an alarm so that remedial action can be taken. However, some periodic tests should be done to ensure that the relay is functioning correctly and the external wiring is intact. The operation of the P59x interface units, when installed, is continuously monitored by the P521 relay and a communication failure alarm will therefore be given if a P59x should cease to work properly. Note: A communication failure alarm could be caused by the failure of the equipment forming the communication link and can not in itself be conclusive evidence of a faulty P59x interface unit.
If a Preventative Maintenance Policy exists within the customers organization then the recommended product checks should be included in the regular programme. Maintenance periods will depend on many factors, such as: operating environment accessibility of the site
Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P521 9.2 amount of available manpower importance of the installation in the power system consequences of failure
Maintenance checks Although some functionality checks can be performed from a remote location by utilizing the communications ability of the relays, these are predominantly restricted to checking that the relay is measuring the applied currents and voltages accurately, and checking the circuit breaker maintenance counters. Therefore it is recommended that maintenance checks are performed locally (i.e. at the substation itself). Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the Safety and Technical Data sections and the ratings on the equipments rating label.
9.2.1
Alarms The alarm status LED should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions exist. If so, press the read key [ ] repeatedly to step through the alarms. Clear the alarms to extinguish the LED.
9.2.2
Opto-isolators The opto-isolated inputs can be checked to ensure that the relay responds to their energization by repeating the commissioning test detailed in section 4.2.3 of this Commissioning and Maintenance Guide.
9.2.3
Output relays The output relays can be checked to ensure that they operate by repeating the commissioning test detailed in section 4.2.4 of this Commissioning and Maintenance Guide.
9.2.4
Measurement accuracy If the power system is energized, the values measured by the relay can be compared with known system values to check that they are in the approximate range that is expected. If they are then the analog/digital conversion and calculations are being performed correctly by the relay. Suitable test methods can be found in section 7.1 of this Commissioning and Maintenance Guide. Alternatively, the values measured by the relay can be checked against known values injected into the relay via the test block, if fitted, or injected directly into the relay terminals. A suitable test method can be found in section 4.2.7 of this Commissioning and Maintenance Guide. These tests will prove the calibration accuracy is being maintained.
9.3
Equipment failure Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the content of the Safety and Technical Data sections and the ratings on the equipments rating label. The MiCOM P521 relay is fully digital and performs constant self-diagnosis. Any failure of software or hardware elements is instantly detected. As soon as an internal fault is detected, depending on its type (minor or major), an alarm message is
displayed as a priority on the front panel LCD before the fault LED is illuminated (fixed or flashing) and the watchdog relay is closed (if the fault is a major one). An equipment failure (major or minor) cannot be acknowledged on the front panel (using the dedicated tactile button keypad). Only the disappearance of the cause will acknowledge the fault and hence reset the fault LED. 9.3.1 Minor fault A control communications failure would be regarded as a minor fault by the P521. If the control communications are faulty, the protection and automation modules are not affected. Message: "COMM.ERROR": Control communication faulty Cause: Hardware or software failure of the control communications module. Action: Withdraw the active part and return it to the factory for repair. Alternative: If the control communication is not used, disable communication in the COMMUNICATION/ CTRL Comms menu (CTRL Comms? = No). Message: RAM ERROR : Battery backed RAM faulty BATTERY FAIL: Battery faulty or flat. Cause: See section 9.4.3 of this Commissioning and Maintenance Guide. If the message still remains after restart return the module to the factory for repair. 9.3.2 Protection comms fault As soon as a problem with the protection comms is detected the operation of the main protection is stopped. All other protection elements continue to operate and those selected as backup in the current setting group will be enabled. Message: COMMS ALARM CH1: communications channel failure detected. Cause: Hardware or software failure of the communications card. Hardware failure of the communications module retained in the case when the active part is withdrawn. Failure of the relay at the distant end of the communications link. Failure of a device in the communications path or break in the communications link. Live parts exposed within the P521 case, when the P521 module is removed.
Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P521 Action:
Determine the location of the failure using the P520L loopback test box (see Accessories section). Initiate a loopback test on the back of each of the relays. If the protection comms alarm resets then the fault is with the communications link not the relays. The relays should assist with diagnosing the location of the fault by indicating the faulty path (Tx, Rx or both). If the protection comms alarm does not reset on one relay it is likely that the relay is faulty. To diagnose if the fault is in the active part (withdrawable part) of the relay or the protection communications card, remove the relay and plug in the P520L loopback test box as shown in Figure 2. It is recommended that the battery is tested, before inserting the test box, by selecting battery test and checking that the green LED illuminates. With the loopback tester inserted select Loopback Test using the selector switch and ensure that the green LED illuminates. Initiate a loopback test from the remote relay so that the comms signal passes through the local relay communications card. If the comms fail alarm on the remote relay disappears, then the protection comms card is functioning correctly, hence the problem is with only the active part. If the comms fail alarm does not reset then the local protection comms card is faulty.
Loopback Test Box
Green Test LED Fuse Holder 100MAF 250V

BATT TS T LOOPBA CK OFF
Test Mode Switch Relay Case
Protection Comms Card

Figure 2: Application of P520L loopback test box
P1250ENc
If the fault is with the active part of the relay, withdraw the active part and return it to the factory for repair. If the fault is with the communications module the whole relay, including the case, must be returned to the factory for repair. If the fault is in any other part of the system the relays will automatically resume communication as soon as the link is restored.
P521/EN CM/C31 Page 32/36 9.3.3 Major fault
Major faults for the MiCOM P521 relay are all software and hardware failures, except the communication faults. As soon as this type of failure is detected the watchdog (WD) is closed and all operations are stopped (protection, automation, communication). 9.3.3.1 Hardware and software faults Messages: "SETTING ERROR": Data zone in fault "EEPROM ERROR CALIBR.": Calibration data faulty "CT ERROR": Analog channel faulty DEFAULT SETTING : Default settings restored PROT COMMS FAIL : Protection Comms card faulty Cause: Hardware or software failure. Action: Restart the protection software by interrupting the auxiliary supply for approximately ten seconds. In the case of the DEFAULT SETTING and SETTING ERROR alarms the inservice settings should be re-applied. If the software fault still remains after restart withdraw the active part and return the module to the factory for repair. 9.4 9.4.1 Method of repair Replacing the active part The case and the rear terminals blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of the MiCOM P521 relay without disconnecting the scheme wiring, should replacement or repair become necessary. Note: The MiCOM range of relays have integral current transformer shorting switches which will close when the active part is removed from the case.
Remove the upper and lower flap without exerting excessive force. Remove the external screws. Under the upper flap, turn the extractor with a 3mm screwdriver and extract the active part of the relay by pulling from the upper and lower notches on the front panel of the MiCOM relay. Then reinstall the repaired or replacement relay following the above instruction in reverse, ensuring that no modification has been made to the scheme wiring. Note: The rear protection communications interface is designed to be retained inside the case to avoid disconnection of the communications.
9.4.2
Replacing the complete relay To remove the complete relay (active part and case) the entire wiring must be removed from the rear connector. Before working at the rear of the relay isolate all current supplies to the MiCOM relay and ensure that the relay is no longer energized.
DANGER: NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.
Remove all wiring (communication, logic inputs, outputs, auxiliary voltage, current inputs). Disconnect the relay earth connection from the rear of the relay. If isolation transformers are not used between long communications wires, these should be handled as pilot wire circuits to avoid the risk of electric shock. Remove the screws used to fasten the relay to the panel, rack, etc. These are the screws with the larger diameter heads that are accessible when the upper and lower flaps are installed. Withdraw the relay from the panel, rack, etc. taking care because it will be heavy due to the internal transformers. To reinstall the repaired or replacement relay follow the above instructions in reverse, ensuring that each terminal block is relocated in the correct position and the case earth and communications are replaced. Once reinstallation is complete the relay should be re-commissioned using the instruction in sections 1 to 8 of this Commissioning and Maintenance Guide. 9.4.3 Changing the battery The MiCOM P521 has a battery to maintain recorded data and the correct time when the auxiliary voltage fails. The data maintained include event, fault and disturbance records and the thermal state at the time of supply failure. The battery is designed for a life of 10 years in standard atmospheric conditions. "Battery backed RAM memory" message could be the result of a battery failure. "Battery Fail" message is the result of a battery failure. To replace the battery follow the following instructions. Open the lower flap on the front of the relay Gently extract the battery from its socket. If necessary, use a small screwdriver. Ensure that metal terminals in the battery socket are free from corrosion, grease and dust. The replacement battery should be removed from its packaging and placed into the battery holder, ensure that the polarity markings on the battery agree with those adjacent to the socket. Note: Only use a type 1/2AA lithium battery with a nominal voltage of 3.6 V.
Ensure that the battery is securely held in its socket and that the battery terminals are making good contact with the metal terminals of the socket. Close the lower flap on the front of the relay. The battery that has been removed should be disposed of in accordance with the disposal procedure for Lithium batteries in the country in which the relay is installed.
P521/EN CM/C31 Page 34/36 9.4.4 Extracting the rear communications board from the relay
Remove the two screws from under the top access panel on the front interface, followed by the two screws from under the bottom access panel. Utilizing the extractor cams located under the top and bottom access panels, extract the relay from the casing. Remove the 4 mounting screws at the rear of the case that are situated around the communications mounting plate. Pull the plate through to the front of the case taking care not to cause damage to the inside of the casing and the communications card. Insert the new communications card by carefully pushing the card from the front to the rear of the casing. Re-fit the 4 screws to securely hold the communications mounting plate in position. Reset the extractor cams to the normal flush state and insert the relay into the case, taking care to align the relay with the communications card connector. Re-fit the two screws under the top access panel on the front interface, followed by the two screws under the bottom access panel. Note: It is strongly recommended that the tests contained within sections 4.2.6 of this section be repeated once the communications interface has been changed.
Screws at top access panel
Extractor cams (behind flaps)
Screws at bottom access panel
P2189ENa
Figure 3:
Screw locations (front view)
4 Communication card mounting screws
P2188ENb
Figure 4: 9.5 9.5.1
Screw locations (back view)
Problem solving Password lost or not accepted Problem: Password lost or not accepted Cause: The MiCOM P521 relay is supplied with the password set to AAAA. This password can be changed by the user (refer to OP PARAMETERS menu in the User Guide of this manual). Action: There is an additional unique recovery password associated with the relay which can be supplied by the factory or service agent, if given details of its serial number (under the upper flap of the front panel). With this serial number, contact your AREVA T&D local dealer or AREVA T&D, After Sales Dept.
9.5.2
Communication
9.5.2.1 Values measured locally and remotely Problem: The measurements noted remotely and locally (via EIA(RS)485 communication) differ. Cause: The values accessible on the front face via the Measurement menu are refreshed every second. Those fed back via the communication and accessible by the AREVA T&D setting software generally have variable refreshing frequencies. If the refreshing
frequency of the supervision software differs from that of MiCOM P521 relay (1s), there may be a difference between indicated values. Action: Adjust the frequency for refreshing the measurements of the supervision software or of the setting software to 1 second. 9.5.2.2 MiCOM relay no longer responds Problem: No response from MiCOM P521 relay when asked by the supervision software without any communication fault message. Cause: Mainly, this type of problem is linked to an error in the MiCOM P521 communication parameters. Action: Check MiCOM P521 communication parameters (data rate, parity, etc.) are in accordance with the supervision settings. Check MiCOM P521 network address. Check that this address is not used by another device connected on the same LAN. Check that the other devices on the same LAN answer to supervision requests. 9.5.2.3 A remote command is not taken into account Problem: The communication between the relay and the PC is correct, but the relay does not accept any remote command or file downloading. Cause: Generally this is due to the fact that the relay is in a programming situation. This means that the password is active (password by on key pad). Action: Check that the password has not been set in the relay within the last 5 minutes.
Connection Diagrams MiCOM P521
P521/EN CO/C31
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
8th November 2005 2 10P52101
P521/EN CO/C31
P521/EN CO/C31 Page 1/10
P2214ENd
Figure 1:
External connections - with fiber optic communications
P2215ENd
Figure 2:
External connections - with direct EIA(RS)485 communications
P2216ENd
Figure 3:
P521 connection to P595 interface
P1737ENa
Figure 4:
P521 connection to baseband 1092A and mDSL 1095 modems (see also Figure 6)
P1738ENa
Figure 5:
P521 connection to Westermo TD32B modem (see also Figure 6)
P2264ENc
Figure 6:
Line connection diagrams
P2219ENc
Figure 7:
P521 with residually connected CTs
P2220ENc
Figure 8:
P521 with core balanced CTs
P2225ENc
Figure 9:
P521 with DY11 in zone transformer
P1491ENb
Figure 10:
External connections - with EIA(RS)232 communications
Modem Configuration MiCOM P521
P521/EN MC/C31
MODEM CONFIGURATION
8th November 2005 2 10P52101
P521/EN MC/C31
P521/EN MC/C31 Page 1/12
CONTENTS
1. 2. 3.
3.1 3.1.1 3.2 3.2.1 3.3 3.3.1 3.4 3.5 3.5.1 3.6 3.7
INTRODUCTION DEFINITIONS LEASED LINE MODEM WESTERMO TD32

DIP switch set S1 Operating modes DIP switch set S2 DCE to DTE communication types DIP switch set S3 DCE to DCE communication hardware DIP switch set S4 DIP switch set S5 Control line pull-up Line requirements Propagation delay
3 3 4
4 4 4 4 5 5 6 6 6 7 7
4.
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4
NETLINK 1095 MDSL MODEM

DIP switch set S2 DIP switch set S3 Line requirements Propagation delay
7
7 7 8 8
5.
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5
2 WIRE CAMPUS 1092A DRIVER MODEM

DIP switch set S1 DIP switch set S2 Line requirements Relay settings for 2 wire 1092A modem Propagation delay
8
8 9 9 9 9
6.
6.1 6.2

DIP switch set S1 DIP switch set S2
10
10 10
P521/EN MC/C31 Page 2/12 6.3 6.4 6.5 Line requirements Relay settings for 4 wire 1092A modem Propagation delay
Modem Configuration MiCOM P521 11 11 11
7.
7.1
P595
Propagation delay
11
11
8.
WIRE PARAMETERS
12
1.
INTRODUCTION
This section outlines the basic setting up procedure for leased line, baseband campus and NetLink mDSL modems, and P595 device. Although the setting up procedure is specific to these modems it is hoped that the setting principle could be used as a guide for modems of a similar design.
2.
DEFINITIONS
Unconditioned pilot wires: Twisted pair of metallic wire between 19 (0.9mm) and 26AWG (0.4mm). Standard dial-up telephone circuits, leased circuits that run through signal equalization equipment or standard flat modular telephone cable are not acceptable. Leased circuits that run through signal equalization equipment using the standard flat modular telephone cable. Generic name for a converter of digital data to a format suitable for transmission over unconditioned pilot wires or conditioned leased lines. The number of data symbols transmitted every second. Data Communication Equipment i.e. modems, protocol converters and line drivers. Data Terminal Equipment i.e. PCs, terminals and protection relays. Confirmation and status signals sent between communicating devices in order to check the data stream. There are two general types, hardware (RTS/CTS) and software (XON/XOFF). Transmitted data. Data going from DTE to DCE. Received data. Data going from DCE to DTE. Ready To Send. Hardware handshake generated by the DTE to determine if the DCE is ready to receive data. Expected response is from the CTS line. Clear To Send. Hardware handshake generated by the DCE in response to a RTS signal. Data Set Ready. A signal from the DCE used to indicate that it is powered and useable. Data Terminal Ready. A signal from the DTE showing it is powered and ready. Data Carrier Detect. A signal from the DCE showing that a carrier is present and the line is ready for data transmission.
Conditioned leased lines: Modem:
Baud: DCE: DTE: Handshaking:
TD: RD: RTS:
CTS: DSR: DTR: DCD:

ON
Switch shown in ON position.
3.
LEASED LINE MODEM WESTERMO TD32

The simplest way to set the modem is to use the DIP switch sets. There are five DIP switch sets in total and each sets a different aspect of the modem operation. Non defined switches are to be set to the off position.
3.1
DIP switch set S1 S1 sets the operating mode of the modem.
3.1.1
Operating modes There are three modem operating modes to choose from. These are: 1. 2. 3. Dial up Leased line answering Leased line originating
For a leased line one modem must be in originate mode (mode 3) to initiate communication and the other in answer mode (mode 2) to wait for communication to be initialized by the originate modem. On standard telephone networks (i.e. conditioned leased lines) both modems should be set to dial-up mode. See switch settings below:
Switch 1 ON
Switch 1 ON
Switch 1 ON
Leased line originating

P2094ENa
Leased line answering

P2095ENa
Standard dial up
P2096ENa
3.2
DIP switch set S2 S2 sets the type of communication between the DCE and the DTE. In this case the modem is the DCE and the MICOM P521 is the DTE.
3.2.1
DCE to DTE communication types There is a choice of 5 communication types. These are: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Asynchronous Synchronous using the clock from the P521 Synchronous using a clock generated from the local modem Synchronous using a clock recovered from the local modem via the line DTR/DSR disconnected
The P521 electrical protection communications port conforms to 3 wire EIA(RS)232 or 4 wire EIA(RS)485. Consequently the modem should be set as asynchronous with DTR/DSR disconnected.

Switch 2 ON
Asynchronous comms. DTR/DSR disconnected

P2097ENa
3.3
DIP switch set S3 S3 is the setting switch that indicates the type of line being used between the modems.
3.3.1
DCE to DCE communication hardware Three line type options are available. These are: 1. 2. 3. 4 wire connection 2 wire connection Flow control
The choice between 4 and 2 wire connection depends on whether one or two twisted pairs of conductors are available for use between the modems. For all P521 applications no flow control is required, hence the flow control should always be turned off. Flow control provides handshaking between the DCE and the DTE, but this also requires additional signal lines on top of the usual 2 or 4.
Switch 3 ON
Switch 3 ON
2 Wire Flow control off

P2098ENa
4 Wire Flow control off

P2099ENa
4- Position screw terminal
Leased line 2-wire
4- Position screw terminal
Leased line 4-wire
P2105ENa
P521/EN MC/C31 Page 6/12 3.4 DIP switch set S4
S4 sets the serial speed (input to modem) and format of the data between the modem and the relay. For optimum performance the TD32 modem should be set at 9.6kbits/s in direct mode 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and no parity (see switch setting below). Higher baud rates may be available on other modems, however, it is essential that the data rate is common throughout the communications link; i.e. the relay data rate must be the same as the serial speed of the modem and the line modulation (output from modem).
Switch 4 Serial speed and format ON
9.6Kbits/s Direct mode 8 data bits no parity

P2100ENa
3.5
DIP switch set S5 S5 sets the line modulation (output from modem) used between the modems. For optimum performance the TD32 modem should be set to V.32bis 9.6kbits/s.
Switch 5 line modulation ON
8
P2101ENa
V.32bis 9.6Kbits/s
3.5.1
Control line pull-up Since the modem will not be making use of the control lines they need to be forced high so they are permanently enabled. This is done by connecting RTS to DSR and DCD to DTR using the connector block at the top of the modem.
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
R1 TD RD RTS CTS DCD DTR DSR SG
125 103 104 105 106 109 108 107 102
P2106ENa
Modem Configuration MiCOM P521 3.6 Line requirements
The maximum transmission distance depends on the attenuation of the line. The maximum value of attenuation is 30dBm. To have a good error rate it is recommended to keep the attenuation under 20dBm which is approximately 20km. 3.7 Propagation delay Typical propagation delay = 24.3ms.
4.
NETLINK 1095 MDSL MODEM

The simplest way to set the modem is to use the DIP switch sets. There are three DIP switch sets in total but only DIP switch sets S2 and S3 need to be set, as all of the switches on DIP switch set S1 are reserved for future use and are to be set to the On position. For DIP switch set S3, non defined switches are to be set to the off position.
4.1
DIP switch set S2 S2-6 and S2-7 control the clock configuration for the data transmission. One modem must be set as Originating, with Internal clock mode (transmit clock generated internally), and the other modem must be set as Receive, with Receive Recover clock mode (clock recovered from the received data). Clock Mode Internal External Receive Recover Disabled Example:
Switch 2 ON
Switch 2 ON
Description Transmit clock generated internally Transmit clock derived from the P521 Transmit clock derived from the line Reserved
S2-6 On Off On Off
S2-7 On On Off Off
1-5 reserved internal clocking

P2102ENa
1-5 reserved Transmit clock derived from line interface

P2103ENa
End A - Originating 4.2 DIP switch set S3
End B - Receive
S3 controls the data rate between the modem and the P521. The most appropriate rate for this is 64kbits/s. All other data rates are unsuitable for the P521.

Switch 3 ON
DTE rate of 64 kbits/s

P2104ENa
4.3
Line requirements Transmission Distance No Cross Talk Link Rate (kbps) 144 64 DTE Rates 26 AWG (0.4mm) km 6.6 24 AWG (0.5mm) km 9.4
4.4
Propagation delay Typical propagation delay = 2.3ms.
5.

The simplest way to set the modem is to use the DIP switch sets. There are 2 DIP switch sets in total. Non defined switches are to be set to the off position.
5.1
DIP switch set S1 S1-1 and S1-2 control the data rate between the modem and the P521. The most appropriate rate for this is 64kbits/s. Sync Data Rate 56 kbps 64 kbps S1-1 Off On S1-2 On Off
S1-6 and S1-7 control the clock configuration for the data transmission. One modem must be set as Originating, with Internal clock mode (transmit clock generated internally), and the other modem must be set as Receive, with Receive Recover clock mode (clock recovered from the received data). Clock Mode Internal External Receive Recover Disabled Description Transmit clock generated internally Transmit clock derived from the P521 Transmit clock derived from the line Reserved S1-6 On Off On Off S1-7 On On Off Off
Modem Configuration MiCOM P521 5.2 DIP switch set S2
S2-4 selects either 2-wire or 4-wire operation. For 2-wire operation, it should be set Off.
End A - Originating (Internal clock mode)

Switch 1 ON
Switch 2 ON
8
P2248ENa
8
P2249ENb
End B - Receive (Receive recover clock mode)

Switch 1 ON
Switch 2 ON
8
P2250ENa
8
P2249ENb
5.3
Line requirements Wire Gauge 19 AWG 22 AWG 24 AWG 26AWG Wire Diameter 0.9mm 0.64mm 0.5mm 0.4mm Distance 17.2km 11.5km 8km 5.5km
5.4
Relay settings for 2 wire 1092A modem Relay Setting Protocol Data Rate Clock Source CH1 NRZ 64K (as recommended above) External Value
5.5
6.

The simplest way to set the modem is to use the DIP switch sets. There are 2 DIP switch sets in total. Non defined switches are to be set to the off position.
6.1
DIP switch set S1 S1-1 and S1-2 control the data rate between the modem and the P521. The most appropriate rate for this is 64kbits/s. Sync Data Rate 56 kbps 64 kbps S1-1 Off On S1-2 On Off
S1-6 and S1-7 control the clock configuration for the data transmission. One modem must be set as Originating, with Internal clock mode (transmit clock generated internally), and the other modem must be set as Receive, with Receive Recover clock mode (clock recovered from the received data). Clock Mode Internal External Receive Recover Disabled 6.2 DIP switch set S2 S2-4 selects either 2-wire or 4-wire operation. For 4-wire operation, it should be set On. Description Transmit clock generated internally Transmit clock derived from the P521 Transmit clock derived from the line Reserved S1-6 On Off On Off S1-7 On On Off Off
End A - Originating (Internal clock mode)

Switch 1 ON Switch 2 ON
8
P2252ENb
8
P2253ENb
End B - Receive (Receive recover clock mode)

Switch 1 ON Switch 2 ON
8
P2254ENb
8
P2255ENb
6.3
Line requirements Wire Gauge 19 AWG 22 AWG 24 AWG 26AWG Wire Diameter 0.9mm 0.64mm 0.5mm 0.4mm Distance 18.2km 12.1km 8.5km 5.7km
6.4
Relay settings for 4 wire 1092A modem Relay Setting Protocol Data Rate Clock Source CH1 NRZ 64K (as recommended above) External Value
6.5
7.
7.1
P595
See separate P595 manual (P595/EN M). Propagation delay Typical propagation delay = 1.08ms.
8.
WIRE PARAMETERS
Wire Gauge 19 AWG 22 AWG 24 AWG 26AWG Capacitance 51.5nF/km 51.5nF/km 51.5nF/km 51.5nF/km Resistance 53.45/km 106.96/km 169.46/km 273.86/km
Accessories MiCOM P521
P521/EN AC/C31
ACCESSORIES
8th November 2005 2 10P52101
P521/EN AC/C31
P521/EN AC/C31 Page 1/8
CONTENTS
1. 2. 3.
3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4 3.1.5 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5
INTRODUCTION ACCESSORIES ORDER CODES MT-RS485 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE

Interface details Transmission rate Transmission method Nominal discharge current Output voltage limiting Response time Environmental conditions Temperature range Enclosure protection Mounting and connection Weight Case design Case dimensions Installation position Terminations
3 3 4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4.
4.1 4.2
PCM-FLU 10KV OR 20KV ISOLATING TRANSFORMERS

General data Connection diagrams
5
5 5
5.
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4
P520L LOOPBACK TEST BOX

Function of loopback test box General data Battery data Circuit diagram
6
6 7 7 8
FIGURES
Figure 1: Figure 2: Figure 3: Figure 4: PCM-FL isolating transformer 20 kV PCM-FL isolating transformer 10 kV Application of P520L loopback test box Circuit diagram for P520L loopback test box 5 6 7 8
1.
INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains technical data for the MT-RS485 surge protection device and the PCM-FL isolating transformers. For information regarding the P59x interface units refer to publication AUTOMATION-L3-P59x-BR. For information regarding the P595 Interface Device, refer to manual P595/EN M.
2.
ACCESSORIES ORDER CODES

The following table contains ordering details for all accessories: Description MT-RS485 Surge Protection Module P595 Interface Device EIA485 interface (to P521) 850nm fiber interface (to P521) Campus 1092A baseband modem 48VDC power supply AC/DC power supply Isolating Transformer 10kV 20kV P520L Loopback Test Box Interface card of P521 (for spare/upgrade) EIA232 EIA485 850nm multi-mode fiber 1300nm multi-mode fiber 1300nm single-mode fiber Note: GN0230002 GN0230010 GN0230004 GN0230006 GN0230008 PCM-FLU10 PCM-FLU20 VA0041010 MODEM1092 MODEM1092/A/B/UI P5951510A P5951540A MT-RS485 Order Code
The P595 Interface Device is identical to the AREVA T&D PZ511 interface except that the P595 has accessible setting switches. The switch settings are detailed in the P595 Interface Device manual, P595/EN M.
3.
3.1 3.1.1
MT-RS485 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE

Interface details Transmission rate Maximum baud rate of 64kbps.
3.1.2
Transmission method Half or full duplex.
3.1.3
Nominal discharge current d,nom (8/20s) : 10kA.
3.1.4
Output voltage limiting At 1kV/s : <22V (sym./asym. [GND]). <650V (asym. [PE]).
3.1.5
Response time tr : <1ns (sym./asym. [GND]). <100ns (asym. [PE]).
3.2 3.2.1
Environmental conditions Temperature range Operating Temperature : -20C to +60C or -4F to 140F.
3.2.2
Enclosure protection IP20 according to DIN VDE 0470 and EN 60529 or IEC 529.
3.3 3.3.1
Mounting and connection Weight Approximately 150g.
3.3.2
Case design Suitable for installation on a top-hat rail per DIN EN 50022.
3.3.3
Case dimensions 50mm x 55mm x 75mm (W x H x D).
3.3.4
Installation position Vertical 180.
3.3.5
Terminations Threaded terminal ends M3. Self-centering, with wire protection for conductor cross sections up to 2.5mm2.
4.
4.1
PCM-FLU 10KV OR 20KV ISOLATING TRANSFORMERS

General data PCM-FLU Transformation ratio Matching Frequency range Operating loss Common mode symmetry loss DC winding resistance Isolation level Note: 10kV (Taps a to m) 1:1 150 : 150 6kHz to 2MHz 0.4dB >52dB at 552kHz <0.5 10kV for 10 seconds at 50Hz 20kV (Taps a to m) 1:1 150 : 150 6kHz to 2MHz 0.4dB >52dB at 552kHz <0.5 20kV for 10 seconds at 50Hz
Taps a to b (on both primary and secondary) of the 10kV isolating transformer should NOT be used for any P521 application. The frequency range for the isolating transformer, when connected a to b, will be limited to 6kHz, thus causing unreliable communications at any of the selectable baud rates.
4.2
Connection diagrams
approx 173.5 95.5 60 46.75
89.5
A1 E2
104 87
E1 A2
6 30 Dimensions in mm
P2110ENb
Figure 1:
PCM-FL isolating transformer 20 kV
P2112ENa
Figure 2:
PCM-FL isolating transformer 10 kV
5.
P520L LOOPBACK TEST BOX

Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the content of the Safety and Technical Data sections and the rating on the equipments rating label.
Live parts exposed within the P521 case, when the P521 module is removed.
Before inserting the P520L loopback test box into the P521 case, ensure that supplies above 50Vrms or 75Vdc are de-energized. 5.1 Function of loopback test box In the unlikely event that a P521 relay has a failure in the protection communications hardware, it is desirable to determine if the fault is located in the active part (withdrawable part) of the relay or in the protection communications card. If the fault is within the active part only, this can be sent back for repair whilst leaving the relay case in situ. If, however, the fault is on the protection communications card the whole relay, including the relay case, needs to be sent back for repair. The P520L loopback test box facilitates the fault location process by attaching to the protection communications card in the back of the relay case (see Figure 3). For a complete description of the fault location procedure please refer to the Equipment Failure section of the Commissioning and Maintenance document (P521/EN CM).
Loopback Test Box
Green Test LED Fuse Holder 100MAF 250V

BATT TS T LOOPBA CK OFF
Test Mode Switch Relay Case
Protection Comms Card

Figure 3: 5.2 Application of P520L loopback test box
P1250ENc
General data The P520L loopback test box has a 3 position switch: BATTERY TEST OFF LOOPBACK TEST
Selecting the BATTERY TEST momentary position will illuminate the green LED if the battery is healthy. It is recommended that the battery is checked before a loopback test is performed. The LOOPBACK TEST option should be selected once the test box is securely attached to the protection communications card. The LED should illuminate if the test box is correctly fitted. The OFF position should be selected during storage of the loopback test box in order to prevent unnecessary battery drain. 5.3 Battery data A PP3 (9V) battery must be used to power the P520L loopback test box.
P521/EN AC/C31 Page 8/8 5.4 Circuit diagram
48-Way Connector
A B C 1 2 9V In 3 4 1k0 LED Batt. Test Off Loopback 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
P1459ENb
Voltage Regulator
VR
5V Out
Fuse 100mAF 250V 9V
For safety reasons the fuse must only be replaced by one with the ratings and type marked
Figure 4:
Circuit diagram for P520L loopback test box
Commissioning Test and Record Sheets MiCOM P521
P521/EN RS/B21
COMMISSIONING TEST AND RECORD SHEETS
8th November 2005 2 10P52101
P521/EN RS/B21
P521/EN RS/B21 Page 1/26
CONTENTS
1. 2.
2.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.4.5 2.4.6 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.5.5 2.5.6
COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD SETTING RECORD

OP Parameters Configuration Display CT ratios LED Group select Alarms Configuration inputs Phase rotation Communication Ctrl comms (MODBUS protocol) Ctrl comms (IEC60870-5-103 protocol) Protection Protection G1/G2 [87] Current diff [50/51] Phase O/C [50N/51N] E/Gnd [46] Neg seq OC [49] Therm OL [37] Undercurrent Automat. ctrl Trip commands Latch functions I-Trip commands Blocking logic 1/2 Logic select 1/2 Output relays
3 13
13 13 13 14 14 15 15 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 17 17 18 19 19 19 19 20 20 21 21 22
P521/EN RS/B21 Page 2/26 2.5.7 2.5.8 2.5.9 Latch output relays Invert output relays Inputs 1/2/3/4/5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheets MiCOM P521 22 23 23 24 24 24 25 25 25 25 25 25
2.5.10 Brkn. cond 2.5.11 Cold load pu 2.5.12 CB fail 2.5.13 CB supervision 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 Records Disturb record Disturb record Time peak value Rolling demand
1.
COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD

Date: Station: Engineer: Circuit: System Frequency: Front Plate Information Current differential protection relay Model number Serial number Auxiliary voltage Vx Test Equipment Used This section should be completed to allow future identification of protective devices that have been commissioned using equipment that is later found to be defective or incompatible but may not be detected during the commissioning procedure. Overcurrent test set Optical power meter Insulation tester Setting software: Model: Serial No: Model: Serial No: Model: Serial No: Type: Version: P521
Commissioning Test and Record Sheets MiCOM P521 Have all relevant safety instructions been followed? Yes No
4. 4.1 4.1.1
PRODUCT CHECKS With the relay de-energized Visual inspection Relay damaged? Rating information correct for installation? Case earth installed? Current transformer shorting contacts close? Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No
Not checked Yes Not tested No
4.1.2
Insulation resistance >100M at 500V dc
4.1.3
External wiring Wiring checked against diagram? Test block connections checked? Yes Yes N/A No No
4.1.4
Watchdog contact (auxiliary supply off) Terminals 35 and 36 Contact closed? Contact resistance Watchdog Contact (auxiliary supply on) Terminals 35 and 36 Contact open? Yes No V ac/dc Yes Not measured No
4.1.5
Measured auxiliary supply
4.2 4.2.1
With the relay energized Date and time Clock set to local time? Time maintained when auxiliary supply removed? Yes Yes No No
Commissioning Test and Record Sheets MiCOM P521 4.2.2 4.2.2.1 Light emitting diodes Relay healthy (green) LED working? Warning (orange) LED working? Alarm (yellow) LED working? Trip (red) LED working? All 4 programmable (red) LEDs working? 4.2.3 Input opto-isolators Opto input 1 working? Opto input 2 working? Opto input 3 working? Opto input 4 working? Opto input 5 working? 4.2.4 Output relays Relay 1 Working? Contact resistance (N/C) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No No No No
No No No No No
No Not measured Not measured
(N/O) Relay 2 Working? Contact resistance (N/C) Yes
No Not measured Not measured
(N/O) Relay 3 Working? Contact resistance Relay 4 Working? Contact resistance Yes Yes
No Not measured No Not measured
P521/EN RS/B21 Page 6/26 Relay 5 Working? Contact resistance Relay 6 Working? Contact resistance Relay 7 Working? Contact resistance
Commissioning Test and Record Sheets MiCOM P521 Yes Not measured Yes Not measured Yes Not measured Yes N/A Contact resistance Not measured MODBUS No No No No
Relay 8
Working?
4.2.5
Communication standard Communications established? Protocol converter tested?
IEC60870-5-103 DNP 3.0 Yes Yes N/A No No
4.2.6
Current differential protection communications Dedicated fiber Via P59x Type of communications: EIA(RS)485 EIA(RS)232 Modem
4.2.6.1
Direct fiber communication Communication working? Yes N/A No
Commissioning Test and Record Sheets MiCOM P521 4.2.6.2 Direct EIA(RS)485 Communication working? Yes N/A
No
4.2.6.3
EIA(RS)232 Communication working? Yes N/A No
4.2.6.4
Communication using modems Unit damaged? Communication working? Yes Yes N/A No No
4.2.6.5
Communication using P595 Unit damaged? Communication working? Yes Yes N/A No No
4.2.6.x.1
Visual inspection (P59x units only) Unit damaged? Channel 1 unit Rating information correct? Channel 1 unit Yes N/A No Yes N/A No
Case earth installed? Channel 1 unit Yes N/A No
4.2.6.x.2
Insulation resistance (P59x units only) Yes Channel 1 unit Not tested N/A No
P521/EN RS/B21 Page 8/26 4.2.6.x.3 External wiring (P59x units only) Wiring checked against diagram? Channel 1 unit
Yes N/A
No
4.2.6.x.4
Measured auxiliary supply (P59x units only) V dc Channel 1 unit N/A All LEDs working? Channel 1 unit Yes N/A No V ac
4.2.6.x.5
Loopback test Signal strength received by P59x Channel 1 unit dBm N/A
Signal strength transmitted by P59x Channel 1 unit Signal Strength within tolerance dBm N/A Yes N/A No
Loopback test applied? Channel 1 unit Communications working Yes N/A Yes N/A No No
4.2.7
Current inputs Displayed Current Phase CT Ratio Earth Fault CT Ratio CT Correction Ratio Primary Secondary N/A N/A N/A
Commissioning Test and Record Sheets MiCOM P521 Input CT A B C N 5. 5.1 5.2.1.2 5.2.1.3 5.2.2 SETTING CHECKS Application-specific function settings applied? Current differential lower slope pickup Current differential upper slope pickup Current differential operating time Current Differential Phase A trip time Current Differential Phase B trip time Current Differential Phase C trip time 5.2.3 5.2.3.2 5.2.3.3 Backup phase overcurrent protection enabled? Applied current Expected operating time Measured operating time 6. 6.1 END TO END TESTS Remove the loopback test Communications alarms? Loopback test removed? All connections restored? Application-specific settings applied? Cover replaced? (P59x units only) 6.2 6.2.1 Verify communications between relays Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Applied value A A A A
P521/EN RS/B21 Page 9/26 Displayed value A A A A
No A A
s s s No A s s
No No No No No
850nm Optical port type 1300nm multi 1300nm single Signal strength received by P521 dBm N/A
P521/EN RS/B21 Page 10/26 Signal strength transmitted by P521 Signal Strength within tolerance Optical fibers reconnected? Alarms reset?
Commissioning Test and Record Sheets MiCOM P521 dBm N/A Yes N/A Yes Yes Direct EIA(RS)485 No No No
6.2.2
Metallic communications
P595 EIA(RS)232 Modem
Transmit and receive leads reconnected? Alarms reset? 7. ON-LOAD CHECKS Test wiring removed? Disturbed customer wiring re-checked? On-load test performed? 7.1 Confirm current transformer wiring CT wiring checked? CT polarities correct? Phase CT ratio Earth fault CT ratio Currents: A B C N Applied value A A A A N/A
Yes Yes
No No
Yes N/A Yes N/A Yes
No No No
Yes N/A Yes
No No N/A N/A
Displayed value A A A A N/A
Commissioning Test and Record Sheets MiCOM P521 7.2 Capacitive charging current Measured capacitive charging current A phase B phase C phase Differential setting S1 7.3 7.4 Differential current checked? Consistency of current transformer polarity Polarity at each end consistent? A phase B phase C phase 8. FINAL CHECKS Test wiring removed? Disturbed customer wiring re-checked? Commissioning test mode disabled? Circuit breaker operations counter reset? Current counters reset? Event records reset? Fault records reset? Disturbance records reset? Alarms reset? LEDs reset? Front cover replaced? Yes N/A Yes N/A Yes Yes N/A Yes N/A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes N/A Yes Yes Yes Yes
A A A A No
No No No
No No No No No No No No No No No
Commissioning Engineer
Customer Witness
Date:
Date:
2.
SETTING RECORD
Date: Station: Engineer: Circuit: System Frequency: Front Plate Information Current Differential Protection Relay Model Number Serial Number Auxiliary Voltage Vx *Delete as appropriate Setting Groups Used Group 1 Group 2 Yes Yes No No P521
2.1
OP Parameters Description Reference Model Number Software Version Frequency
2.2 2.2.1
Configuration Display Default Display Phase A Text Phase B Text Phase C Text E/Gnd Text
P521/EN RS/B21 Page 14/26 2.2.2 CT ratios Line CT primary Line CT sec E/Gnd CT primary E/Gnd CT sec CT Correct Ratio Vector Comp. 2.2.3 LED
Functions diff diff Fail B/up Prot Comms Fail Direct I-Trip C-Diff I-Trip PT > t> >> t>> >>> t>>> >>>> t>>>> e> te> e>> te>> e>>> te>>> e>>>> te>>>> Therm Trip Brkn. Cond. CB Fail t2> t2>>
LED 5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Functions Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 tAux 1 tAux 2 CB Alarm
P521/EN RS/B21 Page 15/26 LED 5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No LED 6 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No LED 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No LED 8 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No
2.2.4
Group select Change Group Input
2.2.5
Alarms Inst. Self-reset? Alarm Battery
2.2.6
Configuration inputs Inputs Voltage Input
2.2.7
Phase rotation Phase rotation
2.3 2.3.1
Communication Ctrl comms (MODBUS protocol) Ctrl Comms? Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Relay Address Date format
P521/EN RS/B21 Page 16/26 2.3.2 Ctrl comms (IEC60870-5-103 protocol) Ctrl Comms? Data Bits Relay Address 2.3.3 Protection Protocol Data Rate Relay Address Clock Source Ch1 Comm Fail Timer Comms Delay Tol Char Mod Time 2.4 2.4.1 Protection G1/G2 [87] Current diff Functions Current Diff? s1 s2 K1 K2 Diff Delay Type tdiff Diff Curve Diff Tms Diff Time Dial PT Time PT Disable DIT Rx tDwell Inrush Restraint High Set Group 1
Group 2
Commissioning Test and Record Sheets MiCOM P521 2.4.2 [50/51] Phase O/C Functions >? > > Delay Type > Curve > Tms t> Reset Type K tReset Time Dial >>? >> t>> Delay Type >> Curve >> Tms t>> Reset Type K tReset Time Dial >>>? >>> t>>> >>>>? >>>> t>>>> 2.4.3 [50N/51N] E/Gnd Functions e>? e> e> Delay Type e> Curve e> Tms Group 1 Group 1
Group 2
Group 2
P521/EN RS/B21 Page 18/26 Functions te> Reset Type K tReset Time Dial e>>? e>> te>> Delay Type e> Curve e>> Tms te>> Reset Type K tReset Time Dial e>>>? e>>> te>>> e>>>>? e>>>> te>>>> 2.4.4 [46] Neg seq OC Functions 2>? 2> 2> Delay Type 2> Curve 2> Tms t2> Reset Type K tReset Time Dial t Reset Group 1 Group 1
Commissioning Test and Record Sheets MiCOM P521 Group 2
Group 2
Commissioning Test and Record Sheets MiCOM P521 Functions 2>>? 2>> t2>> 2.4.5 [49] Therm OL Functions Therm OL? > Te k Trip Alarm? Alarm 2.4.6 [37] Undercurrent Functions <? < t< 2.5 2.5.1 Automat. ctrl Trip commands Trip diff Direct -Trip C Diff -Trip PT Trip t> Trip t>> Trip t>>> Trip t>>>> Trip te> Trip te>> Trip te>>> Trip te>>>> Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Group 1 Group 1 Group 1
P521/EN RS/B21 Page 19/26 Group 2
Group 2
Group 2
No No No No No No No No No No No No
P521/EN RS/B21 Page 20/26 Trip t< Trip t2> Trip t2>> Trip Thermal Trip Brkn. Cond. Trip tAux1 Trip tAux1 2.5.2 Latch functions Latch diff Latch Direct -Trip Latch C Diff -Trip Latch PT Latch t> Latch t>> Latch t>>> Latch t>>>> Latch te> Latch te>> Latch te>>> Latch te>>>> Latch t< Latch t2> Latch t2>> Latch Thermal Latch Brkn. Cond. Latch tAux1 Latch tAux1 2.5.3 I-Trip commands I-Trip tI> I-Trip tI>> I-Trip tI>>> I-Trip tI>>>> I-Trip tIe> Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Commissioning Test and Record Sheets MiCOM P521 No No No No No No No
No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
No No No No No
Commissioning Test and Record Sheets MiCOM P521 I-Trip tIe>> I-Trip tIe>>> I-Trip tIe>>>> I-Trip tI< I-Trip tI2> I-Trip tI2>> I-Trip Thermal I-Trip Brkn. Cond I-Trip tAux1 I-Trip tAux2 I-Trip CB Fail 2.5.4 Blocking logic 1/2 Functions Block diff Block t> Block t>> Block t>>> Block t>>>> Block te> Block te>> Block te>>> Block te>>>> Block t2> Block t2>> Block Thermal Block Brkn. Cond. Block tAux 1 Block tAux 2 2.5.5 Logic select 1/2 Functions Sel t>> Sel t>>> Sel t>>>> Sel te>> Logic Select 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Blocking Logic 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
P521/EN RS/B21 Page 21/26 No No No No No No No No No No No
Blocking Logic 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
Logic Select 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No
P521/EN RS/B21 Page 22/26 Functions Sel te>>> Sel te>>>> tSel 1 2.5.6 Output relays Functions Trip Diff Back-up Prot. Comms Fail Direct -Trip C-Diff -Trip PT > t> >> t>> >>> t>>> >>>> t>>>> e> te> e>> 2.5.7 Latch output relays Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Setting Functions te>> e>>> te>>> e>>>> te>>>> t< t2> t2>> Therm Alarm Therm Trip CB Alarm 52 Fail Brkn. Cond. CB fail CB Close tAux1 tAux2 Active Group Logic Select 1 Yes Yes No No
Commissioning Test and Record Sheets MiCOM P521 Logic Select 2 Yes Yes No No
Setting
No No No No No No No
Commissioning Test and Record Sheets MiCOM P521 2.5.8 Invert output relays Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 2.5.9 Inputs 1/2/3/4/5 None Unlatch 52a Input 1 52b Comms RST Aux 1 Aux 2 None Unlatch 52a Input 2 52b Comms RST Aux 1 Aux 2 None Unlatch 52a Input 3 52b Comms RST Aux 1 Aux 2 None Unlatch 52a Input 4 52b Comms RST Aux 1 Aux 2 Blk Log 1 Blk Log 2 Start Dist Cold L PU Log sel 1 Log sel 2 Change Set Blk Log 1 Blk Log 2 Start Dist Cold L PU Log sel 1 Log sel 2 Change Set Blk Log 1 Blk Log 2 Start Dist Cold L PU Log sel 1 Log sel 2 Change Set Blk Log 1 Blk Log 2 Start Dist Cold L PU Log sel 1 Log sel 2 Change Set Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No No No No No No
Reset Trip circ Strt tBF Permiss IT Direct IT Log Trip Log Close Reset Trip circ Strt tBF Permiss IT Direct IT Log Trip Log Close Reset Trip circ Strt tBF Permiss IT Direct IT Log Trip Log Close Reset Trip circ Strt tBF Permiss IT Direct IT Log Trip Log Close
P521/EN RS/B21 Page 24/26 None Unlatch 52a Input 5 52b Comms RST Aux 1 Aux 2 Aux 1 Time tAux1 Aux 2 Time tAux2 2.5.10 Brkn. cond Brkn. Cond? Brkn. Cond. Time tBC Ratio 2/1 2.5.11 Cold load pu Cold Load PU? t>? t>>? t>>>? t>>>>? te>? te>>? te>>>? te>>>>? t2>? t2>>? t Therm? Cold Load PU Level Cold Load tCL 2.5.12 CB fail CB Fail? < = CB Fail Time tBF Block > Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Blk Log 1 Blk Log 2 Start Dist Cold L PU Log sel 1 Log sel 2 Change Set
Commissioning Test and Record Sheets MiCOM P521 Reset Trip circ Strt tBF Permiss IT Direct IT Log Trip Log Close
No No No No No No No No No No No No
Commissioning Test and Record Sheets MiCOM P521 Block e> 2.5.13 CB supervision TC Supervision? t tripcircuit tSUP CB Open Svision CB Open Time CB Close Svision CB Close Time CB Close Alarm? CB Open NB Amps(n)? Amps(n) n t Open Pulse t Close Pulse CB Man Trip Dly CB Man Close Dly 2.6 2.6.1 Records Disturb record Pre-time Post-time Disturb Rec Trig 2.6.2 Disturb record Pre-time Post-time Disturb Rec Trig 2.6.3 Time peak value Time Window 2.6.4 Rolling demand Sub Period Num of Sub Per
Commissioning Engineer
Customer Witness
Date:
Date:
Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P521
P521/EN VC/C31
HARDWARE/SOFTWARE VERSION HISTORY AND COMPATIBILITY
8th November 2005 2 10P52101
Relay type: P521 Software Version Major Minor A B Hardware Suffix A A Original Date of Issue Jul 2003 Oct 2003 Original Issue Current differential blocking logic functionality changed to inhibit protection timer when blocking enabled. This fix prevents the current differential from mal-tripping upon removal of the blocking input Modification to ensure that the loopback alarm is re-instated following an interruption to the auxiliary supply Enhancement to prevent both manual trip and close commands from operating simultaneously Modification to summation amps function in order to improve measurement accuracy 1 C A Apr 2004 Correction to fault records to include the magnitude of negative sequence current when the 2>> element operates Modification to allow fault records to be acknowledged via remote communications Improvements made to setting group 2 dependencies to ensure all menu cells are displayed correctly Enhancement to allow the contact test, in the commissioning menu, to be operated via remote communications Correction to ensure that the TMS settings are not overwritten with the time dial settings when downloading a setting file via MiCOM S1 D A Jun 2004 Correction to ensure erroneous DIFF FAIL alarms not generated V2.09 or Later P521/EN AD/B21 Description of Changes S1 Compatibility V2.09 or Later V2.09 or Later Technical Documentation P521/EN M/B11 P521/EN M/B11
V2.09 or Later
P521/EN M/B11
P521/EN VC/C31
Page 1/4
Page 2/4
P521/EN VC/C31
Relay type: P521 Software Version Major Minor Hardware Suffix Original Date of Issue Description of Changes k1 setting minimum value changed to 0 % Vector compensation added for transformer applications High Set added for inrush restraint Selective intertripping added 2 A A Jun 2005 Output contact inversion settings added Extended protection communication addresses (increased to 20) Correction to ensure new alarms do cause front panel LCD to jump to alarms display, unless on default display IEC60870-5-103 GI expanded and sequence corrected B A Nov 2005 Improved compatibility with P59x units V2.11 or Later P521/EN M/C31 V2.11 or Later P521/EN M/C31 S1 Compatibility Technical Documentation
Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P521 Page 3/4
P521/EN VC/C31
Relay Software Version

1 1 2
Setting File Software Version
Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P521 Information Required with Order P
MiCOM Range Protection Device Type Current Differential Platform x20 Platform Model Standard (2 ended) E/F Current 0.1 - 40 on 0.01 - 8 on 0.002 - 1 on Protection Communication EIA232 EIA485 850nm 1300nm (multi mode) 1300nm (single mode) Auxiliary Power Supply & Digital Input Voltage 24 - 60 Vdc 48 - 150Vdc 130 - 250 Vdc / 100 250 Vac 48 - 150 Vdc (ENA assessed for UK utility use) 130 - 250 Vdc (ENA assessed for UK utility use) Communication Protocol MODBUS IEC60870-5-103 Language French English Spanish German Italian Polish A B C D E P
P521/EN VC/C31 Page 4 of 4
A B C
A F M T U
1 3
0 1 2 3 4 6
Publication: P521/EN M/C31

AREVA T&D's Automation & Information Systems Business www.areva-td.com T&D Worldwide Contact Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/contactcentre/

P521 en M C31

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

P521 en M C31

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

P521 en M C31

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MiCOM P521

Current Differential Relay

PRODUCT SAFETY AND AWARENESS

Caution: refer to equipment documentation

Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal.

Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions

Menu Content Tables

Technical Data and Curve Characteristics

Commissioning and Maintenance Guide

Documentation Update MiCOM P521

P521/EN M/C31 Page 1/12

DOCUMENTATION UPDATE FROM VERSION 1A TO 2A

2.3 2.4 3.2

3.4.2 3.5 3.5.1

4.5.2 P521/EN HI/B21 P521/EN TD/C31 1.1 -

1.6 6.2 9.1 10.13

2.1.1 2.1.5.3 2.1.7

24 2.2 2.2.3.1 2.2.5 25 - 26 27 28 - 29

2.4.1 2.4.4 2.5

5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5

5.5.2 5.5.3 5.6

2.3.3.3 3.1 3.3.1 3.3.2

3.3.3 3.3.7 3.3.7.2

3.3.8 3.3.8.1 3.3.8.2

3.4 3.5.1.3 3.6.1.4 3.7.3.3 4.3.1

5.3 P521/EN CM/C31 4.2.5 4.2.5.3 4.2.6.1

9.4.2 P521/EN MC/C31 1. 2. 3.

4.1.1 4.3 5. 5.1 5.1.1

5.4 6. 6.1 6.2 6.3

6.2.2 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.3.1

Introduction MiCOM P521

Date: Software Version: Connection Diagrams:

8th November 2005 2 10P52101

Introduction MiCOM P521

Introduction MiCOM P521

P521/EN IT/A11 Page 1/6

P521/EN IT/A11 Page 2/6

Introduction MiCOM P521

Introduction MiCOM P521

P521/EN IT/A11 Page 3/6

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

All wiring connections to the relay. P521/EN MC Modem Configuration

P521/EN IT/A11 Page 4/6

Introduction MiCOM P521

INTRODUCTION TO THE MICOM P521

Introduction MiCOM P521

P521/EN IT/A11 Page 5/6

P521/EN IT/A11 Page 6/6

Introduction MiCOM P521

Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions MiCOM P521

HANDLING, INSTALLATION AND CASE DIMENSIONS

Date: Software Version: Connection Diagrams:

8th November 2005 2 10P52101

Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions MiCOM P521

Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions MiCOM P521

P521/EN IN/B21 Page 1/6

HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RELAY MOUNTING UNPACKING STORAGE CASE DIMENSIONS

P521/EN IN/B21 Page 2/6